The University o/Newcastle Campus Layout · 2010-12-06 · The University o/Newcastle Campus Layout AtIorlglnaJ Education Centre· WoIlotuka Academic OffIce Block Advanced Technology

The University o/Newcastle Campus Layout

AtIorlglnaJ Education Centre· WoIlotuka Academic OffIce Block Advanced Technology Centre Animal House ArchItecture Architecture Drawing Studios An Aviation Behavioural Sciences Building Biological Sciences Bowman Building esc Building (Red Square) CAlT-(Centre for Advanced Learning & Teaching) Ceramics Chancellery (Central Administration) Chemistry Building Child Care Centre· Klntaiba Child care Centre· Work Based Child care Centre - Wonnayba Commonwealth Bank Computing and Information Sciences Design Building Drama Studios Drama Theatre Edwards Hall Engineering Administration Engineering Bulk Solids Engineering Chemical & Materials Engineering Civil & Surveying Engineering Classrooms Engineering Electrical & Computer

• Engineering Mechanical Engineering Science (0 W George) Evan House General Purpose Building Geology Building Graduate Studios Great Hall Griffith Duncan Theatre Hunter Building Hunter Technology Centre Intemational House

PoE AOB ATC AN A ADS AT AV W B 88 SSC CAlT

CE CH C CCK CC8 CCW C8 CT o OS DT EH EA EG E8 ED EF EE EC ES EV GP G GS GH H H HTC I

Lecture Theatre :B Lecture Theatre :Basden Lecture Theatre :E Ubrary - Auchmuty Ubrary - Huxley Maintenance Workshop Mathematics Building McMullin Building Medical Sciences Building

81 8A E l LH MW V MC MS

()M~ o ~ !l) S 0 ~ t:j ~ ~ ;:J 0 -~::$q 8 :::. 0 ~ &3 ~

[

Physical Planning & Stores Building Physics Building Radio 2NUR FM Richardson Wing Security Science Building Sculpture Workshop SocIal Sciences Building Special Education Centre Sports Centre - Auchmuty Sports Gymnasium - Hunter Sports Pavilion Staff Hoose Temporary Office Buildings TUNRA TUNRA Annexe University Union - Hunter University Union - Shonland Visual ArtslMedia Studies Wetlands Pavilion

m ~ (I)

~ ~.

~ ~.

~ ~

~ :::t (I)

SER P V RW GH SB SW S~ SE SC GY SP SH TB AV TA UH US VA WP

THE UNIVERSITY OF NEWCASTLE

New South Wale.. Au8traUa

Location Address _ University Drive, Callaghan

Postal Address

Telephone

Telex

_ lbe University of Newcastle NSW 2308

_ (049) 21.5000

_ AA28194 - Ubrary

_ AA28618 - Bursar

_ AA2B784 - TUNRA (111e University of Newcastle Research Associates UmttedJ

Facsimile _ (049) 21.6922

Hours of Business _ Mondays to Fridays excepting publtc holidays 9amto5pm

The UnlvereUy of Newcutle Calendar cOD.I.ta of the following volume.:

Volume 1 -Volume 2 -Volume 3 -Volume 4 -Volume 5 -Volume 6 -Volume 7 -Volume 8 -Volume 9 -

Legislatton

University Bodies and Staff

Faculty of Architecture Handbook

Faculty of Art. Design and CommWl1caUon Handbook

Faculty of Arts Handbook

Faculty of Economics and Commerce Handbook

Faculty of Education Handbook

Faculty of Engineering Handbook

Faculty of Health Sciences Handbook

Volume 10 _ Faculty of Law Handbook

Volume 11 _ Faculty of Medicine Handbook

Volume 12 _ Faculty of Music Handbook

Volume 13 _ Faculty of Nursing Handbook

Volume 14 _ Faculty of Science and Mathematics Handbook

Volume 15 _ Faculty of Social Science Handbook

Also available are the Undergraduate Guides

This Volume 1s intended as a reference handbook for students enrolling in

courses conducted by the Faculty oj Ecorwmics and Commerre.

© nte University of Newcastle 1993

ISSN 0 I 59 - 348X

The colour band Tourquoise BCC118 on the cover Is the lining colour of the hood of Bachelors oJCommerre of this University.

The infonnation tn this Handbook is correct as at 23 September 1993.

Recommended Price _ F1ve dollars and filty cents plus postage.

Designed by _ Marie-T Wisniowsld. Medical Communication Unit

'l);peset by _ Jan Spurr. Office of the University Secretary

Printed by _ The Pot Still Press Pty Ltd. Artarrnon. Sydney

section one

section two

section three

FACULTY OF ECONOMICS AND COIoWERCE

Faculty Staff

~F~a~cu=l~ty~ln~f~o~rm~at=io~n~ ____________ ~ ....

Information for new Undergraduates

Professional recognition

Advisory Prerequisite for Entry to the Faculty

Student Participation In Unlverlsty Malrs

Student Academic Progress

Student Problems

Examination Results - Assessment

Institute of Industrial Economics

5

6

6

6

6

7

7

7

Rules Governing Academic Awards ..... ~--=---~----~...,

Undergraduate

Schedule - Diploma In Computer Studies

Schedule - Bachelor of Business

Schedule - Bachelor of Commerce

Schedule - Bachelor of Economics

Schedule - Bachelor of Information Sciences

Schedule - Bachelor of Law and Administration

Approved Subjects for DlpCornpStud

Approved Subjects for BBus

Approved Subjects for BCorn

Approved Subjects for BEc

Approved Subjects for BInfoSc

Approved Subjects for BLA

9

12

12

12

13

14

15

17

19

25

33

42

48

section four Approved Subjects for MBA 148

Faculty Policies Relating to Under- Rules Relattng to Masters Degrees 151

graduate and Honours Degree Master of Commerce 153

Courses Faculty Pollcles Relatlng to Postgraduate Courses 155 .. Postgraduate Subject Descrtptlons 158

Deferment 50 section seven Enrolment 50 General Information Combined Degree Courses 51 Credlt 51 Prerequisites

Prtnclpal Dates 1994 53 Advice and Information II

Examinations 53 Enrolment and Re-enrolment III Progress 54 Leave of Absence v Leave of Absence 54 Attendance at Classes v Transition Arrangements 54 General Conduct

section five v

Examinations v

Subject Descriptions ... Statements of Academic Record viU

UnsatlsfactoIY Progress - Rules vill

Guide to Subject Entrtes 58 Charges x

Commerce Subject Descriptions 59 Higher Educatlon Contrtbutlon Scheme (HECS] x

Economics Subject Descriptions 67 Loans xl

Management Subject Descriptions 89 Refund of Charges xl

Statistics Subject Descriptions 106 Campus Traffic and Parking xl

Major Subjects from Other Facultles 111 Miscellaneous Services

section six Banklng xU

eashler xlI

Rules Governing Postgraduate Chaplaincy Service xli

Courses Community Programs xli

Convocation xli

Co-op Bookshop xli

Rules Governing Academic Awards 131 Lost Property xli

Schedule 1 - Graduate Diploma in Accounting and Finance 133 Notlceboards xli

Schedule 2 - Graduate Diploma in Economic Studies 134 Post Office xli

Schedule 3 - Graduate Diploma tn Industrlal Relations 134 Publlc Transport xli

Schedule 4 - Graduate Diploma in Management 135 Student Insurance Cover xlll

Schedule 5 - Graduate Diploma In Marketlng 136 University Computing Services xlll

Schedule 6 - Graduate Diploma in Taxation Studies University Libraries xlv

136

Approved SUbjects for Diploma Courses 138

Rules Relating to the Degree of Master of Business Administration 146

1

section one

Faculty Staff

PRINCIPAL OFFICERS Visitor His Excellency, The Governor of New South Wales

Chancellor The Honourable Justice E.A. Evatt. AO. LLB. HonLLD(Syd). LLM(HalV). HonLLD(Macq). HonDUnlv

Deputy ChlUl.,.,llor P.I.A. Hendry. AO. MB BS(Syd). DCP(Lond). HonMD. FRCPA. FCAP. FAACB

Vice-Chancellor Professor RJ. Mortley. BA(Syd). MA(Monash). Dr3'cyc1e. oesUStras). FAHA(PbUos)

Deputy Vlce-ChlUlcellor Professor M.P. carter. BA(Nott). PhD(Edln)

Pro Vlce-ChllDcellor ... d De ... of Student. Professor K.R Dutton. MA(Syd). DU(Parls), FACE. Officer des Palmes academlques

Pro Vlce-ChllDcellor (Development) L.R Eastcott. BA(NSW). MEd(Syd). PbD(A1ta). DipEd

Pro Vice-Chancellor (Re.euchl Professor RJ. MacDonald. BSc. PhD(NSW). FAIP

Deputy Prealdent of the Academic Senate Professor F.L. Clarke. BEc. PhD(Sydl. FCPA. AClS. ACIM

ECONOMICS AND COMMERCE FACULTY STAFF

Dean W.C. Dunlop. BA(Auck). MCom. PhD

AllaistllDt DeRD K.M. Renfrew. BCom. BMath. BA S.E. Ryan. BSocStud(Sydl. MBA

Faculty Secretuy L.S. Harrigan. BA AdmInIstrative Officer N.J. Downing. BA. DipEd AdmInIstrative AsaI.tllDt J.L. Ebert. BA.DlpEd

Feculty of economics end Commerce

DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE

Prole ......

_nOno

F.L. Clarke. BEe. PhD(Syd). FCPA. AClS. AClM (Head or Departmeat) J.K. Wlnsen. MA. PhD(Ohio State). MCom. FCPAtrreasury) _late ProIeoeor I.G. Wallschutzky. MCom. PhD(Bath). DtpBusStud SenIor Lecturen B. Gibson. MCom. MBA, CPA. AIMM W. Motyka. MCom(NSW). FCPA J. Psaros. MCom. CPA Lecturers

M.W. Arnold. BCom. MEd(Stud). DtpEd. ASA R Day. BEd. MCom(NSW). CPA N. Hartnett. MCom. CPA, AIMM J.LoWTY.BCom.ACA C. Patel. BCom(poona). MCom(W'gong). PGCE(USP) P.A Stanton. BA(Syd). BCom. DipEd

A8eocIate Lecture .. R Lannis. BBus(urs)

G. RIchardson. BCom J. Scowcroft, BCom. ACA C. Yap. BCom. ACA

HODOrary _Iatea B.T. Colditz. FASA. ACIS. FI1l RW. Gibbins. BCom(Q·ld). ACA RB. Taylor. BCom. DtpPubAd(Syd). AASA(Senior) Departmental Office Stoft N.L. Caldwell A.L. DiSanto (Departmental Secretary) S.J. Gardner (General Library ASSistant)

DEPARTMENT OF ECONOMICS Profe ......

T.J. Considine. BA(Eeon(Loyola). MS(Purdue). PhD (Cornell) B.L.J. Gordon. MEe(Syd). DScEcon(Syd). PhD (Peraonal Cbair) D.B. Hughes. BSc.Econ.(Lond). AM. PhD (Prtn) B.J. McFarlane. BEc. MEC(Sydney) _late Profeoeora A.C. Oakley. BEc. PhD{Adel) (Head or Department) C.W. Stahl. BA(Calif State College). PhD(Caltf. Santa Barbara) SenIor Lecturen K.J. Burgess. MEe(Syd). MA(Exeter). DtpTertStud(NE) J.RG. Butler. BEe. MPoIEc. PhD(Qld) . H.W. Dtck. BEe(Monash). MEc. PhD(ANU)

J.A. Doeleman, DrsEcon(Nederlandse Economtsche Hogeschool, Rotterdam) W.C. Dunlop. BA(Auck). MCom. PhD J.R Fisher. BA. PhD(Hull) M.T. Gordon. BA(Syd). MCom. PhD

Faculty SbIff

l I

Faculty of Economics end Commerce

RH. Green. BA. LLB{Adel). PhD(Cantab) S.N. Jacobi. AB(Prtn). MA(South Carolina) G.R Keattng. MEc(NE) D.K. Macdonald. BA. MCom. PhD(NSW) R W. McShane. BA(NE). MA(Alta) W.F. Mitchell. BCom(Deakfn). MEc(Monash) P.J.C. Stanton. MA. DtpEd(Syd). PhD. DtpEd(Syd)

Section One

M.J. Watts. BA(Essex). MA(Manch). PhD(Brttish Columbia)

Lecturers P.R Anderson. BA. MCom. DtpEd(NSW) A.R Buck. BA(NSW) J.C. de Castro Lopo. MA(Wis) M.A. Hossain. BSe. MScEeon(Jahangimagar). MA(Melb). PhD(LaT) P.T. Kniest. BEc. MCom(Eeon) A. Mahmood. BA(PunJab). MSc(Quaid-i-Azam). MA. PhD(Manit) K.M. Renfrew. BCom. BMath, BA S.R Shenoy. BA(GuJar). BScEeon. MA(Lond)

. S.S. Waterman. AB(Brown). MA(Hlst). MA(Eeon)(CaliQ

AMoclate Lecturers M.J. Alexander. BEe{Adel) N. Croce. BEc J.E. Lee. BA. MEe(Flinders). DtpEd. DtpAcc(Flin)

HODOrary _late Te'o I.J. Fairbairn. MA(Wash). PhD(ANU)

Departmental Office Stoft D.E. Kite. BA. AIMM (Administrative Assistant) J.Carroll J. Hargrave R Talbot-Stokes E.G. Wtlliams

DEPARTMENT OF MANAGEMENT

Profell8Ol'

FoCUlty Stall

A.J. Williams. BCom(Tas). BEd(Melb). PhD(WAust). DipEd(Tas). GradDipAdmin(WAIT). AASA, FAIM

_late Profeaoor W.J. Merrtlees. BCom. MA. PhD(Toronto)

SenIor Lecturers B.R Cheek. BMath. MMath. DtpCompSc. MACS (Head of Department) J.C. Rappell. RFD. BBus(KCAE). MBA(NSwrn. FCPA. MlPMA G.W. Starr. BA(Syd). MA Public Administration (Carleton). PhD(West Virginia) RM. Zeffane. BScEeon(Algiers). MSc. PhD(Wales). MlPMA. MAIM

Lecturer. J. Coldwell. BSc(Wales). MSc(Hertot Watt) J. Dugas. BA. MEdStud. DtpEd. CertFilm & Television Studies(Middlesex) J. Hunt. BA. MA(Kent) G. Mankelow. BCom(NSW). MCom P. Morgan. BBus. SAMI R Noble. BA(NE). AT(OHSRC). ETC. IRC RF. Nuesink. MBA(Deakin)

Faculty of Economics and Commerce

SecHon 0.,.

M.J. Polonsky. BSe(rowson State). MA(Rutgers & Temple) B. Regan. BSe. DlpEd{Syd). DlpCompSc. MComp. MACS A. Ross-Smith. BA(NSW). MA(Macquarie) RD. Ruglmbana. BScEd(ranzanla). MBA. AFAMI. AIMM. AMMRSA S.E. Ryan. BSocStud(Syd). MBA G.Strachan. BA. PhD(Qld). DlpEd P. Summons. BE(Comp). MComp. DlpEd(NCAE). MACS M. Sutton. BSc(NSW). DlpCompSe D. Waller. BA(Syd). MCom(NSW). AAMI M.A. W1lllams. MSc. DlpCompSc(NE)

Senior Tutors J. Burns. BSc(McMaster). DlpCompSe

Departmental OffIce Staff M.I. Stegermater (Departmental Secretary) D.L. Etheridge B.L. Brossmann

DEPARTMENT OF STATISTICS Professor A.J. Dobson. BSc(Adel). MSc. PhD(Jame. Cook) Associate ProfeB80r RW. Glbberd. BSc. PhD(Adel) (Head of Department) Senior Lecturer K.G.B. Dear. MA(Cantab). MSe. PhD(Readlng) A.L. Pope. MSc(Syd). MSc(ANUj. PhD(Lond) Lecturers I. Koch. MSe(Oxford). MPht1(Lond). PhD(ANUj A. Young. BMath. DlpMedStat

Statistical Programmer C. Turner. BCom. DlpCompSc

Departmental OffIce Staff P. Beverley R M1ll.

Faculty Sial!

section two

Faculty Information

INFORMATION FOR NEW UNDERGRADUATES

Students entering University for the first time may experience some difficulty in adapting to the study techniques required for success. !tis, therefore, important for students to become famtllarwith the methods of organisation used within the University, degree courses available and the University Counselltng Service which offers assistance with study and personal problems.

Students should note that it is possible to include some major streams of study in more than one degree course, eg Commerce, Economics, Mathematics, Psychology. !t is therefore important that care is taken to ensure that a degree course Is selected which wtll allow the Inclusion of the full range of studies that a student may wish to undertake. The Faculty of Economics and Commerce offers the Diploma tn Computing Studies and the Bachelor of Business, Bachelor of Commerce, Bachelor of Economics, Bachelor of Law and Administration and Bachelor of Infonnation Science degree courses. Each degree course offers a student the opportunity to select subjects from various discipltnes offered within the Faculty of Economics and Commerce and in other faculties of the Universityprovldedcertaln constraints and prerequisite conditions stipulated in the degree requirements are complied with.

Many students do not finally choose their field of interest until after the first year of study. However. the initial selection of subjects should be made In light of the probable direction of their later interests and studies. eg students who have an interest in accounting orfndustria1 relations should include Foundations of Law early in their course; students who wish to select those subjects required for enny to the professional accounting associations should enrol in the Bachelor of Commerce degree course.

Candidates should be aware that the Bachelor of Law andAdminlstraUon degree is not intended as a qualification for the practice of law.

Students should study carefully the reqUirements for the degrees particularly with regard to compulsory subjects. limitation on the subjects which can be chosen from each group and prerequisite requirements including the adviSOry prerequisites set out in Faculty Policies. It will be necessary for students who

Faculty of economics and Commerce

have not completed advisory prerequisites or equivalent study to undertake Intensive preliminary readIng.

Limits are also set on the number of subjects students are permitted to take In anyone year. These l1m1tsrestrlcta full·tlme student to a maximum of 80 credit points and a part-time student to a maximum of 40 credit points in anyone year of study (see degree rules).

ADVICE

Students requiring specific advice on the selection or content of subjects in the course should seek help from theAssistantDeansofthe Faculty. For personal counselling and study skills training it Is suggested that students consult the University Counselling SeIVIce.

Enquiries regarding enrolment, variation of program and general administrative problems should be dIrected to the Faculty Officer, Social Science Annexe.

PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION

Graduates of the University of Newcastle who hold the Bachelor of Commerce degree and who have included specified subjects in their degree course fulfil examination requirements for membership of the Australian Society of CPAs and the Institute of Chartered Accountants In Australia.

A llst of subjects required to complete the degree requirements and satisfy professional membership reqUirements Is available from the Department of Commerce office and from the various profeSSional bodies.

The Institute of Corporate Managers, Secretaries and Administrators accredits units both at undergraduate and postgraduate level by means of which you can satiSfy its academic reqUirements for membership. For furtherlnfonnation, please contact Donna Wilkins. the Instttute's New South Wales Branch Manager on (02) 2235744. She can also advise you about how to become a Student Member during your studIes and a ProVisional Associate following your graduation.

Registration as a registered public accountant under the Public Accountants RegistrationAct, 1945 (NSW) is also available to graduates who have included specified subjects In their Bachelor of Commerce degree program.

Graduates who have included passes In the subjects Taxation A and Taxation B in their degree course

Section Two Faculty InformeUon

may apply for registration as a tax agent by the Tax Agents' Board (NSW).

Graduates of the University of Newcastle who hold either the Bachelor of Commerce degree or Bachelor of EconOmics degree and who are employed In the banking and finance Industry are eligible for Affiliate membership of the Australian Institute of Bankers.

Particulars of these various exemptions are set out on notice boards near the office of the Department of Commerce.

Further enqulrleo and appUcationo for ezemptlon ohouldhe directed to the pofeaalonlll _atlon. cODcerned.

ADVISORY PREREQUISITE FOR ENTRY TO TIlE PACULTY

In addItion to satisfying the admission reqUirements of the University, candidates applying for entry to the Faculty ofEconomfcs and Commerce are advised that a pass in 2-unlt Mathematics (including topiCS In calculus) at /he New South Wales Higher School Certificate Examination or in an examination at an eqUivalent standard in Mathematics is adVisable for all undergraduate courses except the Bachelor of Law and Administration degree course.

For admission in 1994 It will be assumed that candIdates have completed both 2-untt Mathematics and 2-untt Engltsh and have been placed In the top 60% In each subJect.

Candidates should note that therets no otheraciv1sory prerequisite for entry to the Faculty of Economics and Commerce. It Is not necessary for candidates applying for entry to have preViously studied EconOmics, Accounting or Legal Studies.

Candidates with low HSC aggregates or basic entry qualifications are strongly adVised to enrol in a reduced program.

STUDENT PARTICIPATION IN UNIVERSITY AFFAIRS

ProVision is made for students to be elected as members on Departmental and Faculty Boards as well as to other University bodies. Elections of student members usually take place early In the first semester and students should watch Department notice boards for details of elections of student members.

STUDENT ACADEMIC PROGRESS

All students are reminded of the need to maintain satisfactory progress and. tn particular, attention Is

I ,

Faculty of Economics and COmmerce

drawn to the legislation governing unsatisfactory progress.

In accordance with Regulation 4(1) of the Rules Governtng Unsatisfactory Progress the Faculty Board has determined the follOwing policy:

(a) (1) If a candJdate's academic record since admission shows all failures afterenrolment In 80 credit points, that candidate will be asked to show cause as to why a condition should not be Imposed on re-enrolment. that the candidate's program be restricted to 30 credit points in each semester as a full-time student, or in 10 credit points In each semester as apart-time student.

(U) !fin any year follOwing the completion of 80 credit points a candidate's academic record since admission to the course is such that the credit point value of subjects failed exceeds the credit point value of subjects passed, that candidate will be asked to show cause as to why the candIdate should not be excluded from the Faculty. Candidates who have been reviewed under (1) above and have satisfied the conditions Imposed on their re·enrolment, will not be asked to show cause at the end of that year.

(lU)

(IV)

If a candidate fails a compulsory subject for the second time that candidate wUl be asked to show cause as to why a condition should not be imposed on re·enrolment that the candidate not be permitted to reenrol In that subject.

If a candidate fatls a subject for the third time that candidate w:t1l be asked to show cause why the candIdate should not be excluded from the Faculty.

(b) In the case of a candidate enrolled In a combined degree course who falls a subject counting towards a degree offered by the Faculty of Economics and Commerce, that candidate will be asked to show cause why a recommendation should not be made to the Admissions and Progression Committee that the candidate's enrolment In the combined degree course be terminated (te the candidate be permitted to continue In one degree only).

STUDENT PROBLEMS

The AsaI.tant Dean. of the Paculty are wllUng to offer advice and aasI.tance to students who have

SectIon Two Faculty InformaUon

academic prob1e .... , Academic aclvlce ohould on1y he OOUCht from the AMlatant Deana who will conault with the relevant member of.taff where ~t.,

A student may also find It helpful to discuss the problem with a student member of Faculty Board, particularly If the student Is reluctant to make a personal approach to amemberofstafl' oris uncertain of the proper procedures to be followed.

ASSP'S8MENT OP EXAMINATION RESULTS

No contact may be made by oron behalf of a student with a member of the academic staff on the subject of a student's examination scrtpt(s) between the date of the examination In question and the official publication of results.

INSTITllTE OP INDUSTRIAL ECONOMICS

The InstttuteofIndustrlal Economlcswas established In April, 1976 and was the· first research Institute within the University.

It conducts research Into the economic problems of Australian manufacturing Industry, the distributing and semce trades and the mineral Industry. The Institute also acts as a centre for postgraduate training and research in the field of industrial economics, where it collaborates closely with the DepartmentofEconomics. Semlnarsandconferences are arranged from time to time and publications Issued which report the results of the Institute's research program.

The University staff members who work for the Institute are mainly drawn from the Departments of Economics, Commerce, Law and Management. However, staff members from other departments of the University can be called upon to assist In particular projects.

Many of the staff working for the Institute have previously acted as advisers or consultants of Industry, commerce and government. The Institute also employs full ~tlme research fellows and research assistants to meet the reqUirements of Its research and consulting activities.

The Board which administers the Institute consists of members from Industry. commerce and the University. The Director of the Institute Is Mr B. Gibson of the Department of Commerce.

Faculty of Economc8 and Commerce

EMPLOYMENT STUDIES CENTRE

The Employment Studies Centre was established In 1990 and has since become an Important part of the activities of the Department of Economics.

Its members conduct research Into all issues concerning matters of labour employment In Australia. Including workplace industrial relations. human resource management. occupational health and safety. segmented and regtonallabour markets. labour history and the economics of work and pay.

It has setout to provide a focus within the University for teaching. research. Information and advice on employment Issues both nationally and In the Hunter regton.

The Centre p~motes contact with practitioners and other research bodies by disseminating the results of research by members of the Centre to the wider community In Australia and overseas. Its services are available to provide advice to both enterprise management and unions on all employment related problems on a consultancy basis.

The Managtng Member Is Dr Roy Green of the Department of Economics.

AUSTRALIAN CENTRE FOR MINERAL AND ENERGY ECONOMICS

The Australtan Centre for Mineral and Energy Economlcs was established in 1993 and is funded by the Education and Training Foundation and the Mineral and Energy Industries.

The objectives of the Centre are to encourage the more specific and Intensive training of mineral economists and to promote research into all Issues concerning the mineral and energy Industries In Australia. Members of the Centre are aVailable to advise on the solving of problems In all sections of these industries on a consultancy basis.

Through the Faculty of Economics and Commerce. the Centre offers a Master of Mineral and Energy Economics degree by coursework. In addition. It provides non-degree short course training in specific areas of concern to the mineral and energytndustrfes. The Centre actively encourages the enrolment of overseas students in its courses.

Note: When this edition oj the Faculty Handbook went to press.}lnal details of the Centre's programs were not auaUable Jor inclusion Full InJormatlon about the Centre may be obtatnedJrom the olftce oj the Director.

Faculty Informedon

The Director of the Centre is Professor TImothy J. Considine of the Department of Economics.

section three

Rules Governing Academic Awards

Undergraduate

AppUcation of Rule.

1. These Rules shall apply to all the academic awards of the University other than the degrees of Doctor and Master.

Interpretation

2. (0 In these Rules. unless the context or subject matter otheIWise Indicates or requires:

"award" means the degree. diploma (Including graduate diploma and associate diploma) or graduate certfficate for which a candidate is enrolled;

"courae" means the total requirements of the program of study approved by the Academic Senate to qualify a candidate for the award as set out In the schedule;

"Dean" means the Dean of a Faculty;

"department" means the department offering a particular subject and includes any other body so dOing;

"Faculty" means the Faculty responsible for the course;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;

"schedule" means the schedule to these Rules relevant to the award listed under the name of the Faculty;

"subject" means any part of a course for which a result may be recorded.

(2) A reference In these Rules to a Head of Department shall be read not only as a reference to the person appointed to thatomce but also. where a subject Is not offered by a department as such. to the person approved by the Academic Senate to undertake the responslbtlttles of a Head of Department for the purpose of these Rules.


Admiaalon

3. An applicant for admission to candidature for an award shall satisfY the requIrements of the University governing admission to and enrolment in a course and any other addItional requirements as may be prescribed In the schedule for that award.

Subject

4. (1) For the purposes of a course. a subject may be classIfied at a level detennlned by the Faculty Board.

(2) Each subject shall be allotted a credIt poInt value by the Academic Senate after consIdering the advfce of the Faculty Board of the Faculty In whIch the department Is located.

(3) The Academic Senate. after considering a request from a Faculty Board. may determine that a subject be not offered during a particular academic year.

(4) The Faculty Board shall approve the subjects for the award. Any change in the list of approved subjects which will have effect In the followlngyear shall be approved by a date determined by the Academic Senate.

(5) Where there Is any change In the list of approved subjects. the Faculty Board shall make all reasonable provision to permit students already enrolled In the course to progress normally.

Enrolment

5. (1) A candidate may not enrol In any year In a combination of subjects which is Incompatible with the requirements of the timetable for that year.

(2) Except with the pennlsslon of the Dean and subject to any contrary provision in the schedule:

(a) a candidate may not enrol in subjects totalling more than the equivalent of 40 credit points In any semester;

(b) a candidate shall not enrol In a subject which does not count towards the award; and

(c) a candidate shall not be pennltted to enrol In any subject which Is

SectIon Thr .. Rule. Governing Academic Awards

substantially equIvalent to one whIch that candidate has prevfously counted towards a degree or diploma.

(3) A candidate for an award shall not enrol In a course or part of a course for another award in this University unless consent has first been obtained from the Dean and. If another Faculty Is responsible for the course leading to that other award. the Dean of that Faculty. provfded that a student may enrol in a combined course approved by the Academic Senate leading to two awards.

Pre-requlalte. Uld Co-requloitea

6. (I) The Faculty Board on the recommendation ofthe Head ofthe Deparlment may prescribe pre-requisites and/or co-requisites for any subject offered by that Department.

(2) Except with the pennlsslon of the Dean granted after considering any recommendation made by the Head of the Department. no candidate may enrol In a subject unless that candidate has passed any subjects prescribed as Its pre-requisites at any grade whIch may be specified and has already passed or concurrently enrols In or Is already enrolled In any subjects prescribed as Its co- requisites.

(3) Except with the pennlsslon of the Dean. a candidate will not have satisfied a prerequIsite If the pre-requIsite subject has not been completed In the preceding eight calendar years.

(4) A candidate attaining a Tennlnatlng Pass in a subject shall be deemed not to have passed that subject for pre-requisite purposes.

Credit

7. (I) A Faculty Board may grant credIt to a candidate In spectfied and unspecified subjects. on such conditions as It may determine. In recognition of work comple ted In the University or another Institution approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose or additionally as may be prOvided In the schedule.

(2) Except as may be otherwise provided In the schedule. a candidate shall not be given


credit for more than sixty-five percent of the total number of credit poInts requIred to complete the course.

Subject Requirement.

8. (1) The subjects whIch may be completed In the course for the Award shall be those approved by the Faculty Board and published annually as the Approved Subjects section of the schedule.

(2) A candidate enrolled In a subj ect shall comply with such academic and practical requirements and submit such written or other workas the Department shall specIfY.

(3) Except as otherwise pennltted by the Head of Department, any material presented by a candidate for assessment must be the work of the candidate and not have been previously submitted for assessment.

(4) To complete a subject a candidate shall satisfy published departmental requirements and gain a satisfactory result in such assessments and examinations as the Faculty Board shall require.

Withdrawal

9. (I) A candidate may withdraw from a subject orthecourseonlybytnformingtheAcademlc Registrar In writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notification.

(2) A student shall be deemed not to have enrolled In a subject If that student withdraws from the subject:

(a) In the case of a semester length subject. before the Higher Education Contribution Scheme census date for that semester; or

(b) In the case of a full year subject. before the first Higher Education Conb1button Scheme census date for that academic year.

(3) Except with the pennlsslon of the Dean:

(a) a candidate shall not be pennltted to withdraw from a subject after the relevant date which shall be:

(I) In the case of a semester length subject. the last day of that semester; or

Section Thr .. Rules Governing Academic A_rd.

(to In the case of a full year subject. the last day of second semester; and/or

(tU) subject to any provfslon withIn the schedules; and

(b) a candidate shall not be pennltted to withdraw from a subject on more than two occasions.

Leave of AbaeDce

10. (1) Subjectto any provfslon In the schedule. a candidate In good academic standing in the course:

(a) may take leave of absence of one year from the course; or

(b) with the pennlsslon of the Dean. may take leaveofabsence fortwoconsecutlve years from the course without prejudice to any right of the candidate to re-enrol In the course follOwing such absence and with full credit In all subjects successfully completed prior to the period ofleave.

(2) For the purposes of sub-rule (I). unless otherwise specified In the schedule. a candIdate eligIble to re-enrol shall be deemed to be in good academic standing.

(3) A person who has been enrolled In a course but It absent without leave or has been excluded from the course may apply for readmtssion to that course and may be readmitted to candidature under such condttlons and at such time as the Faculty Board may determine. unless otherwise spectfied In the schedule.

Qualification for the Awud

11. (I) To qualifY for the award a candIdate shall satisfactorily complete the requirements governing the course prescribed In the schedule.

(2) A subject which has been counted towards a completed award. may not be counted towards another award. except to such extent as the Faculty Board may approve.

Combined DeCree Pro,.. ...... 12. (1) Where so prescrlbed fora partlcularcourse.

acandldate may complete the requirements

Faculty of economic. and Commerce

for one Bachelor degree in conjunction with another Bachelor degree by completing a combined degree program approved by the Academic Senateon the advIceofthe Faculty Board and. where theotherBachelordegree is offered In another Faculty. the Faculty Board of that Faculty.

(2) Admission to a combined degree program shall be restricted to candidates who have achieved a standard of perfonnance deemed satisfactory for the purposes of admission to the specific combined degree course by the Faculty Board(s).

(3) The work undertaken by a candidate in a combined degree program shall be no less in quantity and quality than if the two courses were taken separately.

(4) To qualify for admission to the two degrees a candidate shall satisfy the reqUirements for both degrees. except as may be otherwise provided.

Relu:lng _Ilion

13. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances arising in a particular case, the Academic Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these Rules.

SCHEDULE - DIPLOMA IN COMPUTING SnIDlE8

QuaHfication for the Diploma

I. (I) To qUalify for admission to the diploma. a candidate shall pass subjects totalling not less than 160 credit points selected from the list of subjects approved by the Faculty Board.

(2) The course shall include .

(a) Group A subjects

Credit

(b) 20 credit points from Group B subjects and,

(c) not less than 30 credit points from Group C subjects.

2. Credit shall be given for specified subjects only and shall total not more than 80 credit points.

11me Requirements

The course shall be completed in not less than two years and not more than six years.

Section Thr .. Rul •• Governing Academic Awards

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF BUSINESS

Int_etatlcm

I. InthisSchedule"clUclpUne"meansanybranch of learning recognised as such by the Faculty Board.

QuaHfi"atlcm far the Dejpee

2. (I) To qualify for admission to the ordinary degree. a candidate shall pass subjects totalling not less than 240 credit points selected from the list of approved subjects including:

Grading

(a) aU subjects listed in Group A unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise in the case of an individual candidate; and

(b) not more than 100 credit points from 100 level subjects; and

(c) at least 60 credit points from 300 level subjects; and

(d) at least 60 credit points from one of the discipline groups including all the prescribed subjects within that group.

3. The degree shall be conferred as an ordinary degree except that in cases where a candidate's performance in the course has reached a standard determined by the Faculty Board. the degree may be conferred with Merit.

Credit

4. Credit may be granted for up to 100 credit points except that a candidate may be granted such credit as the Faculty Board determines for subjects completed In this University which have not already counted towards an award.

11me Requirement.

5. Except where a candidate has been granted credit under Rule 7 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards. the course shall be completed tn not less than three years of study.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF COMMERCE

QuaHfication for the Dejpee

I. (I) To qualify for admission to the degree. a candidate shall pass subjects totalling not less than 240 credit potnts selected from the list of Approved Subjects as follows:


(a) the subjects designated as prescribed subjects unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise in the case of an individual candidate;

(b) subjects totalling not more than 100 credit points from the 100 level; and

(c) subjects totalling at least 60 credit points at the 300 level.

(2) Except with the permission of the Dean. a candidate may not enrol In a 300 level subject until that candidate has passed the subjects referred to in sub·clause (I)(a).

Credit 2. (I) A graduate of the University, or of another

tertiary institution approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose. may be granted credit in subjects totalling not more than 100 credit pOints.

(2) An undergraduate shall not receive credit in respect of subjects with a combined value exceeding 100 credit points, save that an undergraduate transferring from another course In the University may be allowed credit for additional subjects if these subjects are Included In the Itst of Approved Subjects.

Leave of Ah8ence

3. For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards. a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if. at the conclusion of the year of last enrolment In the course, that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.

11me Requirements

4. Except where a candidate has been granted credit under Rule 7 of the Rules Governing Academic awards, the course shall be completed In not less than three years of study.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF COMMERCE (HONOURS)

IDt_etation

I. In this Schedule "dI..,lpHne" means any branch of learning recognised as such by the Faculty Board.

DloelpHnes Offered

2. (1) A candidate may undertake the Honours Degree in one of the follOwing disciplines:

SectIon 111,.. Rul •• Governing Academic Award.

Accounting, Economics. or Industrial Relations.

(2) The Department responsible for each discipline shall be:

Accounttng - the Department of Commerce Economics - the Department of Economics Industrial Relations - the Department of Economics.

AdmIaIIiOD to Candidature

3. In order to be admitted to candidature a)1

appllcant shall:

(a) have completed the reqUirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the discipline.

QuaHfication for AdmIuIon to the Degree

4. To qualify for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 60 credit points at the 400 level chosen from the Itst of Approved Subjects.

CI_.ofHon .......

5. There shallbe three classes of Honours. namely Class I. Class" and Class Ill. Class" shall have two divisions. namely Division I and Division 2.

11me Requirements

6. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board, a candidate shall complete the course In not less than one year and not more than two years of study.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS

QuaHficatiOD for the Degree

1. To qualify for admission to the degree, a candidate shall pass subjects totalltng not less than 240 credtt points selected from the Approved Subjects as follows -

(al the subjects deSignated as prescribed subjects unless the FacultyBoardapproves otherwise tn the case of an Individual candidate;


(b) subjects totalling not more than 100 credit points from the 100 level; and

(c) subjects totalling at least 60 credit points at the 300 level.

Credit

2. (I) A graduate of the University. or of another tertlaIyinstitutionapproved by the Faculty Board for this purpose. may be granted credit In subjects totalling not more than 100 credit points.

(2) An undergraduate shall not receive credit In respect of subjects with a combined value exceedtng 100 credit pOints, save that an undergraduate transferring from another course In the University may be allowed credit for additional subjects if these subjects are Included In the list of Approved Subjects.

Leave of AbeeDce

3. For the purposes of Rule 10 of the Rules Governing Academic Awards. a candidate shall be deemed to be in good standing if. at the conclUSion of the year of last enrolment In the course. that candidate was eligible to re-enrol without restrictions.

TIme Requirements

4. Except where a candidate has been granted credit under Rule 7 of the Rules Governing Academtc awards. the course shall be completed In not less than three years of study.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF ECONOMICS (HONOURS)

interpretation

I. In this Schedule "diaclpHne" means any branch of learning recognised as such by the Faculty Board.

DlaclpUnes Oftered

2. (1) A candidate may undertake the Honours Degree In one of the following diSCiplines:

Economics. or Industrial Relations.

(2) The Department responSible for each discipline shall be the Department of Economics.

Section Thr .. Rules Governing Academic Awards

AdmiMICDI to Csndldst1ue 3. In order to be admitted

applicant shall: to candidature an

(a) have completed the reqUirements for admiSSion to the degree of Bachelor of EconOmics of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such other work prescribed in accordance with the policy determined hy the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the discipline.

QulllUlcation for AdmIaalon to the Degree

4. To qualifY for admission to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 60 credit points at the 400 level chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

Cluae. of BonolD'.

5. There shall be three classes of Honours. namely Class 1. Class II and Class III. Class II shall have two divisions, namely Division I and DiviSion 2.

Time Requirements

6. Exceptwith the permission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course In not less than one year and not more than two years of study.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF INFORMATION SCIENCE

QulllUlcation for the Degree

I. ToquallfY for admission to the degree. a candidate shall pass subjects totalling not less than 240 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects as follows -

(a) the subjects deSignated as prescribed subjects unless the Faculty Board approves otherwise In the case of an Individual candidate;

(b) subjects totalling not more than 100 credit points from the 100 level;

(c) subjects totalling at least 60 credit points from the 300 level of which aUeast 40 credit points shall be selected from one of the deSignated diSCipline groups.

Credit

2. (1) A graduate of the University, or of another tertiary InstitUtion approved by the Faculty

Faculty of Economic. and Commerce

Board for this purpose. may be granted credit in subjects totalling not more than 100 credit pOints.

(2) An undergraduate shall not receive credit in respect of subjects with a combined value exceeding 100 credit pOints. save that an undergraduate transferring from another course In the University may be allowed credit for additional subjects if these subjects are Included In the list of Approved Subjects.

TIme Requirements

3. Except where a candidate has been granted credit under Rule 7 of the Rules Governing Academic awards. the course shall be completed tn not less than three years of study.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF INFORMATION SCIENCE (HONOURS)

Interpretation

1. In this Schedule "diacipHne" means any branch of learning recognised as such by the Faculty Board.

DIacIpUnes Oftered

2. (1) A candidate may undertake the Honours Degree In one of the follOwing disclpitnes:

Computer Science; Information Systems; or Statistics.

(2) The Department responsible for each diSCipline shall be:

Computer Science . the Department of Computer Science; Information Systems -the Department of Management; Statistics - the Department of Statistics.

AdmIaalon to Candld.t ......

3. In order to be admitted to candidature an applicant shall:

(a) have completed the reqUirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Information Science of the University or to any other degree approved by the Faculty Board; and

(b) have completed such otherwork prescribed in accordance with the poltcy determined by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department responsible for the discipline.

SectIon Thr .. Rul •• Governing Academic Awards

QuaIIfIcadCDI for Admlaalon to the Degree

4. ToquallfYforadmJssion to the degree a candidate shall pass subjects totalling 60 credit points at the 400 level chosen from the list of Approved Subjects.

CJa.e. of HCDI ......

5. There shall be three classes of Honours. namely Class l. Class II and Class III. Class II shall have two divisions. namely Division I and DIvision 2.

TIme Requirements

6. Exceptwith the permission of the Faculty Board. a candidate shall complete the course in not less than one year and not more than two years of study.

SCHEDULE - BACHELOR OF LAW AND ADMINISTRATION'

QualIfIcation for the Ordbuuy Degree

1. (I) To qualifY for admission to the ordinal}' degree. a candidate shall pass subjects totalling not less than 240 credit pOints selected from the list of Approved Subjects.

(2) The course shall include:

(a) all Group A subjects; and

(b) at least 40 credit points from Group B subjects.

(3) With the permiSSion of the Head of the Department of Law a candidate may include subjects totalling not more than 60 credit pOints from subjects offered tn other bachelor degree courses of the University.

Grading

2. (1) The degree maybe conferred as an ordinary degree or as a degree with Honours.

(2) There shall be three classes of Honours, namely Class I. Class II and Class III. Class II shall have two divisions, namely DiviSion 1 and Division 2.

Credit

3. (I) A graduate of the University. or of another tertlaIYlnstitutlon approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose. may be granted credJt in subjects totalling not more than 100 credit pOints.

, No new students waI be admitted to the Bachelor oj Law and Admln/strattcn

Foeully of Economics end Conwnerce

(2) An undergraduate shall not receive credit In respect of subjects with a combined value exceeding 100 credit points. save that an undergraduate transferring from another course in the University may be allowed credit for additional subjects If these subjects are Included In the Ust of Approved Subjects.

TIme Requil'emeDts

4. (1) Except where a candidate has been granted credit under Rule 7 of the Rules Governing Academic awards. the COUrse shall be completed tn not less than three years of study.

(2) To qualIfY for admission to the degree with Honours a candidate shall complete the requirements tn not more than eight years of study from the date of first enrolment in the Faculty. or such longer period as the FacuUy Board may approve.

Qualification for the Deg>ee with Bono .....

5. (1) Honours may be awarded In the degree.

(2) To qualifY for the degree with Honours a candidate shall:

(a) have completed all the requirements for the ordinary degree of Bachelor of Law and Administration;

(h) complete 80 credit points from 400 level Law subjects.

Sectton Three Rul •• Governing Academic Award.

Faculty of Economics end Commerc.

SectIon Thr .. Rul •• Governing Acedemlc Awe,d.

LIST OF SllJIJECTS APPROVED FOR THE DIPLOMA IJII COMPllTlJllG STUDIES

5u1?Ject

GroUP A

Credit Semester PoinJs Offered.

PrerequIsite

INFO 101 Introduction to Information Systems 10 I

FY INFO I 10 Programming Concepts

INFO I II COBOL

MNGTll4 Business Studies

INFO 113 Commercial Information Systems

INFO 114 Computer Systems Architecture

INFO 115 Analysis of Information Systems

INF0210 Commerical AppUcations (Project)

INF0214 Management Infonnatlon Systems

INF0215 Database Management Systems

GroupS

'INF0211 Work Experience

INF0212 Applicatton Generators

INF0213 Advanced Program Design

20

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

20

10

10

2 INFO II I Cobol

2

2 INFO I 0 I Introduction to Information Systems

2 INFO 101 Introduction to Information Systems. INFO 110 Programming Concepts, MNGTl14 Business Studies. INFO 113 Commercial Information Systems

2 MNGTI14 Business Studies

INFO 113 Commercial Information Systems

INFOIO} Introduction to Information Systems. INFO 110 Programming Concepts.INFOIII Cobol.MNGTI14Buslness Studies. INFOll3 Commercial Information Systems. INFO 114 Com· puter Systems Architecture

INFO 101 Introduction to Infonnatlon Systems. INFO 113 Conunerclal Information Systems

INFO 110 Programming Concepts

plus other subjects as approved by the Head of the Department of Management.

Groupe

1NF0201 Human Context of Information 10 2 INFOIO! Introduction to Infonnatlon Systems Systems

INF0219 Information Systems Design 10 INFO I 13 Commercial Information Sys-tems and INFO liS AnalySiS of Infor-mation Systems

INF0216 Technical Programming 10 2 INFO 110 Programming Concepts

INF0217 Communications and Networking 10 2 INFO) 14 ComputerSystemsArchftec-ture

1NF021B Programming Languages 10 2 INFO 110 Programming Concepts


SecdonThr ..

Credit Semester PoInts Offered

Prerequ/sUe

Rul •• Governing Academic Award.

INF0212 AppUcatlon Generators 10 INFOIOI Introduction to Information Systems. INFO 113 Conunerclal Information Systems

plus other subjects as approved by the Head of the Department of Management

• Enrolments In this subject will be based on merit and will require the approval of the Head of the Department of Management.


Section ThrH

UST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR BACHELOR OF BUIIINB88

Subject Credit Semester Semester PoInts Offered Offered

CoIIaghan 0urImbah

lOO-IEVEL

ECONlIO Microeconomics I 10 1

ECONlll Macroeconomics I 10 2 2

ECONI90 Microeconomics A 10 2

COMM 10 1 Financial Accounting 10 1 Fundamentals

COMMI02 Financial Management 10 2 2 Fundamentals

COMMI90 Introduction to Accounting 10 2

INFO 101 Introduction to Information 10 1.2 2 Systems

STATIOI Introductory Statistics 10 1.2 1

OR

STATl03 Introductory Mathematical 10 2 Statistics

LAWIOI Foundations of Law 10

MNGTlII Introduction to Management 10 1.2 2 and Organisational Behaviour

MNGTI13 Australian Government and 10 2 Politics

lOO-level subjects oITered In 20 other degree programs and approved by the Dean

2OO-IEVEL

MNGT224 Consumer Behaviour 10 MNGT225 Enterprise Management 10 2 2

MNGT226 BUSiness Venturing 10 1

MNGT227 Human Resoun:e Management 10 2 2

MNGT228 Organisation Structures 10 1 and Design


PrerequtsUe

see footnote 1

COMMIOI Financial Accounting Fndamentals

see footnote 1

MATH 102 Mathematics 102 (advisory)

20 credit points at lOO-level

See relevant degree rules

MNGT230 Marketing PrInCiples

MNGTlII Introduction to Man-agement and Organisational Behaviour

MNGTIII Introduction to Man-agement and Organisational Behaviour

MNGTlII Introduction to Man-agement and Organisational Behaviour

MNGTlII introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour

J AvaUabIe only to mid-year entry students in their frst year of enrolment

MNGT230

MNGT231

MNGT232

MNGT240

LAW204

LAW207

LAW225

LAW230

LAW205

ECON220

ECON22I

LEIS209

LEIS211

ECON225

SOCA203

3OO-IEVEL

SfAT310


SectIon Thr ..


Callaghan Ourimbah Marketing Principles 10

Marketing Research 10 2 2

Services Marketing 10 2 AustraHan Labour History 10 2

Law of BUSiness Organisations 10 Trade Practices Law 10 Law of Employment 10 Contract Law I 10 2 2

BUSiness and Consumer 10 2 Credit Law

Industrial Relations IIA 10

Industrial Relatfons llB 10 2

Introduction to the 10 TOUrism Industry

Tourist Behaviour and 10 Interactions

2 2

Japanese Economy 10 2

Work In Industrial Society 10 2

200-level subjects offered In other degree programs and approved by the Dean.

Total QuaUty Management 10 2

Rul •• Gov.mlng Academic Awards

Prerequisite

MNGTIII Introduction to Man-&gement and Organisational Behaviour

MNGT230 Marketing Principles and SfATIOI Introductory Statistics

MNGT230 Marketing Principles

60 credlt points Including one of MNGT299 Industrial Relations. ECON220 Industrial Relations IIA. ECON 102 Economic History A. ECON I 03 Australian Eco-nomic History. HISfIO I The Foundations of AustraUan Soc1-ety. HISflO2 AustraUa In the Twentieth Century. SOC203 Work In Industrial Society

LAWIOI Foundations of Law

LAW230 Contract Law I

LA W230 Contract Law I

MNGTI12 Introduction to Law or LAWIOI Foundations of Law

LA W230 Contract Law I

Subjects totalling 40 credit points

ECON220 Industrial Relatfons llA

MNGTlII Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour

LEIS209 Introductfon to the TOUrism Industry

ECONIIO Microeconomics and ECON III Macroeconomics

ECON220 Industrial Relatfons llA


40 credit points from 200 level subjects

MNGT332

MNGT333

MNGT334

MNGT335

MNGT336

MNGT338

MNGT339

MNGT340

MNGT34 I

MNGT342

MNGT343

MNGT344

MNGT345

MNGT346

MNGT347

MNGT348

Faculty of economic. end CoI'ftfMI'c.

_lion Th,..


Callaghan 0tu1mbah

Contemporruy Management 10 I I Issues

Strategfc Marketing 10 2 2 Management

Project In Marketing 10 2 2

Internat10nal Marketing 10 I

Analytical Marketing 10

Advertising and Promotions 10 2 2

Management

Industrial Marketing 10

Project In Enterprise 10 2 2 Management

Entrepreneurship 10 I

Venture Capital and 10 Management

Enterprise Development 10 I

Government and Business 10 2 2

Issues in Small and Medium 10 2 Enterprise Management

Small and Medium Enterprise 10 2 Policy

Organisational Change 10 2 2

Strategfc/ Advanced Human 10 2 Resource Management

Rule. Governing Acad.mlc Awards

Prerequisite

SO credlt points from prescribed Group A subjects (prerequisite)

lIW1 a mtnitnum of 30 credlt points from the dlsctpllne area In which the final year project Is to be taken (corequlsfte)

30 credlt points from Group B -Marketing

MNGT332 Contemporary Man-agement Issues and approval of Head of Department of Manage-ment

MNGT230 Marketing PrinCiples




MNGT332 Contemporary Management Issues and ap-proval of Head of Department of Management

MNGT225 Enterprise Manage-ment

MNGT225 Enterprise Management and MNGT34 I Entrepreneurship

MNGT226 Business Venturing

MNGTlII Introduction to Man-agement and Organisat1onal Behaviour and MNGTll2 Intro-duction to Law

MNGT225 Enterprise Management


MNGT228 Organisation Struc-tures and Design

MNGT227 Human Resource Management, MNGT228 Organl-sation Structures and Design (AdviSOry)

MNGT349

ECON325

ECON326

MNGT350

MNGT351

MNGT352

MNGT353

MNGT354

LEIS315

LEIS316

LEIS317

LEIS31B

LEIS319

LEIS320

PHIL393


Section Three

SubJect Credit Semester Semester Points Offered Offered

Callaghan 0Urlmbah

Project In Industrtal Relations iO 2

Industrtal Relations lilA iO

Industrtal Relations IIIB 10 2

Project In Human iO 2 2 Resource Management

Tra1nfng and Development iO

Information Systems and iO Human Resource Management

Organisational Psychology iO

International Human Resource 10 Management Tourtsm Poltcy and Planning iO 2

Tourism Enterprtse iO Management

Current Issues in Tourtsm 10

Specialised Sectors of the iO

Tourtsm Industry

Project In Tourtsm 10 2 Mannagement

Tourtsm Marketing iO

Human Values and iO 2 Commercial Practice 300-level subjects offered In other-degree programs and approved by the Dean

Aules Governing Academic Awards

Prerequisite

MNGT332 Contemponuy Man-agement Issues and approval of Head of Department of Manage-ment

ECON221 Industrial Relations liB

ECON221 Industrial Relations liB

MNGT332 Contemporal)' Management Issues and ap-proval of Head of Department of Management MNGT227 HUman Resource Management

INFO 10 I Introduction to Infonnation Systems and MNGT227 Human Resource Management

MNGT227 Human Resource Management


LEIS211 TourtstBeha~ourand Interactions LEIS211 Tourtst Beha~our and Interactions

LEIS211 Tourtst Beha~our and Interactions

LEIS209 Introduction to the

Tourism Industry

MNGT332 Contemponuy Man-agement Issues and approval of Head of Department of Manage-ment

MNGT230 Marketing Prtnclples

MNGT332 Contemporal)' Management Issues See relevant degree rules


Section Thr ..

GROUP A - CcmlpulaOJy SUbject. ECONIIO Microeconomics I or ECONl90 MfcroeconomlcsA

Rule. Governing Academic Awards

ECONlll

COMMIOI

COMMI02

STATlOi

INFOiOl

MNGTlll

UWIOI

UW230

MNGT230

ECON220

MNGT332

Macroeconomics I Financial Accounting Fundamentals or COMM 190 Introduction to Accounting

Ftnancial Management Fundamentals Introductol)' Statistics or STAT! 03 Introductol)' Mathemattcal Statistics

Introduction to Information Systems Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour

Foundations of Law

Contract Law I Marketing Prtnclples

Industrial Relations IIA Contemporary Management Issues

GROUP B - Marketing .MNGT231 Marketing Research

·MNGT224

·MNGT334

·MNGT333

MNGT232

MNGT335

MNGT336

LEI5320

MNGT338

MNGT339

Consumer Behaviour

Project In Marketing Strategic Marketing Management

Services Marketing

International Marketing Analytical Marketing

Tourtsm Marketing Advertising and Promotions Management

Industrtal Marketing

GROUP C - Human ae ....... ce Management

·MNGT227

·MNGT228

·MNGT34B

·MNGT350

MNGT347

MNGT35l

MNGT352

MNGT353

MNGT354

50CA203

Human Resource Management

Organisation Structures and Design Strategic! Advanced Human Resource Management

Project in Human Resource Management

Organisational Change

Traintng and Development Infonnation Systems and Human Resource Management

OrganIsational Psychology International Human Resource Management

Work In Industrtal SocIety

• Prescribed sukJects within the Group


Group D - 1DcI...trial Relatl .... 'ECON22I Industr!al Relations liB

'MNGT349 Project In Indusbial Relations

'ECON325 Indusbial Relations IlIA

'ECON326 Industr!al RelationslllB

MNGT240 Australlan Labour History

MNGT351 Training and Development

SectIon Th,..

MNGT352

MNGT353

MNGT354

MNGT347

Information Systems and Human Resource Management

Organisational Psychology

International Human Resource Management


S0CA203 Work In Industrial Soclely

GROUP E - TourIom M ....... ent

LEIS209 Introduction to the Tourism Industry

·LEIS211 Tourist Behaviour and Interactions

'LEIS315 Tourism Pollcy and Planning

'LEIS316 Tourism Enterprise Management

'LEIS319 Project In Tourism Management

LEIS317 Current Issues in Tourism

LEIS320 Tourism Marketing

LEIS31S Specialised SeCIDrs of the Tourism Industry

GROUP .. - Enterprise M ..... ement ·MNGT226 BUSiness Venturing

·MNGT225 Enterprise Management

'MNGT340 Project In Enterprise Management

'MNGT343

MNGT232

MNGT34 I

MNGT344

MNGT342

MNGT345

MNGT346

MNGT347

Enterprise Develoment

SeIVlces Marketing

Entrepreneurship

Government and Business

Venture Capital and Development Capital

Issues In Small and Medium Enterprise Management

Small and Medium Enterprise Polley


, Prescribed subjects within the Group.

Rul.' Governing Academic Award.

Faculty of economics end Commerce

Rule' Governing Academic Awards

LIST 0 .. SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE BACHELOR 0 .. COIDIERCB

SuQiect Credit Semesrer PoInts Offered

lOOJe .... l 'COMMIOI Flnanctal Accounting Fundaroentals 10

.COMMI02F1nancial Management Fundamentals 10

.COMM 190 Introduction to Accounting 1# 10

.ECONI10 Microeconomics I 10

.ECON 111 Macroeconomics I 10

.ECONl90 Microeconomics A 1# 10

LAWIOI Foundations of Law 10

LAWI02 Contract Law 1 10

'STATIO I Introductory Statistics + 10

'STATI03 Introductory Mathematical Statistics 10

'ECONI15 Introductory Quantitative Methods A + 10

'ECONI16 Introductory Quantitative Methods B + 10

ECONI02 Economic History A 10

ECONI03 Australian Economic HisIDry 10

INFO 10 I Introduction to Infonnation Systems 10

INFO 102 Information Storage and Management 10

MNGTIll Introduction to Management and 10 Organisational Behaviour

Subjects from Arts (Group A) 40 Computer Science/Law /Mathematlcs/ Science degree programmes on the recommendation of the relevant Head of Department and the approval of the relevant Dean.

, Prescribed subjects for the degree.

2

2

2

2

2

1.2

2

2

2

1.2

2

1,2

Prerequisite

COMMIOI Financ!al Accounting Fundaroentals

see below

see below


MATH 102 Mathematics 102 and INFOIOI Introduction to Information Systems (adviSOry)

ECONI15 Introductory Quantitative Methods A

INFOIOI Introduction to Information Systems

30 credit points at loo-Ievel

As prescribed In relevant degree regulations

AVailable only to mid-year entry students in their first year of enrolment.

Students must choose either STATIO! or STATl03 or ECONI15 and ECONl16.

Subject

200 Jevel

Faculty of economic. end Commerce

Credit PoInts

COMM201 Corporate Accounting and Reporting 10

COMM202 Corporate Financial Regulation and 10 Control

COMM203 Costing Principles and Method 10

COMM204 Planning. Control & Performance 10 Evaluation

COMM207 Securities AnalySis 10

COMM20B Corporate Financial Management 10 ECON250 Microeconomics II 10

ECON25I Macroeconomics II 10 ECON202 European Economic History 1 10

ECON203 Asian Economic Hlstol)' I I 10

ECON204 ASian Economic History III 10

ECON205 AsIan Economic Hlstol)' rn I 10

SectIon Thr ..

Semester Offered

2

2

2

2

2

2

Prerequisite

Rul •• Governing Academic Awerds

COMMI02 Financial Management Fundamentals

COMM I 02 FInancial Management Fundamentals

COMM 102 Financial Management Fundamentals and either ECONI16 IntmductOlY Quantitative Methods B or INFOIOI Introduction to Infonna-tion Systems and STATIO I Introduc-tol)' Statistics

COMM203 Costing Principles and Method

COMM I 02 Financial Management Fundamentals. ECONllO Micro- eco-nomlcs I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeconomlcsl andeitherECONI16 Intmductol)' Quantitative Methods B or INFOIOI Introduction to Informa-tion Systems and STATIOI Introduc-tory Statistics

COMM207 Securities Analysis

ECONIIO Microeconomics I or ECONI90 Microeconomlcs A

ECON 111 Macroeconomics I

ECONI02 Economic Histol)' A or ECONI03 Australian Economic Hls-tol)' or ECON 110 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONlll Macro-economics I

ECON102 Economic History A or ECON 103 Australian Economic Hls-tory or ECON 110 Microeconomics I (or ECON 190) and ECON III Macro-economics I

ECON 1 02 Economic History A or ECONI03 Australian Economic Hls-tory or ECONII 0 Microeconomics I (or ECON 190) and ECON III Macro-economics I

ECONI02 Economic History A or ECON I 03Australlan EconomlcHlstol)' or ECONIIO Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIIi Macro-economics I

ECON20B

ECON209

ECON21O

ECON211

ECON216

ECON217

ECON21B

ECON220

ECON221

ECON225

ECON230

ECON240

ECON24I

ECON242

ECON243

LAW204

LAW205

LAW207

LAW225

SUlyect

Faculty of economic. end Comm«ce

Comparative Economic Systems A

Comparative Models and Cases

Political Economics

Theol)' of Publtc Choice

Industry Economics A

Indust!)' Economlcs B

Problems of Developing Countries

Industrial Relations IIA

Industrial Relations lIB

Japanese Economy

Introductory Labour Economics

Introductory Econometrics

Econometrics I

Applied Econometrics I

Mathematical Economics A

Law of Business Organ1satlons2

Credit PoInts

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Business and Consumer Credit Law2 10

Trade Practices Law2 10

The Law of Employment2 10

Section Three

Semester Offered

2

2

2

2

2

I

2

2

2

I

PrerequIsite

Rul •• Governing Aclidemtc Award.

ECONIIO Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeco-nornics I

ECON 110 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeco-nomiesI

ECONIIO Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeco-nomics I

ECON 110 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeco-nomics I

ECON 110 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONlll Macroeco-nomics I

ECON216 Indust!)' Economlcs A

ECONIIO Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONlll Macroeco-nomics I

Subjects totalltng 40 credlt potnts

ECON220 Industrtal Relations lIA

ECON III Macroeconomics I and ECONIIO Microeconomics I QI.

ECON204 Asian Economic Hlstol)' 1I

ECON 110 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeco-nomics I

ECONI16 Introductol)' Quantitative Methods B or MATH 103 Mathemattes 103

ECON240 Introductol)' Econometrics

ECON240 Introductol)' Econometrics

ECONI16 Introductol)' Quantitative Methods B or MATH 103 Mathemattes 103

IAWIOI Foundations of Law

LAWI02 Contract Law I

LA WI 02 Contract Law I


Candidates who pass 20 credit points at 200-level oJEconomic History subjects as listed. may count further Economic History subjects as 300-level

• Candidates who pass subjects totalling 40 credit points offered by the Department oj Law including 20 credit points at 200-level. may COWltJurther Law subjects at the 300-level.

Faculty of economic. SectIon 111,.. Rul" Governing and Corrwnerce Academic AW8rd.

Sul?fect Credit Semester Prerequlsfte PoInts OJfered

MNGI'23O Marketing Principles 10

MNGI'231 Marketlng Research 10

MNGT224 Consumer Behaviour 10

MNGI'225 Enterprise Management 10

MNGT226 Business Venturing 10

MNGT227 Human Resource Management 10

MNGI'228 Organisation Structures and Design 10

MNGT232 Services Marketing 10

MNGT240 Australian Labour History 10

INF0201

INF0202

Human Context of Information 10 Systems

AnalysiS of Infonnation Systems 10

Level 200 subjects from Arts (Group Al/3O ComputerSclence/Law/Mathematlcs/ Science degree programmes on the recommendation of the relevant Head of Department and the approval of the relevant Dean.

I

2

2

I

2

2

2

2

MNGrIII Introductlon to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGI'203 FoundatlonsofManagement

MNGT230 Marketing PrinCiples or MNGI'204 Principles of Marketing and either SfATIOI Introductory Statlstics or ECONI16 Introductory Quantltatlve Methods B

MNGT230 Marketing Principles or MNGI'204 Principles of Marketing

MNGrIII Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGI'203 FoundatlonsofManagement

MNGrII Iintroductlon to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGI'203FoundatlonsofManagement

MNGrIII Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGI'203FoundationsofManagement

MNGrIII Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGI'203 FoundationsofManagement

MNGI'23O Marketing PrInciples

60 credit points Including one of MNGT299 Industrial Relations. ECON220 Industrial Relations llA. ECONI02 Economic History A. ECON 103 Australian Economic History. HISfIOI The FoundationsofAustrallan Society. HISflO2 Australia In the1Wentleth Century. SOC203 Work In Industrial Society

INFOI01 Introduction to Infonnatton Systems

INFO 10 I Introduction to Information Systems

As prescribed In the relevant degree regulations

Faculty of economic. SectIon 111,.. Rul" Governing and Commerce AcMIemIc AW8rd.

Sul?fect Credit Semester Prerequlsfte PoInts Offered

3OO\evel COMM301 Flnanctal Accounting Theory 10

Construction

COMM302 Reconstruction of Accounting 10

COMM303 Accounting and Decision 10 Support Systems

COMM305 Auditing Theory and Method 10

COMM306 Contemporary Auditing Technology 10 and Issues

Special Topic A 3 10 Special Topic B3 10

COMM307 Taxation B 10

COMM316 Behavioural. Organisational and 10 Social Aspects of Accounting

COMM317 Taxation A 10

ECON306 International Economics A 10

ECON307 International Economics B 10

ECON308 Macroeconomic Planning 10

ECON309 Urban Economics 10

ECON31O Regtonal Economics 10

ECON311 Environmental Economics 10

ECON312 Managerial Economics 10

ECON313 Growth and Fluctuations 10

ECON314 Topics in Economic Development 10

ECON315 Public FInance 10

I

2

2

2

2

I

2

2

2

2

2

2

COMM202 Corporate Flnanctal Regu Iatlon and Control and COMM201 Corporate Accounting and Reporting

COMM202 Corporate Flnanctal ReguIatlon and Control and COMM201 Corporate Accountlng and Reportlng

COMM204 Planning. Control and Per formance Evaluation

COMM20 I Corporate Accounting and Reporting (corequlslte)

COMM305 AudttlngTheory and Method COMM20 I Corporate Accounting and Reporting

See Footnote 3 See Footnote 3

COMM317 Taxation A

COMM204 Planning. Control and Per formance Evaluation

Subjects totalling 30 credit points at 200 level offered by the Department of Commerce.

ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics Il

ECON306 International Economics A

ECONI16 Introductory Quantitative Methods Band ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II







ECON316

ECON317

ECON318

ECON319

ECON322

ECON323

ECON325

ECON326

ECON33O

ECON331

~ect


Australian PubUc Finance

Economic Doctrines & Methods A

Economic Doctrines & Methods B

Economic Doctrines & Methods C

Monetary Theo¢

Flnanctallnstltutlons & Polfcy4

Industrlal Relations IlIA

Industrlal Relations IIIB

The Economics of Employment and Unemployment

Contemporaty Issues In Labour Economics

Credit PoInts

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

\0

Section Ttlr ..

Semester

Offered

2

1

2

2

2

2

1

2

Prerequisite


ECON315 PubUc FInance

ECON250 Microeconomics ECON251 MacroeconomIcs II

ECON250 Microeconomics ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON250 Microeconomics ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON250 Microeconomics ECON251 MacroeconomIcs II

ECON322 Monetary Theory

II

II

II

II

ECON221 Industrial Relations

and

and

and

and

lIB. LAW225The Law of Employment (ad-visory)

ECON221 Industrial Relatfons liB

ECON23O Introductory Labour Eco nomics. ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON23O Introductory Labour Eco nomics. ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II

, Topics will be based on demand and avaUabUity oj staff and could,for example. include:

Subject Prerequisite

COMM308 Contemporary Issues in FInancial COMM30 1 Financial Accounttng Theory Accounting Construction or COMM302 Reconstruction oj

Accounting

COMM309 Corporate Financiallnjormation Analysis

COMM310 Accounting. Organisations and Soctety

COMM3 I 1 Accounting and Small enterprise

COMM312 International Accounting and Finance

COMM3 I 3 Advanced Issues in Securities Analysis

COMM20 I Corporate Accounting and Reporting and COMM207 Securities Analysis

COMM202 Corporate Financial Regulation and Control

COMM202 Corporate Financial Regulation and Control and COMM204 Planning. Control and Performance Evaluation and COMM208 Corporate Financial Manngement

COMM20 I Corporate Aooounting and Reporting and COMM208 Corporate Financial Manngement

COMM207 SecuritIes Analysis and COMM208 Corporate Financial Manngement.

COMM3 I 4 Advanced Issues in FInancial Manngement COMM3 13 Ad"""""" Issues· iniSecuritles Analysis

COMM315 Taxation C CO~307~B(""'~'jIrIor to 1989)

• To count as 200-levellfpassedprior to 1990" . . "',- ,.,1t.Sl!!J""'~

. ·-.'~Oj;~~(-:-zr~iijL:;idl;~~;.J.-!


Section Ttlr ..

SUbject Credit Semester PoInts Offered

ECON340 Econometrics II

ECON341 Econometrics III

ECON342 Applied Econometrics II

ECON343 Mathematical Economics B

ECON350 PhilosophIcal Issues In EconomIcs

ECON360 MIcroeconomics III

ECON361 Macroeconomics III

MNGT333 Strategfc Marketing Management

MNGT335 International Marketing

MNGT336 Analytical Marketing

MNGT338 Advertising and Promotions

MNGT339 Industrial Marketing

MNGT341 Entrepreneurship

MNGT343 Enterprtse Development

MNGT347 Organisational Change

10

10

10

10

\0

10

\0

10

10

\0

10

10

10

10

10

PHIL393 Human Values and CommercIal \0

Practice

STAT310 Total Quality Management 10

INF0303 Information Systems and the \0 Organisation

Level 300 subjects from Arts (Group A).20 Computer Sclence/Law/Mathematics/ Science degree programmes on the reconunendation of the relevant Head of Department and the approval of the relevant Dean.

1

2

2

2

2

2

2

1

1

1

1

2

2

2

Prerequisite


ECON241 Econometrics 1

ECON340 Econometrtcs II

ECON241 Econometrics I or ECON242 AppUed Econometrics I

ECON243 Mathematical EconomlcsA. ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II.

ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics 1I

ECON250 Microeconomics 1I

ECON251 Macroeconomics II

Subjects totalling 30 credit points from B.Bus Group B.

MNGT230 Marketing Principles or MNGT204 PrInciples of Marketing

MNGT230 Marketing Prlnclples or MNGT204 PrInCiples of Marketing

MNGT230 Marketing PrInciples or MNGT204 PrInciples of Marketing

MNGT230 Marketing Principles or MNGT204 PrInCiples of Marketing

MNGT225 Enterprise Management or MNGT312 Enterprise Management

MNGT226 BUsiness Venturing or MNGT203 FoundationsofManagement

MNGT22BOrganlsatlon Structuresand Design

COMM305 Auditing Theory and Method and el!her COMM3O 1 FInancial Accounting Theory Construction or COMM303 Accounting and DecIsion Support Systems.

At least 40 credit points from 200 level subjects

INF0202 AnalySIS of Information Systems

As prescrtbed in the relevant degree regulations

4OO-1eYe1


COMM4O I Accounting IV - Part I

COMM402 Accounting IV - Part 2

ECON40 I Economics IV - Part I

ECON402 Economics IV - Part 2

ECON404 Industr!al RelatJons IV - Part I

ECON405 Industrial Relations IV - Part 2

SectIon Thr ..

Credit Semester PoInts OJJered

40 FY

40 FY

40 FY

40 FY

40 FY

40 FY

PrerequIsite

Rul •• Governing Acedemlc Awerds

Either COMM301 FInancial AccountIngTheol)' Construction orCOMM303 Accounl1ngand Decision SupportSystems and one other 300 level subject offered by the Department of Commerce.

COMM4O I Accounting IV - Part I (corequlslte)

ECON360 Microeconomics III. ECON361 Macroeconomics II! and at least 40 credit points selected from 200-level subjects and 30 credit points selected from 3OO-Ievel subjects offered by the Department of Economics and approval of Head of Department

ECON40 I Economics IV - Part I (corequlslte)

Passed at credit level or higher ECON325 Industrial Relations lilA. ECON3261ndustr!al RelatJons II!B and have satlsmctoriiy completed two of the tollowing: ECON33O Labour Economics I. ECON331 Labour EconomIcs II. LAW225 The Law of Employment, S0CA203 Work In Industrial Society. MNGT227 Human Resource Management. MNGT348 StrategIc/ Advanced Human Resource Management, orsuch othersubjectsas maybe approved by the Head of the Department of Economics.

ECON404lndustr!alRelations IV-Part I (corequlslte)

Note: Not all subjects listed above will necessarUy be offered in any one year.

. ,>,iil_$~r~,r··fl:--~"3tI;U :,4~:I'lMf4'(h:\:.'( ,>,,-;

• ~ Jro-';"",;'-·

.""n':~~~~~~i~~:-


Rul •• Oo"ernlng Academic A_rds

UST 01' SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE BACHELOR 01' BCQNOIDC8

SUbject Credit PoInts Semester

OJJered 100 """'I

COMMIOI FInancial Accounting Fundamentals 10

COMMI90 IntroductJon to Accounting 10

COMM 102 Financial Management Fundamentals 10

-ECONII0 Microeconomics I 10

-ECON III Macroeconomics I 10

·ECONI90 Microeconomics A 10

ECONI02 Economic Hlstol)' A4 10

ECONI03 Austra1lan Economic Hlsto~ 10

'ECONI15 Introductol)' Quantitative Methods A 10

'ECON 116 Introductol)' Quantitative Methods B 10

lAWlOI Foundations of Law 10

10 LAWI02 Contract Law I

INFOIOl Introduction to Information Systems 10

INFO 102 Information Storage and Management 10

MNGTlII Introduction to Management and 10

200 """'I

Organisational Behaviour Subjects from Arts (Group A)/Computer4O Sctence/Law/Mathematlcs/Sclence degree programmes on the recommendation of the relevant Head of Department and the approval of the relevant Dean.

COMM20 I Corporate Accounting and Reporting 10

COMM202 Corporate Financial Regulation and 10 Control

, Prescribed subjectfor the degree.

I

2

2

2

2

I

2

I

2

I

2

1,2

2

1,2

I

2

'The prerequisite for Finandal Accounting Fundamentols is:

PrerequIsite

See Footnote I

See Footnote 2

COMMIOI Financial Accounting Fundamenta1s

See Footnote 2

ECONI15 Introductol)' QuantitatJve Methods A

LA WIO I Foundations of Law

INFO 10 I Introduction to Information Systems

30 credit points at lOO-level

As prescribed In relevant degre regulatJons

COMM 102 Financial Management FUndamentals

COMM 102 Financial Management FUndamentals

(0 Higher School Certificate aggregate or rwtiDnal aggregate equivalent to or better than the selection aggregate required for admtsston to the Bachelor of Commerce degree course; or

, (t/) a pass in Introductory Quantitative Methods B (or Mathematics 103) and Mfcoeoorwmlcs I and

Macroeconomics I .

AvaUable only to mid-year entry students in their first year of enrolment.

FlICulty of Economlca end Cornrnerce

SectIonTh ....

SUbject Credit PoInts Semester Offered

COMM203 Costing PrinCIples and Method

COMM204 PlannIng. Control & Performance Evaluation


COMM20B Corporate FInancIal Management

·ECON250 Microeconomics II

·ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON202 European Economic HistOIy3.4

ECON203 AsIan Economic HIstory 13.4

ECON204 AsIan EconomIc HIstory U3.4

ECON205 AsIan EconomIc HIstory m3.4

ECON20B Comparative Economfc Systems A 4

• Prescribed subjectsJor the degree .

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

I

2

2

2

2

2

Prerequisite

Rul •• Governing Academic AWlrd.

COMMI02 Financial Management Fundamentals and either ECON 116 Introductory Quantitative Melhods B or INFO 10 I Introduction to Infonnation Systems and SfATIOI Introductory Statistics

COMM203 Costing PrincIples and Melhod

ECONII0 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90). ECONIII MacroeconomIcs I. COMMI02 FInancIal Management Fundamentals and either ECONII6 Introductory Quantitative Melhods B or INFO 101 Introduction to Infonnation Systems and SfATIOI Introductory Statts tics.

COMM207 Securities AnalysIs

ECON 11 0 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90 Mlcroeconomfcs A)

ECONlll Macroeconomics I

ECON 102 EconomIc HIstory A or ECONI03 Australian EconomIc HIstory or ECON 11 0 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeconomics I.

ECONI02 Economic History A or ECON 103 AustralIan EconomIc HIstory or ECON 110 Mtcroeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeconomics I

ECONI02 Economic HIstory A or ECONI03 AustralIan EconomIc History or ECON 11 0 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeconomics I

ECONI02 Economic History A or ECON 103 Australian EconomIc History or ECON 110 Microeconomics I (or ECON 190) and ECON III Macroeconomics I

ECON 11 0 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeconomics I

Candidates who pass 20 credit points at 200-Ievel oj Ecorwmlc History subjects as listed may coWlt Jurther Ecorwmlc History subjects as 3OO-IeveL

FlICulty of economic. end Commerce

SlCtion Thr.

SUbject Credit PoInts Semester Offered

ECON209 Comparative Models and cases4 10 2

ECON210 Political Economlcs4 10

ECON211 Theory of Public Cholce4 10 2

ECON216 industry Economfcs A 4 10

ECON217 Industry Economics B4 10 2

ECON21B Problems of Developing Countrles4 10

ECON220 Industrial Relations lIA 4 10

ECON22I Industrial Relations UB4 10 2

ECON230 Introductory Labour Economtcs4 10

ECON240 Introductory Econometrtcs4 10

ECON24I Econometrics 14 10 2

ECON242 Applied Econometrics 14 10 2

ECON243 Mathematical Economics A4 10

ECON225 Japanese Economy 10 2

LAW204 Law of Business Organisations 10

LAW205 Business and Consumer Credit Law 10 2

LAW207 Trade Practices Law 10

LAW225 The Law of Employment 10

• Prescribed subjects for the degree

Prerequisite

Rule. Governing Academic Award.

ECON 110 MIcroeconomIcs 1 (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeconomics I

ECON 110 MIcroeconomIcs I (or ECONI90) and ECONI II MacroeconomicsI

ECONIIO Microeconomics I (or ECON 190) and ECON I II Macroeconomics I

ECON 11 0 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONIII Macroeconomics I

ECON2 I 6 Industry Economfcs A

ECONII0 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONI I I Macroeconomics I

Subjects totalling 40 credit points

ECON220 Industrlal Relations IIA

ECONl10 Microeconomics I (or ECONI90) and ECONlll Macroeconomics I

ECONI16 Introductory Quantitative MethodsBorMA1l-I103Mathematlcs 103

ECON240 Introductory Econometrics

ECON240 Introductory Econometrics

ECON 116 Introductory Quantitative Methods B or MA1l-I I 03 Mathematics 103

ECONllO ECONI90)

Mtcreconomlcs I (or !illlI. ECON III

Macroeconomics I Q[ ECON204 Asian Economic History II


LA WI 02 Contract Law I



•• At least 70 credltpolnts must be chosenfrom these subjects. with a mtntmumoJ30 credit polntsfrom suI?Jects designated as Jootnote 5.


s.cUonThr ..

Sulyect Credit PoInts Semester Offered


MNGT231 Marketing Research

MNGT224 Consumer Behaviour


MNGT226 Business Venturing


MNGT228 Organisation Structures and Design

MNGT232 Services Marketing

MNGT240 Australian Labour History

INF0201 Human Context ofInfonnation Systems

INF0202 AnalysIs of Information Systems

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Level 200 subjects from Arts (Group A) 30 Computer Science/Law/Mathematics/ Science degree programmes on the recommendatton of the relevant Head of Department and the approval of the relevant Dean

300 Jevel

COMM301 F1nanclalAccountingTheory 10 Construction

1

2

2

1

2

2

2

2

Prerequisite


MNGTIII Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGT203 FoundationsofManagement

MNGT230 Marketing Prtnclples or MNGT204 Prtnclples of Marketing and ellher ECONI16 Introductory Quantitative Melhods8 orSTATlOI Introductory Statistics

MNGT230 Marketing Prtnclples or MNGT204 Principles of Marketing

MNGTI II Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGT203 FoundationsofManagement

MNGTIII Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGT203FoundattonsofManagement

MNGTIII Introduction toManagement and Organisational BehaViour or MNGT203FoundationsofManagement

MNGTI II Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour or MNGT203 FoundationsofManagement


60 credit points and including one of ECON220 Industrial Relations !lA, ECON 1 02 Economic History A, ECON 103 Australian EconomiC History, HISTIO 1 The Foundation of Australian Society, HISTI02 Australia In lhe1\ventleth Century, SOCA203Work In Industrial Society

INFO 10 1 Introduction to Information Systems

INFO 101 Introduction to Infonnation Systems

As prescribed In Ihe relevant degree regulations

COMM202 Corporate FInancial Regu !atlon and Control and COMM20 1 Corporate Accounting and Reporting


Sulyect Credit PoInts

COMM302 Reconstruction of Accounting 10

COMM303 Accounting and DecIsion 10 Support Systems

COMM305 Audltlng Theory and Melhod 10

COMM306 Contemporary Auditing Technology 10

Special Topic A 6 10

Special Topic 8 6 10

COMM307 Taxation 8 10

COMM316 Behavioural, Organisational and S 10 Aspects of Accounting

COMM317 Taxation A 10

ECON306 International Economlcs A5 10

SectIon Three

Semester Offered

2

2

2

2

PrerequIsite


COMM202 Corporate F1nanc\al Regulation and Control and COMM20 1 Corporate Accounting and Reporting

COMM204 Planning, Control and Per fonnance Evaluation

COMM201 Corporate Accounting and Reporting (corequlslte)

COMM305 Auditing Theory and Method and and Issues COMM20 1 Corporate Accounting and Reporting

See Footnote 6

See Footnote 6

COMM317 Taxation A

COMM204 Planning, Control and Per fonnance Evaluation

Subjects totalling at least 30 credlt points from 200 level offered by Ihe Department of Commerce.


'.' At /east 70 credit points must be clwsenJrorn these suQjects with a minfmwn oj 30 credit points from sulyects designated as Jootnote 5.

6 Topics will be based on demand and avaUabUity oj staff and could,for example, Include:

Subject Prerequtslte

COMM308 Contemporwy Issues in FinancIal Accounting COMM30 I FInancial Accounting Theory Construction or COMM302 Reconstruction oj AccOWlting

COMM309 CoIporate FInancial InJormatlon Analysts COMM20 1 CoIporate Accounting and Reporting and COMM207 Securlttes Analysis

COMM31O AccoWlting. Organisations and Society

COMM311 AccoWlting and Small Enterprise

COMM312 International Accounting and FInance

COMM3 I 3 Advanced Issues in Securities Analysis

COMM202 Corporate FInancial Regulation and Control

COMM202 CoIporate FInancial Regulation and Control andCOMM204 Planning, Control and Performance Evaluation and COMM208 Corporate FInancial Management

COMM20 1 Corporate Accounting and Reporting and COMM208 Corporate Financial Management

COMM207 Securities Analysts and COMM208 Corporate FInancial Management

COMM314 Advanced Issues in FInancial Management COMM313 Advanced Issues In Securlttes Analysts

COMM315 Taxation C COMM307 Taxation B (or Taxation prior io 1989)

Feculty of economics end COmmerce

s.ctIon Thr ..

Subject Credit PoInts Semester Offered

ECON307 International Economics B5

ECON30B Macroeconomic PlanningS

ECON309 Urban Economics5

ECON31O Regional Economics5

ECON311 Environmental Economics5

ECON312 Managertal Economics5

ECON313 Growth and Fluctuations5

ECON314 Topics in Economic Development5

ECON315 Public Flnance5

ECON316 Australian Public Flnance5

ECON317 Economic Doctrines & Methods A 5

ECON318 Economic Doctrtnes & Methods B5

ECON319 Economic Doctrines & Methods C5

ECON322 MonetaI)' TheoryS·7

ECON323 FInancial Institutions & PolicY;·7

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Prerequ/sUe

Aule. Governing Acedemlc Award.


ECONI16 Introductol)' Quantitative Methods Band ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II or ECON20 I Economics II







ECON315 Public FInance





ECON322 Monelal)' Theol)'

'.' At least 70 credit points must be chosenJrom these subjects with a minimum oj 30 credit points from sufdects deSignated as Jootnote 5.

To coWl/; as 200·level if passed prior to 1990.

Feculty of Economics end Commerce

Section Thr ..

Subject Credit PoInts Semester OJfered

ECON325 Industrtal Relations ilIA 5 10

ECON326 Industrtal Relations IIlB5 10

ECON33O The Economics of Employment 10 and Unemployment5

ECON33I Contemponuy Issues In Labour 10 Economics5

ECON340 Econometrtcs 1I5 10

ECON34 I Econometrtcs 1Il5 10

ECON342 Applied Econometrics 1I5 10

ECON343 Mathematical Economics B5 10

ECON350 phUosophlcal Issues In Economlcs5 10

·ECON360 Microeconomics III 10

·ECON361 Macroeconomics III 10

MNGT333 Strategic Marketing Management 10

MNGT335 International Marketing

MNGT336 Analytical Marketing

MNGT338 Advertising and Promotions Management

MNGT339 Industrtal Marketing

MNGT341 Entrepreneurship

MNGT343 Enterpt1se Development

MNGT344 Government and Business

• Prescribed subjects Jor the degree

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

Prerequ/sUe

Aule. Governing Academic Award.

ECON221 Industrial Relations lIB. 1AW202 Employment Law (advlsol)')

ECON221 Industrtal Relations lIB

ECON23O Introductol)' Labour Eco nomlcs andECON250 MicroeconomicS II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON23O Introductol)' Labour Economics, ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II.

ECON241 Econometrics I

ECON340 Econometrtcs II

ECON241 Econometrtcs I or ECON242 Applied Econometrics I

ECON243 Mathematical EconomlcsA. ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II


ECON250 Microeconomics II


Subjects totalling 30 credit points from B.Bus . Group B.

MNGT230 Marketing PrinCiples or MNGT204 Prtnclples of Marketing

MNGT230 Marketing Principles or MNGT204 Principles of Marketing



MNGT225 Enterpt1se Management or MNGT312 Enterprise Management

MNGT226 Business Ventut1ng or MNGr203FoundationsofManagement

IAWIOI Foundations of Law and eI· ther MNGTlII Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour orMNGT203 Foundations of Management

Faculty of Economic. SectIon Thr.. Rul •• Governing Faculty of Economics SectIon Th.... Rul •• Governing and Commerce ADedemIc Award. and Commerce ADedemlc Award.

Subject Credit Semester PrerequIsIte PoInts Olfered

SUbject Credit Semester PrerequIsite PoInts Olfered

MNGT345 Issues In Small and Medtum 10 Enterprise Management

MNGT346 Small and Medium Enterprise Policy 10

MNGT34 7 Organisational Change 10

MNGT348 Strategic/Advanced HUman 10 Resource Management

MNGT354 International Human Resource 10

PHIL393

Management

Human Values and Commercial Practice

10

STAT3IO Total Quality Management 10

INF0303 Information Systems and the Organisation

10

400 level

Level 300 su~ects from Arts (Group ~/ 20 Computer Science/law /Mathemattcs/ Science degree progammes on the recommendation of the relevant Head of Department and the approval of the relevant Dean

ECON40 1 Economics IV - Part I 40

ECON402 Economics IV - Part 2 40

2

2

2

2

2

2

2

FY

FY

MNG1'225 Enterprise Management or ECON404 Industrial Relatlons IV - Part I

MNGT312 I MNG1'225 Enterprise Management or MNGT312 Enterprise Management I MNG1'228OrganlsatlonStructuresand Design

MNG1'227 Human Resource Manage ment. MNGT228 Organlsatlon Structures and Design (Advisory)

MNGT227 HUman Resource Manage ment or MNGT304 Personnel Manage-ment

ECON360 Microeconomics III l!I: ECON361 Macroeconmlcs III l!Il!1 at least 20 credit points at the 300 level

ECON405 Industrial Relations IV - Part 2

40

40

FY

FY

Passed at credit level or higher ECON325 Industrial Relations IlIA. ECON326 Industrial Relations I1IB and two of the foUow!ng: ECON330 Labour Economics I. ECON331 Labour Economics n. LAW225The LawofErnployment. S0CA203 Work In Industrial Society. MNGT227 Human Resource Management.MNGf348Strateg!c/Advanced Human Resource Management or such other subjects as may be approved by the Head of the Department of Economics.

ECON404 Industrial Relations IV - Part 1 (corequlslte).

At least 40 credit points from 200 level Note: Not aU suldects listed above will necessarily be offered In any one year. subjects.

INF0202 Analysis oflnfonnation Systems

As prescribed In the relevant degree regulations

ECON360 Microeconomics III.' ECON361 Macroeconomics III and at least 40 credit ponts from 200 level subjects and 30 credtt points selected from 300 level subjects offered by the DepartmentofEconomlcsandapprovai by the Head ofthe Department ofEconomics

ECON40 1 Economics IV - Part 1 (corequlslte)


SectIonTh .... Rule. Governing Academic Award.

LIST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE BACHELOR OF INI'ORllATlON SCIENCE

SUbject Credit Semester DIsdpI/ne Prerequisite PoInts OJfered

lOO\evel -INFO 10 I Introduction to Information 10 1.2 Information Systems-

Systems

-INFO 102 Information Storage and 10 2 Information Systems INFO 101 Introduction Management to Infonnation Systems

·COMPlll Introduction to Computer 10 Computer Science Science I

COMP 112 Discrete Structures 10 2 Computer Science COMP III Introduction to Computer Science I and MATIl102

COMPI13 Introduction to 10 IT Computer Science COMPIII Introduction to ArtlficlallntelUgence Computer Science I (Co

requisite)

-STATIO I Introductory Statistics 10 1.2 Statistics

OR -STATI03 Introductory Mathematical 10 2 Statistics MATIl102 Mathematics 102

Statistics (adviSOry)

COMM 10 I FInancial Accounting 10 Commerce HSC aggregate or notional Fundamentals aggregate eqUivalent to or

better than the selection aggregate reqUired for entry to the Bachelor of Commerce degree course

COMMI02 FInancial Management 10 2 Commerce COMM 10 I FInancial Fundamentals Accounting Fundamentals

I.AW101 Foundations of Law 10 I Law

I.AW102 Contract Law I 10 2 Law I.AW101 Foundations of Law

MATIl111 Mathematics III 10 1.2 Mathematics HSC 2 Unit Mathematics

MATIll12 Mathematics 112 10 1.2 Mathematics MATIl111 Mathematics III or MATI-I 101 Mathematics 101.

MATIl102 Mathematics 102 10 Mathematics MATIl111 Mathematics 111 <T HSC 3 Unit MathematIcs

MATIl103 Mathematics 103 10 2 Mathematics MATIl102 Mathematics 102 or MATI-I 111 Mathematics 111 and MATIll12 Mathematics 112

• Prescribed subjects for the degree

SUJyect

MNGTIll


Credit PoInts

Introduction to Management 10 and Organisational Behaviour

lOO-level subjects offered in other degree 40 courses and approved by the Dean.

2OO\evel -INF0201 Human Context of Information 10

Systems

-INF0202 Analysis of Information Systems I 0

INF0203 Information Systems Design 10

INF0204 Commercial Progranunlng 10

MNGT232 Services Marketing 10

COMP221 Comparative Programming 10 Languages

COMP222 Theory of Computation 10 COMP223 Analysis of Algorlthms 10 COMP224 The Unix Operating System 10 COMP225 ArtIficial IntelUgence 2 10

STAT201 Mathematical Statistics 10

STAT202 Regression Analysis 10

STAT206 Design and Analysis of 10 Experlments and Smveys

STAT205 Englneerlng Statistics 5

200-level subjects offered In other degree 40 courses and approved by the Dean.

- Prescribed subjects Jor the degree

_lion 'III ... Rul •• Governing Academle Award.

Semester DIsdpI/ne PrerequIsite OJfered

1.2 Management Subjects totalling 30 credit points


2 Information Systems INF0202 Analysis of Infor-mation Systems

Information Systems INFOIOllntroduction to Information Systems

2 Information Systems INFOI02 Information Storage and Management and INF0202 AnalysiS of Information Systems

Information Systems INFO 1 02 Infonnation Storage and Management

2 Management MNGT230 Marketing Principles

I Computer Science COMPIII. COMPI12 or COMPI13 (advisory)

2 Computer Science COMPI12 and COMPI13 I Computer Science COMP112 2 Computer Science COMPIII (advisory)

Computer Science COMPI13 COMPI12 (advisory)

Statistics MATIl103 Mathematics 103 or STATIOllntroductory StatistIcs and MATIl112 Mathematics 112

2 Statistics STAT2O! Mathematical Statistics

2 Statistics STAT201 Mathematical Statistics

I Statistics MATIl112 Mathematics 112 or MATH 102 Mathematics 102


300 level


SectIon 111 ... Rul •• Governing Academic Award.

Subjects totalling at least 40 credit potnts must be chosen from one of the dtsctpllne groups.

Sulyect Credit Semester DIscIpline Prerequisite

PoInts Offered

Infonnatlon Systems Groyp

INF0301 Data Base Management 10 I Information Systems INF0203 Infonnation Systems Systems Design and

INF0204 Commerctal Programmtng

INF0302 Information Systems Methods 10 Information Systems INF0203 Infonnation and and Techniques Systems Destgo

INF0303 Information Systems and the 10 2 Information Systems INF0202 Analysts of Infor-Organisation mation Systems

INF0304 Knowledge Systems 10 2 Information Systems MA1lI212 Discrete Math-ematics and INF030 I Data Base Management Systems

INF0305 Information Systems Project 20 FY Infonnation Systems INF0301 Data Base Man-agement Systems (corequtstte)

INF0306 Industrial Research 10 2 Information Systems 1NF010l Introduction to Infonnation Systems. INFOI02 Information Storage and Management.

INF020 I Human Context of Information Systems. INF0202 Analysts of Information Systems.

INF0203 Infurmation Systems Design. INF0204 Commercta1 Programmtng (with at least credit average). INF030 I Data Base Management Systems and INF0302 Infonnatlon Systems Methods and Techniques and approval of Head of Department of Management

Computer Science Group

COMP321 Software Engineering 20 FY Computer Science COMPIII. COMP221 and

and Project COMP224 (advisory)

COMP322 Computer Vision and 10 2 Computer Science COMP225. MA1lI112

Robotics (Advisory)

Subject

COMP323

COMP324

COMP325

COMP326

COMP327

COMP328

COMP329

COMP330

COMP331

COMP332


Credit PoInts

Computational Logic 10

Parallel Processtng 10

Database Systems 10

Data Security 10

Princtples of Operating 10 Systems

Computer Networks 10

Compiler Design 10

Graphic User Interfaces 10

Geometric Data Structures 10

Computer Graphics 10

Statistics Group

STAT301 Statistical Inference 10

Math-

STAT302 Study Destgo 10

Regres-

STAT303 Generalized Linear Models 10

STAT304 TIme Series AnalysIs 10

STAT310 Total QuaUty Management 10

Other

300-level subjects offered tn other degree 40

courses and approved by the Dean

400-1_1

SectIon Three

Semester DIscIpline Offered

I Computer Science

2 Computer Science

Computer Science

2 Computer Science

Computer Science

2 Computer Science

Computer Science

2 Computer Science

I Computer Science

2 Computer Science

Statistics

2 Statistics

2 Statistics

Statistics

2 Statistics

Ruin GovernIng _Ie Award.

Prerequisite

COMP222

COMP223 ilI!!iELEC 170

COMP1l2

COMPI12. COMP325 (Advisory)

ELEC 170. COMP223 and COMP224 (Advisory)

COMPI I 2l!1ld. ELEC 170. COMP223. COMP224 (Advisory)

COMP221. ELEC 170 (Advisory)

COMP1l2. COMP221 and COMP224 (Advisory)

COMPI12. COMP223 (Advisory)

COMPI12 and MA1lI112. MA1lI217 (Advisory)

STAT201 Mathematical Statistics. MA1lI20 I

ematics 201

STAT201 Mathematical Statistics.STAT202

slon Analysis

S1'AT201 Mathematics Statistics and STAT202 Regresston Analysts

STAT2O! Mathematical Statistics and STAT202 Regression AnalysIs

40 credit potnts at the 200 level

See relevant degree rules.

Subjects totalling 80 credit points must be chosen from one of the diSCipline groups.

Faculty of economic. end COmmerce

SUli/ect Credit PoInts

Computer Science

COMP411 Special Topic A 10

COMP412 Special Topic B 10

COMP413 Special Topic C 10

COMP414 Special Topic D 10

COMP425 Honours Project 20

COMP435 Special Topic E 20

COMP44I Cryptographic Techniques 10

COMP442 Natural Language Processing 10

COMP443 Fonnal Reasoning in 10 ArtIficiallntelUgence

COMP444 Progmm Semantics 10

COMP445 Computational Geometry 10

COMP446 Advanced Computational 10 Geometry

COMP447 Gmph Algorithms 10

COMP448 Advanced Compiler Design 10

COMP449 Advanced Parallel 10 Processing Theory

COMP450 Dlstrlbuted Opemtlng Systems 10

SectIon 1I'Ir ..

Semester DIsciplIne Offered

I Computer Science

2 Computer Science

Computer Science

2 Computer Sctence

IT Computer Science

IT Computer Science

Computer Science

2 Computer Science

I Computer Science

2 Computer Science

Computer Science

2 Computer Science

Computer Science

Computer Science

Computer Science

2 Computer Science


Prerequisite

Pennlsslon of Head of Department

Pennission of Head of Department



Penntsston of Head of Department


Pennission of Head of Department, COMP326 (Advisory)

Pennission of Head of Department, COMP225 (Advisory)

Pennission of Head of Department, COMP225. COMP323 (Advisory)

Pennission of Head of Department, COMP222. COMP323 (AdviSOry)

Pennission of Head of Department, COMP223. COMP331 (AdviSOry)

Permission of Head of Department. COMP445 (Advisory)

Pennlssion of Head of Deparrtment. COMP223 (AdvIsory)

Pennission of Head of Department, COMP329 (AdvIsory)

Permission of Head of Department. COMP324 (Advisory)

Pennission of Head of Department, COMP327. COMP328 (Advisory)

Subject

COMP45I

COMP452

Statistics

Faculty of Economic. and COmmerce

Credit PoInts

Advanced Parallel 10 Processing Applications

Theory of Databases 10

SectIon Th,..

Semester DIscIp/Ine Offered

Computer ScIence

Computer Science

Rul .. Governing Acedemlc Awards

Prerequisite

Pennlsslon of Head of Department, COMP324 (AdvIsory)

Pennission of Head of Department, COMP325 (Advisory

Candidates are required to have a credit or better average In at least 40 credit points from 3OO-level sub-jects offered by the Department of Statistics.

STAT401 Probability Theory 10 I Statistics STAT402 AnalysIs of Categorical Data 10 Statistics STAT403 Demography and SUrvival

Analysis 10 2 Statistics STAT404 Robust Regression and

Smoothing 10 Statistics STAT405 Statistical Consulting 10 2 Statistics STAT406 Methods for Quality

Improvement 10 2 Statistics STAT407 Advanced Topics in Statistics 10 I Statistics STAT408 Project 10 IT Statistics or

STAT409 Project 20 IT Statistics or

STAT410 Project 30 IT Statistics

!!!:

STAT411 Project 40 IT Statistics


_nth ... Rul •• Governing Academic Awards

UST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE BACHELOR OF LAW AND ADIIINISTRATION

SUlyect CredU PoInts Semester Prerequisite Offered

LAWIOI Foundations of Law 10 I

LAWI02 Contract Law I 10 2 LAWIOI Foundations of Law

LAWI03 Company Law I 10 LAWIOI Foundations of Law

LAW225 The Law of Employment 10 LA WI 02 Contract Law I

INFO 101 Introduction to Information Systems 10 1.2

MNGTlII Introduction to Management and 10 1,2 Subjects totalling 30 credit potots at Organisational Behaviour loo-Ievel

MNGT227 Human Resource Management 10 2 MNGTllllntroduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour

GroupB

COMM317 Taxation A 10 COMM20 I Corporate Accounting and Reporting

COMM307 Taxation B 10 2 COMM317 Taxation A

LAWI04 Administrative Law I 10 LAWIOI Foundattons of Law

LAW205 Business and Consumer Credit Law 10 2 LAWI02 Contract Law I

LAW207 Trade Practices Law 10 LAWI02 Contract Law I

LAW210 FamllyLaw 10 LA WI 0 1 Foundations of Law

LAW211 Company Law 2 10 2 LAWI03 Company Law I

LAW212 Contract Law 2 10 LAWI02 Contract Law I

LAW321 Spectal Topic In Law I 10 LAWIOI Foundations of Law

LAW322 Special Topic In Law 2 10 1.2 LA W203 Personal LtabtUty Law

MNGT224 Consumer Behaviour 10 2 MNGT230 Marketing Principles

MNGT225 Enterprise Management 10 2 MNGTIIIlntroductiontoManagement and Organisational Behaviour

MNGT226 Business Venturing 10 MNGTIII Introductlon to Management and Organisational Behaviour

MNGT228 Organisation Structure and Design 10 MNGTllllntroducttontoManagement and Organisational Behaviour

MNGT230 Marketing PIinciples 10 MNGTIII Introductlon to Management and Organisational Behaviour

ECON220 Industrial Relations IIA 10 Subjects totalling 40 credit potots

SfAT310 Total Quality Management 10 2 40credtt points from 200 level subjects

MNGT333 Strategic Marketing Management 10 2 Subjects totalling 30 credit points from RBus. Group B

MNGT335 International Marketing 10 MNGT230 Marketing Principles

MNGT336 Analyttcal Marketing 10 MNGT230 Markettog Principles

MNGT338 Advertising and Promotions 10 2 MNGT230 Markettog Principles

Management

MNGT339 Industrial Marketing 10 MNGT230 Marketing Principles

MNGT34 I

MNGT342

MNGT343

MNGT344

MNGT345

MNGT346

MNGT347

MNGT348

MNGT351

MNGT352

MNGT353

MNGT354

Faculty of Economics and Corrvnerce

_nth ...

SUlyect CredU PoInts Semester Offered

Entrepreneurship 10 I

Venture capital & 10 1 Development capital

Enterprise Development 10 I

Government and Business 10 2

Issues tn Small and Medium 10 2

Enterprlse Management

Small and Medtum Enterprise 10 2

Policy

Organisational Change 10 2

Strategic/Advanced Human 10 2 Resource Management

Training and Development 10

Information Systems and Human 10 Resource Management

Organlsattonal Psychology 10 I

International Human Resource 10 Management

,<~,:'L a F ,I.~, ~J .£1-" ~ iTl' F'i'""" T~V' ()

". jj' J' ,'1> # '~<\ •• J.h u .. l V:J

~} . ~

Rul .. Governing Academic Award.

PrerequIsite

MNGT225 Enterprtse Management

MNGT225 Enterprtse Management, MNGT341 Entrepreneurship and COMMI02 FInancial Management Fundamentals

MNGT226 Bustoess Venturtng

MNGTIII totroductlon to Management and Organisational Behaviour i!Il!1 LAWIOI Foundations of Law

MNGT225 Enterprtse Management


MNGT228 Organisational Structures and Design

MNGT227 Human Resource Manag-ment, MNGT228 organisation Struc-tures and Design (AdviSOry)

MNGT227 Human Resource Manage-ment

INFO 1 0 1 Introduction to Infonnation Systems and MNGT227 Human Re-source Management



section four

Faculty Policies Relating to Undergraduate and Honours Degree Courses

1. Deferment

Applicants offered a pa1ce In an undergraduate program will nonnally not be granted a defennent if the reason for that defennent is to undertake tertiary studies in this or any other institution.

2. Enrolment

Enrolment In • subject after the third week of the semester In wbich It I. offered wiD DOt be approved.

(I) Ordinary degree

The Dean tn the application of Rule 5 of the Award Rules may approve enrolment of a student In good standing in up to 10 additional credit points in each of the final two semesters in the case of a full-time student who will graduate If that candidate passes 100 credit points In that academic year. Enrolent in 50 credit points in the final semester may be approved If the student is in good standing and will complete the degree on passing 50 credit points.

(2) Compulsory Subjects

(a) Bachelor of Commerce

Introductory Quantitative Methods A and B or Introductory Statistics are not compulsory subjects for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 103 and who proceed directly to and pass Introductory Econometrtcs.

Students may nottcount both Introductory Quantitative Methods and either STATIO! or STATl03 towards the degree.

(b) Bachelor of Economics

Introductory Quantitative Methods A and B are not compulsory subjects for students who have successfully completed Mathematics 103 and who proceed directly to and pass Introductory Econometrtcs.

(c) Bachelor of Business

Students may complete not more than one of:


MNGT334 Project In Marketing

MNGT350 Project in Human Resource Management

MNGT349 Project In Industrial Relations

MNGT340

LEIS319

Project in Enterprise Management

Project in Tourism Management

(3) Honours Degrees

(a) Economics IV. Industrial Relations IV

Candidates considering enrolment in Economics IV or Industrtal Relations IV should contact the Head of the Department of Economics at the begtnning of Semester 1 in the final year of undergraduate study.

(h) Accounting IV

Candidates considering enrolment in Accounting IV should contact the Head of the Department of Commerce at the end of the second year of full time undergraduate enrolment or fourth year of part time enrolment.

(c) Statistics

Candidates wishing to enrol in 400 level Statistics subjects must have a credit or better average In at least 40 credit points from 300 level subjects offered by the Department of Statistics.

(d) Computer Science

Candidates wishing to enrol In 400 level Computer Science subjects must satisfy the prerequisites for those subjects at a satisfactmy level.

(4) Enrolment in Extraneous Subjects

Nonnally. enrolment In extraneous subjects is pennltted only in the final year of study. Enrolment in extraneous subjects Is restrtcted to 20 credit points in the year and will not be approved If enrolment for that semester would exceed 40 credit potnts.

3. Combined Degree CourBell

Applications to a combined degree program will be approved for full-time candidates only. who have completed the first year of their course with at least credit average.

The Faculty Board. Faculty of Economics and Commerce. has approved thefollowtngcomblned degree courses:-

SectIon Four Faculty PollcJe.

BacheiorofCommerce/BachelorofEngtneering in Mechanlcal Engineering

BachelorofCommerce/BachelorofEngtneering in Industrial Engineering

BachelorofCommerce/BachelorofEngtneering in Chemlcal Engineering

BachelorofCommerce/BachelorofEngtneering In Civil Engtneering

BachelorofCommerce/BachelorofEngtneertng In Electrical Engineering

BachelorofCommerce/BachelorofEngtneertng in Computer Engtneertng

Bachelor of Commerce/Bachelor of Mathematics

BachelorofEconomics/BachelorofEngtneering in Mechanical Engtneering

BacheiorofEconomtcs/BachelorofEngtneenng in Industrial Engineering

BachelorofEconomics/BachelorofEngtneering in Chemical Engtneering

BachelorofEconomics/BachelorofEngtneering in Civil Engtneering

BachelorofEconomtcs/BachelorofEngtneerlng In Electrical Engineering

BachelorofEconomics/BachelorofEngtneertng In Computer Engineering

Bachelor of Economics/Bachelor of Mathematics

Candidates considering enrolment tn the combined degree should consult the Faculty Secretary regarding details of the subjects Included in the courses approved by the Faculty Board.

4. Credit

In all cases, Faculty Board may consider the granting of "conditional" credit.

Diploma Program

Credit may be granted tn recognition of subjects passed in this Untversttyor another approved tertlaIY institution provided that each subject for which credit Is sought shall be substantially the same as a subject Included In the list of subjects approved for the Diploma program. Unspecilledcredit will not be granted.

Credit Is not granted In respect of subjects with a combined value exceeding 80 credit points.

Faculty of Econorncs and Commerce

Bachelor Degree ProgrIlll1ll

Graduates

(I) A graduate of this University or of another university. or graduates or diplomates of an approved tertiary institution. may be granted credit tn recognition of subjects passed. provided that:

(a) each subject for which credit is sought should be substantially the same as a subject included in the Itst of subjects approved for the course to which the graduate is seeking admission;

(b) credit is not granted in respect of subjects with a combined value exceeding 100 credit points;

(c) such a candidate seeking credit in subjects with a combined value exceeding 80 credtt points must at the time of first enrolltng in the course have the entire cou rse approved by the Faculty Board acting on the recommendation of the Heads of Departments concerned. Subsequent variations in this prescribed course will require the approval of the Dean acting on the recommendation of the Heads of the Departments concerned.

(2) Notwithstanding the provisions of I(a). credit may be granted in 40 unspecified credtt points tn the course where the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institution do not correspond In content with any subject tn the Ustof subjects approved for the course.

Undergraduates

(1) Undergraduates of this or of another university or of an approved institution who have not previously enrolled tn the course to which admission Is being sought, may be granted credit in recognition of subjects passed. provided that:

(a) the undergraduate was eligible for admission to this University at the time of admission to that other university or approved tertiary institUtion. or has achieved a sattsfactory record tn the eqUivalent of one year full-time study at that other university or approved tertiary institution:

SectIon Four Faculty Policies

(h) the subject forwhtch credit is sought shaJJ be substanttally the same as a subject tnc1uded tn the )jst of subjects approved for the course in which the undergraduate is seeking admission.

(cl such an undergraduate shall not receive credittnrespectofsubjectswithacombtned value exceeding 100 credit points in the degree course. except In the case of an undergraduate transfen1ng from another degree course tn this University. who may be aJJowed credit for additional subjects if these subjects are common to both courses.

(2) NotwIthstandtng the provisions of Section I (h). an undergraduateofthisorofanotherunlversity or of an approved tertiary Institution may be granted credit in 40 unspectfted credit points in respect of subjects which are not substantially the same as subjects Included in the list of subjects approved for the course to which the undergraduate is seeking admission provided that the undergraduate -

(a) complies with Section I (a) and I (c)

(b) has the proposed course approved by the Faculty Board at the time the concession is granted; and

(c) does not depart from the approved course without the approval ofthe Dean. acting on the recommendation of the Head of the department concerned.

(3) 'Undergraduates who have passed subjects in a degree course offered by this Faculty may seek to complete the requirements for that degree by undertaking studies at another university or approved tertiary Institution.

(a) Applications from such undergraduates who. after the completion of at least two years of full-time enrolment or five years of part -time enrolment have not maintatned a satisfactory rate of progress as detennined by the Faculty Board under the Rules Governing Unsatisfactory Progress. shall not be approved by the Faculty Board except In exceptional circumstances and on the recommendation of the Dean.

(b) The Faculty Board may grant credit to an undergraduate previously enrolled in a degree course in this Faculty in recognition


of any subjector subjects passed at another university on the following conditlons:-

(1) the subject or subjects passed shall be substantially the same as a subject or subjects included in the Itst of subjects approved for the course In which the candidate is enrolled;

(U) credit shall not be granted In respect of subjects with a combined value exceeding 40 credit potnts. except that in special circumstances the Dean may approve credit in 20 additional credit points.

(c) Notwithstanding the provisions of (b)(t)

above. credit may be granted In 20 credit points tn the degree where .the subject or subjects passed at the other university or approved tertiary institu tion do not correspond in content with any subject tncluded in the Itst of subjects approved for the course.

'An undergraduate Wishing to obtain the benefit oj these sections must apply in writing to the DeanJor approval oJtheproposed course by the lastday oJthe previous semester. The students nutSt supply full andcompletedderoilsoJtheproposedcourse including detaUs oJthe content oJindwidua/ subjects. The Dean wtH consult Heads oj Departments about individual subjects and prepare a submission Jor the Faculty Boord. Subjects approved by the Faculty Boord wUI be specijlc and wUI be Jor one academic year only. 'The Faculty Board wUl determine the extent oj credit to be granted in the course if the approved subject is completed successfully. If the approved subjects are not completed wUhin the academic year specijled by the Faculty Boord. a student Wishing to gain credit under these sections must submit a new application to the Dean in writing.

S. Prerequisite.

(1) Relaxation of prerequisite reqUirement

The Dean. in the application of Rule 6 of the Award Rules may approve the relaxation of a prerequisite condition where. afterconsultation with the Head of the Department offertng the subject. he is satisfied that a candidate has passed eqUivalent alternative studies.

(2) Advisory Prerequisites

(a) Microeconomics I and Macroeconomics I are advisory pre- or corequisltes for

Section Four Faculty Policies

Introductory Quantitative Methods A and B;

(b) Foundations of Law Is an adViSOry prerequisite for Auditing Theory and Method;

(c) Introductory Labour Economics is an advisory pre- or corequlsite for Industrtal Relations IIA:

(d) Law of Employment Is an adviSOry pre- or corequtstte for Industrial Relations IlIA;

(e) Introductory Quantitative Methods A and B are adviSOry prerequisttes for Corporate Accounting and Reporting;

(0 Corporate Ftnanclal Regulation and Control is an adviSOry corequlstte for Corporate Financial Management;

(g) Corporate Accounting and Reporting Is an adViSOry prerequisite for Corporate Financial Management;

(h) Corporate Accounting and Reporting Is an advtsorycorequisiteforSecurltlesAnalysis.

8. hamlnations

(I) Nature and Extent of Examtntng

The Faculty Board has detennined that the nature and extent of examining In a subject shall be that reqUired by the Department offertng the subject. Details are prOvided by the Departments at the beginning of each semester.

(2) Special Consideration

Special consideration may be given in accordance with the procedures outlined on the Special Consideration Application form which is avatlable from the Faculty office or Student Division counter.

The Faculty Board has appointed a committee to consider appltcations submitted by candidates for special consideration in accordance with Rule 13 of the EXamination Rules. The Committee shall make a recommendation on each application to the relevant Departmental Examinations Committee. Late _ppHcations will DOt be accepted other than in e:z:ceptional circ1llD8tances.

Special examinations are nonnally helddurtng the week follOwing the end of the examination pertod. Candidates who have applied for special


consideration should consult the relevant department's notlceboard.

(3) Grading of Results In Subjects

The Faculty Board has detennlned that the result awarded In a subject shall be one of the following grades of result taken from the Ust of approved results detennined by the Senate:-

HI Honours Class I

H2A Honours Class II Division I

H2B Honours Class II Division II

H3 Honours Class III

HD High Distinction

D Distinction

C Credit

P Pass

UP Ungraded Pass

S Supplementary Examination

Incomplete (where the letter I Is followed by a number signifying a year, the result Is expected to be available In December of the signified year)

W Withdrawn

FF Fan

EF Excluded, fall

IS2 Result available at end of semester 2

7. Gracllng

The Bachelor of BUsiness may be conferred with Merit on those candidates who achieve a Distinction average.

S. Progress

In accordance with the Rules Governing Unsatisfactory Progress the Faculty Board has detenntned the following poUcy:·

(1) (aJ If a candidate's academic record since admission shows all fallures after enrolment In 80 credit points, that candidate will be asked to show cause as to why a condttton should not be Imposed on re-enrolment that the candidate's program be restricted.

(b) Ifln any year following the completion of 80 credit pOints a candidate's academic record since admission to the course Is such that the credit point value of subjects faned exceeds the credit point value of subjects

Section Four Foeulty Policies

passed, that candidate will be asked to show cause as to why the candidate should not be excluded from the Faculty. candidates who have been reviewed under (a) above and have satisfied the conditions tmposed on their re·enrolment, will not be asked to show cause at the end of that year.

(c) If a candidate faUs a prescribed subject for the second time that candidate will be asked to show cause why a condition should not be imposed on re-enrolment that the candidate not be pennltted to re-enrol in that subject.

(d) If a candidate falls a subject for the third time that candidate will be asked to show cause why the candidate should not be excluded from the Faculty.

(2) In the case of a student enrolled In a combined degree course who fails a subject counting towards a degree offered by the Faculty of Economics and Commerce, that student will be asked to show cause why a recommendation should not be made to the Admissions and Progression Committee that that student's enrolment tn the combined degree course be tennlnated (I.e. the student be pennltted to continue in one degree only).

9. Leave of Absence

If a candidate has successfully completed subjects towards the course and is In good standing. that candidate may have leave from the course for one year and no formal request is required to be made. Such candidates must submit an application to the Untverstttes Admissions Centre for re-admlsslon in September of the year of their absence.

Leave of absence may be granted for two years from the course to a student who Is in good standing and a fonnal request should be submitted. Study at another institution whilst on leave of absence from this Faculty will not be approved.

10. Tranll1tlOD Arrangement.

Candidates may not enrol in subjects which are substantially the same as those which they have passed. Full year subjects passed prior to 1992 will count as 20 credit points; half-year subjects will coun t as 10 credit points.

Subject Passed

Employment Law

Information Technology and the Law

Legal Studies I

Accounting I

Accounting IIA

Accounting lIB

Evaluation

Commercial Electronic Data Processing

Foundations of Finance

Taxation


Equivalent or SubstanttaUy the Same

The Law of Employment

Computers and the Law

Foundations of Law Personal Llab!l!ty Law

Financial Accounting Fundamentals

Financial Management Fundamentals

Corporate Accounting and Reporting

Corporate Financial Regulation and Control

Costing PrInCiples and Method Planning, Control and Perfonnance

Data Processing Elementals Data Processing in OrganiSations

Securities AnalYSiS Corporate Financial Management

TaxaUonA TaxationB

Economic History I Economic History A Australian Economic

History

Economics I

Introductory Quantitative Methods

Economics II

Economics III

Microeconomics I Macroeconomics I

Introductory Quantitative Methods A Introductory Quantitative Methods B

Microeconomics II Macroeconomics II

Microeconomics III Macroeconomics III

Economic History II European Economic History Asian Economic History I

Economic History III Asian Economic History II Asian Economic History III

Money and Banldng Monetary Theory

Section Four

Subject Passed

Labour Economics

Comparative Economics Systems

Economics and PoUtics

Foeulty Pollclea

Equivalent or SubstantfaUy the Same

Introductory Labour Economics Labour Economics A Labour Economics B

Comparative Economic Systems A Comparative Models and Cases

Political Economics Theory of Public Choice

Economic Applied Decision Analysts Statistics II Introductory Econometrics

Applied Econometrics I Applied Econometrics II

Statistical Analysis Mathematics for Economists

AnalysIs

Mathematical Economics A Advanced Statistical

Econometrics I

Industrial Industrial Relations IIA Relations II Industrial Relations lIB

Industry Economics Industry Economics A Industry Economics B

Development Problems of Developing Countries Topics In Economic Development

Administrative Law Administrative Law I

Industrial Law Employment Law. The Law of Employment

Labour Economics I The Economics of Employment and Unemployed

Labour Economics II Contemporary Issues in Labour Economics

Accounting IlIA Theory

Accounting IlIB

Financial Accounting Construction

Reconstruction of Accounting

Accounting and Decision Support Systems Behavioural, Organisational and Social Aspects of Accounting


Subject Passed equivalent or SubstantlaUy the Same

Auditing Auditing Theory and Method Contemporary Auditing Technology and Issues

Corporate Finance Advanced Issues in Secmittes Analysis

Advanced Issues In Financial Management

International Economics

International Economics A

Topics in International International Economics B Economics

Public Economics Public Finance Public Enterprise Policy

History of Economic Economic Doctrines and Thought Methods A

Economic Doctrines and Methods B

Advanced Economic Economics III Analysis

Econometrics I Econometrics A -Econometrics II Econometrics B -Econometrics III

Industrlal Relations III Industrlal Relations IlIA Industrial Relations HIB

Computing and Quantitative Methods Quantitative Methods

Queues and Design and Analysis Simulation of experiments and Non-parametric Stattstlcs

surveys

Students will be excluded from:

MNGT111 if they have passed MNGT203. Management 202 or Organisattonal Behaviour and Marketing.

MNGT230 Principles ofMarketlng if they have passed MNGT204 or Management 311 or Marketing.

MNGT227 if they have passed MNGT204 or Management 302.

MNGT225 if they have passed MNGT312 or Management 331.

Section Four Faculty Policies

INF0202 Analysis of Infonnatlon systems if they have passed Management 321.

Students who have completed COMPI01 prior to 1991 will be allowed to enrol in INF0202 and INF0203.

Students who have completed COMPI02 may be allowed to enrol In INF0204 with permission of the Head of Department of Management.

Students may not count more than one ofMNGT321. MNGT309 or INF0204.

Students who have completed COMPI02 may be allowed to enrol In MNGT309 with pennisston of the Head of the Department of Management.

Students may not count more than one ofMNGT321. MNGT309 or INF0204.

Any COMP subject offered before 1994 which is not listedin the table below has no eqUivalent In the new curriculum.

Subject Passed

COMP101

COMP201

COMP202

COMP203

COMP204

COMP205

COMP206

COMP212

COMP241

COMP299

COMP301

COMP302

COMP303

COMP304

COMP305

COMP306

COMP307

COMP308

COMP391

COMP401

COMP402

COMP403

COMP404

COMP405

COMP406

COMP408

COMP409

COMP4IO

COMP411

COMP412

COMP413

COMP414

COMP415

COMP416

COMP417


Computer Science 1

Advanced Data Structures

Computer Architecture

Assembly Language

Prog Lang Semantics

Programming In C

Theory of Computation

Intro to Programming

Cognitive Science

Project

Complier Design

Artiflciallntell!gence

Computer Networks

Database Design

Algorithm Design

Computer Graphics

Software Eng PrinCiples plus anyone 10cp 3OO-level COMP subject

Operating Systems

Special Topic 1

Adv. Artificial Intell!gence

Fonnal Semantics

Adv. Computer Architecture

Parallel Computation & VLSI

Digital Image Processing

Adv. Operating Systems

Natural Lang Processing

Adv. Complier Design

Adv. Computer Networks

Special Tople A

Special Topic B

Special Topic C

Special Topic D

Graph Algorithms

Distributed Operating Systems

Database Security

Section Four Faculty POlicies

equivalent or SubstantlaUy the Same

To be detennined

To be detennined

To be detennined

To be detennined

To be detennined

COMP II 0

COMP299

COMP329

COMP225

COMP328

COMP325

COMP223

COMP332

COMP321

COMP327

COMP443

COMP444

COMP324

COMP442

COMP448

COMP450

COMP411

COMP412

COMP413

COMP414

COMP447

COMP450

COMP326

section five

Subject Descriptions

Guide to Subject Entries

Subject Outlines and Reading Usts are set out in a standard format to factlitate easy reference. The policy adopted In this Handbook for Interpretation of the various sections Is set out below. Thts may not necessarily be the same policy adopted for other Faculty Handbooks.

Name The official subject name and computer abbreviation are Included tn the Itst of subjects approved by Faculty Board. These must be used when completing any forms regarding enrolment or variation of enrolment.

Crecllt Point.

The credit point value associated with a subject will be shown to the right of the subject name and will be abbreviated to 'cp·.

Prerequisite.

Before enroll!ng In the subject. a student shall have passed the subjects listed as prerequisites. In some cases an advtsory prerequisite Is stated and although this Is not compulsory. It would be a distinct advantage for the student to have passed such a subject. An Advisory prerequisite may be stated In terms ofN.S. W. Higher School Certificate subjects. A student who has not fulfilled the prerequisite requirements may, in a limited number of cases on the recommendation of the appropriate Head of Department. be permitted by the Dean to enrol concurrently In the prerequisite subject.

Corequlolte

A corequistte Is a subject which should be taken concurrently with another subject If not previously passed.

Hours

Fonnal sessions which students should attend. Each lecture Is of one hour duration and although the nonnallecture requirement Is at least 2 lecture hours per week. the lectures need not necessanly be held consecutively. Students should read the timetable for detatls.

hemlnatiOD

Faculty of EconOmics end Commerce

The formal examination requirements are stated. however progressive assessment Is used in most cases and students are reqUired to submit essays and exercises. Class tests may also be held during the year. Work completed during the year wlll be taken into account with a student's results at the final examination.

Failure to submit written work maytnvolveexcluston from examinations.

Content

An outUne of subject content.

Suggested Prellminary Reading

A list of read!ng material which should help the student gatn a basic understanding of a subject. This material should be read before attending the first lecture on the subject.

Tens

Essential books which are recommended for purchase.

RefereDces

Students should not restrict their reading to texts. Other references are listed to cover various aspects ofthe subject. Students may need to read all or part of a reference to gain an appreciation of a particular topiC.

Section Flv. Commerce Subject Descriptions

Commerce Subject Deocriptiono

COlOllOl FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING lOcp FUNDAMENTALS

Offered Semester I

Lecturers M. Arnold and C. Patel

Prerequisite See Note I. page 33

Hows Lectures 2 hours per week. Tutorials/ Workshops 2 hours per week

Examination One 3 hour examination and progressive assessment

Content

Analysis of the accounting function wlthtn the business environment. The development of a conceptual framework of accounting with respect to the preparation of conventional financial reports. Examination of the predominant forms of business organisation (sale traders. partnerships and companies). the relative advantages and disadvantages of each form of business organisation and the primary conventional accounting methods applied to record the financial consequences of business operations.

Texts and _~eJerences

A current text and reference guide will be provided at the commencement of the semester.

COMM102 FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT lOcp FUNDAMENTALS

Offered Semester II

Lecturers C. Patel and M. Arnold

Prerequisite Financial Accounting Fundamentals

Hours Lectures 2 hours per week.Tutorials/ Workshops 2 hours per week


Content

Consideration offundamental financial management concepts and practice. and the use of accounting Information therein. Introduction to the Australian capital market. and analysis and Interpretation of financial statements.

Development of basic management accounting techniques to provide data primarily for Internal financial assessments by management. including: allocation of overheads. product costing. budgeting. cost -volume-profit analysIs. differential analysis and


various capital investment models. These are developed in relation to operating. investment and financing decisions of a business entity.

Texts and References

A current text and reference guide wtll be provided at the commencement of the semester.

CO_I90 INTRODUCTION TO ACCOUNTlNG IOcp

Offered Semester II - Available to mid-year entry students only

Lecturer C. Yap

Hours Lectures 2 hoursperweek. Tutorials 2 hours per week.


Content

Examination of the predominant fonns of business organisation (sole traders. partnerships and companies). the relative advantages and disadvantages of each fonn of business organisation and the primary conventional accounting methods applied to record the financial consequences of business operations. Analysis of the accounting function within the business environment. The developmentofaconceptualframeworkofaccountlng with respect to the preparation of conventional financial reports.



C0MM201 CORPORATE ACCOUNTlNG AND REPORTlNG

Offered Semester I

Lecturer R Day / P. Stanton

IOcp

Prerequisite COMM I 0 I or COMM 190 and Financial Management Fundamentals

Hours Lectures 2 hours per week Tutorials 2 hours per week


Content

Accounting for corporate entities. mechanisms and general method of preparing articulated financial recordsforcorporattons' capital and tradingacttvtttes.

SectIon Flv. Commerce Subject Descriptions

leading to the preparation of Intertm and annua! flnanctal statements. and prospectuses. as required under the provisions of the Compantes Code and listtng and requirements of the Australian stock Exchange.

Form and content of published flnanctalstatements so as toconformwtth the provfslonsofthe Companies Code. listing requirements of the Australian Stock Exchange. Approved Accounting Standards. and standards Issued by The Institute of Chartered Accountants in Australia and the Australian Society of Accountants.

Text and References


001Dl202 CORPORATE FlNANCIAL IOcp REGULATIONS AND CONTROL

Offered Semester II

Lecturer P. Stanton/R Day

PrerequisIte COMMIOI or COMM 190and Financial Management Fundamentals



Content

Study of national and international accounting standards. Mechanics of. and instruments for. effecting the regulation of corporate financial infonnation. The development of ideas on the objectives of corporate accounting within a conceptual frame work.

Analysis of the forces underlying the regulatory mechanisms and their impact on the structure and content of Australian corporate financial reporting and examination of the characteristics of the alternative proposals for the restructuring of accounting.



COIDl203 C08TlNG PRlNClPLES AND IOcp METHOD

Offered Semester I

Lecturer W. Motyka

Faculty of Economics and Col1"ll"Mfce

Prerequisites Financial Management Fundamentals and either Introductory Quantitative Methods or Introductory Statistics and Introduction to Information Systems.

Hours Lectures 2 hours per week Tutorials I hour perweekandfortntghtlyComputerBasedWorkshops


content The theory and application of conventional costing principles. Cost concepts. classification and estimation; methods of forecasting costs; product costing methods and issues in job costing. process costtng. joint and by-product costing; allocation of costs; application of standard costing theory to accounting for manufacturing costs (materials. labourandoverhead) and non-manufacturing costs; comptlatlon of budgets. Selected appitcatlons of the above. undertaken with the aid of computer spreadsheet software.

Texts and Reference

Garrison. R.H. 1993. Managerial Accounting. 7th edn. Irwin.

COMM204 PLANNlNG. CONTROL AND IOcp PERFORMANCE EVAUIATION

Offered Semester II

Lecturer W. Motyka

Prerequisite Costing PrInCiples and Method

HolUS Lectures 2 hours per week Tutorials I hour per week Computer Based Workshops held fortnightly


Content

Performance measurement and analysts forplanntng and control purposes (budget variance analysis for cost and revenue centres), some behavioural aspects of accounting information; performance measurement for servtce prodUCing entitles; extended appUcattonsofcost -volume-profitanalysts; prinCiples and applicattons of cost -benefit analysis; accounttng Issues In transferprtclng. capital Investment analysis; inventory cost control models; PERf Icost planning model; accounting appltcations of Hnear programming. Selected appitcatlons of the above. undertaken with the aid of computer spreadsheet software.

SectIon Five

Text

eo_eo Subjoct DescrIptions

Garrison. RH. 1993. Managerial Accounting. 7th edn. Irwin.

References

Emmanuel. Coo Otley. & D. Merchant. K. 1990. AcoountJng for Management Control, 2nd edn. Van Nostrand Reinhold.

A reference gUide will be prOVided at the commencement of the semester.

00lIII207 8ECUlUTlE8 ANALYSIS lOop

Offered Semester I

Lecturer N. Hartnett

Prerequisites Economics I. Financial Management Fundamentals and either Introductory Quantltatlve Methods or IntroductOIY Statistics and Introduction to Infonnation Systems.

Advisory

Prerequisite Corporate Accounttng and Reporting



Content

An examination of Investment alternatives and securities markets; the development of related theories and information which can be used as a basis foropttma! Investment decisions. The follOwing issues will be examined: Investment goals; basic financial mathematics; valuation of securities; portfoito theory and securtly prtclng models; type and suitabtUty of Infonnatlon available to investors; behaviour of security prices. unresolved research issues. introduction to derivative securities.

Text and References

A current text and reference guide will be provtded at the commencement of the semester.

COMM208 CORPORATE FlNANCIAL lOop IlAJllAGEMENT

Offered Semester II

Lecturer N. Hartnett

Prerequisites Securttles AnalYSiS

Advisory Prerequisites Corporate Accounting and Reporting

Faculty of Economics end COmmerce

Advisory Co-requisUe Corporate Financial Regulation and Control

HoLUS Lectures 2 hours per week Tutorials 2 hours per week


Content

A critical appraisal of financial Issues within the finns such as: establishing objectives and functions of the finance manager; financial planning and control; principles of capital Investments; risk analyses and project evaluation; capital structures and cost of capital; working capital management; sources of finance; risk management and aspects of international finanCing.

Texts ond References


COMM317 TAXATION A

Offered Semester I

Lecturer I. G. Wallschutzky

lOcp

Prerequisites 30 credit points at 200 level offered by Department of Commerce.

Hotus Lectures 2 hours per week Tutorials I hour per week

Examination One 3 hour examination progressive assessment

Content

Income tax law and practice; Income Tax Assessment Act; overview of State and Commonwealth taxes; origins of income tax tn Australia; Commonwealth power to levy income tax; calculation of taxable income and tax payable for individuals; assessable income; allowable deductions; capital gains and losses; retirement payments; repairs; depreciation; stock; exempt Income; rebates of tax; fringe benefits tax; returns. objections and appeals.

Texts ond References

Mannix. E.F. & Mannix. J.M. 1990. Leading Coses on Australian Income Tax. 6th edn. ButteIWorths.

ButteIWorths Taxation Package comprising the Income Tax Legislation. the Butterworths Tax Handbookand the IncomeTax Question and Answer Book by Wallschutzky and Payne.

Section Five COmmerce Subject o.scrlpUons

COMM301 J'IlIIANClAL ACC01JNTlNG THEORY CONSTRUCTION

Offered Semester I

Lecturer P. Stanton

lOcp

Prerequisite Corporate Financial Regulation and Control and Corporate Accounting and Reporting

HOUTS Seminars: 2 hours per week


Content

Approaches to the fonnulation of an accounting theOIY: features. similarities and conflicts between traditional. regulatory. events. behavioural. human Infonnation processing. predictive and positive theory. A conceptual framework for financial accounting and reporting; the structure of an accounting theory.


A current text and a reading list based on articles from relevant journals wtll be provided at the commencement of the semester.

COIIM302 RECONSTRUCTION OF ACC01JNTlNG

Offered Semester 11

lOcp

Lecturer Professor F.L. Clarke; Professor C. Hooker

Prerequisites Corporate Accounting and Reporting and Corporate Financial Regulation and Control.

HOUTS Lectures/Seminars: 2 hours per week


Content - Part I

Relative roles of positive and normative theory in the context of accounting reform and policy ImpleJ11entation. Conditions precedent for the developmentof nonnative propositions in accounting. EXamination of fundamental notions of money. purchasing power. prices. price levels and price structures. asestabltshed In the economics literature on monetary theory and price theory. and their consequences for financial calculation. monetary measurement and evaluation. Analysis of the different notions of capital. wealth and Income, and evaluation of the serviceability of each In the production of data Indicative of the financial position of business entities. Adaptive and non-adaptive corporations. Evaluation of alternative data in


deciSion-making settings and audit wtth respect to adaptive and non-adaptive corporations.

Part 2

Enquiry Into western value systems and decision making. business ethics and professional behaviour.

Texts ond References - Part I

Chambers. R.J. 1966. Accounting. Evaluation and Economlc Behavior. Prentice Hall.

Chambers. R.J. 1980. Price Variation and Inflation Accounting. McGraw Hill.

Clarke. F.L. 1982. The Tangled WebofPrice Variation Accowlt1ng. Garland.

Part 2 - To be advised

A reading list based on articles from relevant journals will be prOvided at the commencement of the semester.

COMM303 ACCOUNTING AND DECISION lOcp SUPPORT SYSTEMS

Offered Semester I

Lecturer 8. Gibson

Prerequisite Planning. Control and Performance Evaluation

Hotus lectures/Seminars: apprOXimately 2 hours per week


Content

Examination of the nature and use of accounting information within organisations. General parameters established by reference to the tnfonnaUon economics decision making model are used to evaluate the requirements of accounting In major managerial activities. Alternative decision making models are also explored.


A current text and reference guide will be proVided at the commencement of the semester.

A reading list based on articles from relevan tjournals will also be provided.

COMM305 AUDITING THEORY AND METHOD

Offered Semester I

Lecturer J. Psaros

lOcp

SecHon Five COmmerce Subject DescrlpUons

Prerequisite or eo-.requisite Corporate Accounting and Reporting

HOUTS Lectures 2 hours per week Tutorials 1 hour per week

Examination One 3 hour examination and progressive assessment.

Content

The subject Is deSigned to Introduce the student to the major conceptual and technical aspects of auditing. Emphasis Is placed on financial statement audits conducted under the Corporations Law. However. as the conceptual nature of auditing Is examined. the subject provides an Insight Into other types of audit. The subject commences with an overview of the nature of the audit function and an examination of the legal, profesSional and ethical framework of auditing. A series of topiCS concerned with the technical aspects of auditing then follow. To conclude the subject an analysts Is conducted of the purpose and InfonnaUon content of audit reports.



A reading list based onartlcles from relevant journals will also be provided.

COMM308 CONTEMPORARY AUDITING lOcp TECHNOLOGY AND ISSUES

Offered Semester II

Lecturer J. Psaros

Prerequisites Auditing Theory and Method and Corporate Accounting and Reporting

Hotus Lectures 2 hours per week Tutorials 1 hour per week


Content

This subject extends upon the material covered in the subject Auditing Theory and Method. In this regard a solid understanding of Auditing Theory and Method is very Important. The subject nature of ContemporaryAuditingTechnologyandIssuesvaries from highly specific audit techniques to broader Issues of social accountabUtty.

Topics covered wtll Include: computer audttlng; statistical sampling; audit committees; statistical techniques for analytical review; audittng In the


public sector; audit reports: types and implications; the auditor and fraud. cases In corporate fraud and fallure; distress prediction; the audit "expectation gap".



Areading list based on articles from relevant journals will also be provided.

COMll307 TAXATION B

Offered Semester II

Lecturer I. G. Wallschutzky

Prerequisites Taxation A

lOep

Hours Lectures 2 hours per week Tutorials I hour per week


Content

Collection and recovery of tax; penalties; prescribed payments; provisional tax; tax agents; prior years' losses carried forward; partnerships; trusts; companies and imputation; assignment of income; prlmaIyproducers; tax avoidance; foreign tax credits; international agreements; withholding tax.


Butterworths Taxation Package comprising the Income Tax Legislation. the Butterworths Tax Handbookand the Income Tax Question and Answer Book by WaUschutzky and Payne.

COMll308 CONTEMPORARY ISSUES IN 100p FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING (a _cia) topic option)

Offered To be advised

Lecturer To be advised

Prerequlsite Financial Accounting Theory Construction or Reconstruction of Accounting

Hours Seminars: 2 hours per week


Content

Selected contemporary issues In financial accounting. especially those arising from contemporary national and international

SectIon Ave Col1VMt'ce Subject Descriptions

developments In the regulatory and conceptual frameworks for accounting and financial reporting.

Texts and Referenres

No text is prescrtbed.

AreadingllstbasedonarticlesfromrelevantJoumais will be provided at the commencement of the semester.

COIlDl309 CORPORATE FINANCIAL INFORMATION ANALYSIS (a _cia) topic option)



100p

Prerequisites Corporate Accounting and Reporting and Securltles Analysis

Hours Lectures/Seminars: 2 hours per week

Examination Progressive assessment

Content

Analysis and critical evaluation of theories and methods used to appraise and predict corporate financial performance. Topics covered include: the valld1ty and usefulness of accounting numbers. Industry and economic statistics and stock market data; an evaluation of the theoretical constructs employed in associated empirical research; the resulting Implications for Investment decision. and the measurement and presentation of accounting Infonnatton.


Foster. G. 1986. Financial StatementAnalysfs. 2nd edn. Prentice Hall.


A reading lfstbased on articles from relevant journals will also be provided.

COMll310 ACCOUNTING. ORGANISATIONS AND SOCIETY 100p (a _dal topic option)



Prerequisite Corporate Financial Regulation and Control

Advisory Prerequisite Financial Accounting Theory Construction or Reconstruction of Accounting

Hours Seminars: 2 seminar hours per week



Content

The role and significance of accounting in society. Soctal responstbUtty accounting. employee reporting and the role of accounting In industrial relations. International. publtc sector and small business issues in accounting.

Texts and Reference No Text is prescrlbed.

A reading list based on articles from relevantJoumais will be provided at the commencement of the semester.

COMll311 ACCOUNTING AND SMALL ENTERPRISE (a _clal topic option)



100p

Prerequisites Corporate Financial Regulation and Control. Planning. Control and Performance Evaluation and Corporate Financial Management

Hours lectures/Seminars: 2 hours per week


Content

Analysis of accounting concepts and procedures In an environment of small privately held enterprises. Small enterprise 1n the Australian economy; characteristics of small enterprises affecting the use of accounting Information; financial reporting considerations (government users. owners as users. creditors and lenders as users. appltcabtltty of accounting principles. appltcabiltty of accounting standards. the case for differential reporttng requirements); management reporttng considerations (financial Infonnatton needs. decision making styles. non-financial infonnation needs. key decision areas); managerial decision considerations (recording and supplying infonnatton. costing. position analysis. working capital control. pricing. planning. finance ·and Investment decisions).

Text and References


A reading list based on articles from relevant journals will also be provided.

SectIon Ave Commerce Subloct o.scrlptlonl

COIDI313 IN'I'BRNATIONAL ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE 100p (u .....,tal toplc option)

Offered Semester II

Lecturers C. Patel. M. Arnold & Professor F.L. Clarke

Prerequisites Corporate Accounting and Reporting and Corporate Financial Management

Hours Lectures/Seminars: 2 hours per week

Examinatfon One 3 hour examination and progresstve assessment

Content

Analysis and evaluation of the major Issues in international accounting. areas of International comparabtltty and confltct; institutional and other factors driving national practices. Special focus wfll be the Influence of environmental. cultural. polttical and managerial factors on the development of accounting theory and practice. Topics include; typology of international acounting practices. principles and poliCies; comparative international accounting; International harmonisation! standardisation of accounting practices; foreign currency translation issues; group accounting and segmental reporting; the emerging accounting paradigm in Eastern Europe; comparative analysis of management accounting and management tnfonnation systems; capital budgeting; perfonnance evaluation of multinational corporations; and research in multinational accounttng.


A current text and reading Itst based on arlicle. from relevant Journals will be prOVided at the commencement of the semester.

COMll313 ADVANCED ISSUES IN 100p SECUR1T1E8 ANALYSIS (a .pedal topic option)

Offered Semester I

Lecturer Professor J.K. Winsen

Advisory Prerequisites INFO 101

Prerequisites Securities Analysis and Corporate Financial Management

HOUTS Seminars: 2 hours per week

Examination Progressive assessment and one 3 hour examination


Content

Analysis of dertvatlve securities. Students develop their own spreadsheet templates for binomial option pricing. Black-Scholes. volatllityestimation put-call partty for stock options. currency options etc.

References

Smith. C.W. et al 1990. Managing Ftnancfal Risks. Harper.


A readtngUst based on articles from relevant journals will also be provided.

COMM314 ADVANCED ISSUES IN FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT (a _cia! topic option)

Offered Semester II

Lecturer Professor J.K. Winsen

IOcp

Prerequisites Advanced Issues in SecurttiesAnalysls

HOlUS LectureS/Seminars: 2 hours per week

~amination Progressive assessment and one 3 hour examination

Content

Advanced aspects of corporate financial management; currency loans hedged with options. currency trading simulation case studies in corporate investment and real options.

Texts and ReJerences

A current text and reference guide will be provided at the commencement of the semester. A reading list based on articles from relevant journals will also be provided.

COMM3lS BEHAVIOURAL. ORGANISATIONAL It SOCIAL ASPECTS OF IOcp ACCOUNTING

Offered Semester II

Lecturer B. Gibson

Prerequisite Planning. Control and Performance Evaluation

Hours Lecture/Seminars: apprOximately 2 hours per week


SectIon Five

Content

Commerce SubJoct DHc:rlpUona

The current status and historical development of selected Issues In Management Accounting. A study of the accounting tasues associated with various organlsatlonaistructures and processes. anda study ofbehavtoural and social considerations in the use of accounting information.



A readtng IIstbased on articles from relevant journals will also be provided.

ooMM40I) ACCOUNTING IV ooMM402)

Note:

ThIs suJdect is taken in thefulHime Honours Degree in Commeroe (or equivalent part·time stages). Full· time applicants should enrol in COMM401 and COMM402. Part·time candidates should enrol in COMM401 in their first year and COMM402 in their second year.

HOlUS 6-8 hours per week

~amination Not less than three 3 hour papers

Content

(I) Analytical studies and supervised Independent research in advanced finanCial and management accounting with emphasis on contemporary accounting theory and problems; e.g. Financial Accounting Theory and Construction. and Reconstruction of Accounting; Accounting and Decision Support Systems. and Behavioural ImpltcationsofAccounting (whichever not taken previously). contemporaty accounting thought, seminar In research methodology. history of accounting thought.

(2) Research Essay.


Economics Subject DellCrlpUODS

ECONI02 ECONOMIC ffiSTORY A

Lecturer J.R. Fisher

Prerequisite Nil

IOcp

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial per week

Examination End of semester examination and progressive assessment

Content

This course looks at the background to modem Australian economic development. Using simple concepts and theory. it examines:

(a) economic growth in prehlstortc Australia 5000-200 BP (Before the Present).

(b) the background to. origins and economic development of the white settlement in New South Wales 1788·1860 A.D.

Recommended Reading and Texts

B1a1ney. G. 1982. Ttiwnph oJthe NomruIs • 2nd edn. Macmtllan.

Dingle. T. 1988. Aboriginal Economy • Penguin.

References:

Jackson. R.V. 1977. Australian Economic Development in the Nineteenth Century. A.N.U. Press.

B1a1ney. G. 1983. A Land HalJWon. Sun Book •.

Nicholas. S. (ed.) 1989. Convict Workers: Interpreting Auslralia's Past

Flood. J. 1989. Archaeology oJthe Dreamtime. 2nd edn. Collins.

White. C.I992 .. Mastering Risk. Oxford.

ECONI03 AUSTRAUAN ECONOMIC ffiSTORY IOcp

Lecturer A R Buck

Prerequisite Nil

Hours 2 lecture hours and one tu torlal per week

~amlnatton End of semester examination and progressive assessment

Content

Thiscourseexamlnestheeconomlcorlglnsofmodem Australta. Particular attention is given to those Ideas and values which have Influenced Australian economic development. Topics to be discussed Include: the land question. the growth of

SectIon Five Economics SubJect Descriptions

manufactUring and the arbitration system. the impact of depression and unemployment. the rise of consumer SOCiety. and the role of government In the Australian economy. The course ranges from the mid-nineteenth century to the present.

Recommended Readtng

A detailed readtng list w1II be dlstrtbuted at the beginning of the course.

ECONllO MICROECONOMICS I

Lecturers H. Dick. P. Knlest

Prerequisite Nil

IOcp

Hours 2 lecture hours per week. 1 hour workshop per week. 1 hour tutorial per week

~amination End of semester examination and progressive assessment

Content

Microeconomics. the foundation of all economics. Is the study of the allocation of resources and the distrfbution of Income and wealth art sing from the Interaction of market forces and government intervention. This course introduces the theoretlcal concepts. principles and relationships which are the basis of evety economist's tool-kit. Taking the household and the finn as deciSion-making units. the course examines the nature of Demand and Supply and how they interact In competetive. oltgopollstlc and monopolistic markets for both products and factors. This leads into consideration ofthe Umltatlonsofmarket forces and the appropriate form of policy intervention.

Texts

McTaggart. D .. Findley. C .. and Parkin. M. 1992. Economics .. Addison-Wesley.

Bentlck. T .. & Spencer. D. 1992. Study Guide .. Addlson·Wesley.

Other References

Baumol. W.J .. Blinder. A.S .. Gunther. A.W. and Hicks. J.R 1988. Ecorwmlcs ·Princlples and Policy. Australian edn. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Waud. R .. Hocking. A .• Maxwell. p .. and Bonnlcl. J. 1992. Ecorwmics. Australian edn. Harper and Row.

Samuelson. P .• et a1. 1992. Economics. Third Australian edn. McGraw-HilI.

WtlItams. J .B. 1990. The Economic Examiner. McGraw.

Faculty of Economfcs and Commerce

EOONIII MACROECONO~C81

Lecturers P. Kniest. to be advised

PrerequisUe Nil

lOop

HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week. 1 hour workshop per week. 1 hour tutorial per week

ExamInation Continuous assessment plus one 2-hour examination

Content

This course introduces students to macroeconomic concepts. principles and policy. Topics covered include national Income accounting. income and employmentdetennlnation.inflation. the halanceof payments. monetary and fiscal policy.

Texts

To be advised.

ECONUS INTRODUCTORY QUANTITATIVE METHODS A lOop

Note: Not to count with STATIO! or STATl03.

Lecturers M.T.Gordon. G.R.Keating.J.A. Doeleman. K.M. Renfrew

Prerequisites Nil (refer to Section 1\vo of this Handbook for information concerning the adviSOry mathematics prerequisite for entry to the Faculty)

HOUTS 2 hour lecture and 2 hour laboratory session per week

Examination One final examination

Content

This Is the first of two semester courses which aim to give students an understanding of elementary quantitative and statistical procedures used In economics and business. ECON 115 (IQM A) is a pre· requisite for ECON 116 (IQM B). Both ofthese subjects are compulsory in the Bachelor of Economics degree requirements and these subjects also satisfy the requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree.

IQM A and IQM B are pre-requisites for all econometrics and mathematical courses offered at the secondyear level in the DepartmentofEconomics.

IQM A covers three broad areas: computing on IBMcompatible microcomputers and the use of spreadsheet software. mathematical techniques used in economics and business. and some basic economic statistics concepts.

s.ctIonFive

Texts

Economici Subject DelCrlpUonl

Berenson. M & LevIne. D. 1992. Basic Business Statistics" Prentice-Hall.

GB-sTAT V3.0" DynamIc Microsystems Inc.

Computlog text to be advised.

EOONU8 INTRODUCTORY QUANTITATIVE METHODS B IOcp

Lecturers M.T.Gordon. G.R.Keatlng.J .A. Doeleman. K.M. Renfrew

Prerequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods A (ECON1l5)

HOUTS 2 hour lecture and 2 hour laboratory session per week

Content

ECONI16 OQM B) is a compulsory subject in the Bachelor of Economics degree requirements. It also satisfies the requirements for the Bachelor of Commerce degree. ECON116 is a pre-requisite for all econometrics and mathematical economics courses offered at the second year level In the Department of Economics.

The IQM B course provides an introduction to the mathematical techniques used In economics and business and to the econometrics topics of correlation. regression and time series analysis. Spreadsheets (Lotus 1-2-3) and a statistical package (GB-SfAn areused in the analysis of data throughout the semester.

Texts

Berenson. M & Levine. D. 1992. Basic Business Statistics. Prentice-Hall.

O·Brien. D.T .. Lewis. D.E. and Guest. J.F. 1989. MathemoticsJor Business and Economics • Harcourt Brace.

ECONI90 MICROECONOMICS A

Lecturer B. McFarlane

IOcp

NOTE Tbis nbject 110 • .,allable only to mid-year IIDtry _cleDUIn the year ofthelrflr.t enrolment.

HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week. 1 hour workshop per week. 1 hour tutorial per week

Examination End of semester examination and progreSSive assessment

Content

Microeconomics. the foundation of all economics. is the study of the allocation of resources and the


distribution of income and wealth arising from the Interaction of market forces and government Intervention. this course introduces the theoretical concepts, principles and relationships which are the basis of every economlst's tool-kit. Taking the household and the firm as decision-making units. the course examines the nature of Demand and Supply and how they interact in competttlve. ol1gopol1stic and monopolistic markets for both products and factors. This leads into consideration of the limitations of market forces and the appropIiate form of policy intervention.

Text

McTaggart. D .. Findlay. C .. Parkin. M. 1992. Economics" Addison-Wesley.

Bentick. T .• & Spencer. D. 1992. Study Guide. Addison-Wesley.

Other References

Baumol. W.J .. Blinder. A.S .. Gunther. A.W .. Hicks. J.R. 1988. Economics - Principles and Policy. Australian edn. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Samuelson. P.. et al 1992. Economics. Third Australian edn. McGraw-Hill.

Waud. R. Hocking. A.. Maxwell. P .. Bonnlcl.J. 1992. Economics. Australian edn. Harper and Row.

EOON202/ EUROPEAN ECONOMIC ECON302 mSTORY IOcp

Lecturer S.R.Shenoy

Prerequisites For ECON202. Economic History A (ECONI02) or Australtan Economic History (ECONI03) or Microeconomics I (ECONllO) and Macroeconomics I (ECON Ill)

Prerequisites For ECON302. 20 Credit points from 200 level Economic History.

HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week and a fortnightly tutorial.

EKamination End of Semester and progressive assessment

Content Economic Growth in Europe Britain and the world economy from the end of the medieval perlod to 1914

References

Crafls. N.F.R. 1985. The British Economy in the Industrial Revolution, Oxford.

Clay. C.G.A. 1984. Economic Expansion and Social Change:. England. 1500 - 1700. 2 vols. Cambridge.

s.ctIon Flv. Economics Subject DelCrlptions

Davis. Ralph 1973. TheRiseoJtheAtlanticEconomies. London.

Floud. R. and McCloskey. D.N. (eds) 1981. The EconomIc HlskJry oj Britain Since 1700 • 2 vols. Cambridge.

Jones. E.L. 1988. Growth Recurring. Oxford.

Pollard. Sidney 19B I. PeaceJuI Conquest: The Industrialisation oj Europe 1760 -1970. Oxford.

EOON203/ ASIAN ECONOMIC HISTORY I IOcp ECON303

Lecturer S R Shenoy

Prerequisites For ECON203 Economic History A(ECONI02) or Australlan Economic History (ECON I 03) or Microeconomics I (ECON 110) IDII. Macroeconomics I (ECON Ill)

Prerequisites For ECON303 20 credit points from 200 level Economic History

HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week and a fortnightly tutorial

EXamination End of semester and progressive assessment

Content

Economic History of India

The economic development of the Indian subcontinent from the Mughal period to the Ftrst World War. the course will emphasise the growth of the division oflabour. from vollage to local. regtonal. national and International markets. Agt1culture. commerce. Industry. transport and foreign trade will be covered.

References

Dharma Kuma et al (eds) 2 vol.. 1982. 1984. Cambridge Economic History oJIndla

Chaudburi. K.N .. and Clive Dewey (eds) 1979. Economy and Society. New Delhi

EOON204/ ASIAN ECONOMIC HISTORY lllOop ECON304

Lecturer H.W. Dick

Prerequisites For ECON204 Economic History A (ECON 102) or Australlan Economic History (ECON 103) or Microeconomics I (ECON I 10) IIDd Macroeconomics I (ECON Ill)

For ECON304 20 credit points from 200 level Economic HiStory


Hours 2 lecture hours lectures per week

&aminatwn End of semester and progressive assessment

Content

Japanese Economic History

The economic development of Japan from circa 1600 to the pertod after 1945. Major topics are the Tokugawa heritage, the economic transformation since 1868 and government and business In modem Japan.

Texts:

Macpherson. W.J. 1987. The Economic Development oj Japan c. 1868-1941. MacmUlan.

Minami. R 1986. The Economic Development oj Japan, Macmtllan.

References

Allen. G.C. 198I.A ShortEconomic HistDrY oJModem Japan. 4th edn. Allen & Unwin.

Duus. p .. led) 1990. The Cambrfl1geHisfDryoJJapan. Vol. 6. Cambrtdge UP.

Jansen, M. & Rozman. G. 1986,JapaninTransition: From 1bkugawa to MeY!. Prtnceton U.P.

Lockwood. W.W. 1970. The Economic Development of Japan, Princeton U.P.

Nakane. C .. & Oishi. S. [eds) 1990. Tokugawa Japan. Tokyo UP.

Smith T.C. 1959. The Agrarian OJigins oj Modem Japan. Stanford U.P.

ECON205/ ASIAN ECONOMIC ECON305 HISTORY HI

Lecturers J.R.Fisher

lOep

Prerequis!tes For ECON205 Economic History A (ECONI02) or Australia Economic History (ECON 103) or Microeconomics I [ECON 110) and Macroeconomics I (ECON 111)

Prerequis!tes For ECON305 20 credit points from 200 level Economic History

Hours 2 hours lectures per week, one hour tutorial per fortnight

Examination End of semester and progressive assessment

Content

Modern Chinese Economic History

Major topiCS Include the spread of the market

SectIon Five Economfcs SubJect DescrlpUons

economy. population growth. the impact of the West, and the economics of Maoism.

Text:

Eastman. L.E. 1989. Family. Fields and Ancestors • Oxford UP.

References

Elvin. M. 1973. The Pattern oj the Chinese Past. Methuen.

Jones E.L. 1988. Growth Recurring. Oxford UP.

Myers. RH. 1980. The Chfnese Economy. Past and Present. Wadsworth.

Grove. L. and Daniels. C. [eds) 1984. State and Society in Ch!na, Tokyo UP.

ECON208 COMPARATIVE ECONOMIC SYSTEMS A lOep

Lecturer J.C.de Castro Lopo

Prequisite Microeconomics I [ECONIIO) AIHI. Macroeconomics I (ECON II Il

Hours 2 lecture hours per week and 1 hour optional workshop per week

Examination Either a 3 hour examination or progressive assessment

Content

This course alms at the analysis of systemic features of economic systems and at the making of informed and mature inter-system comparlsons, using basic tools of economic analysis.

The empirical content of the course wtll consist of a number of case studies, which are the object of periodical review, In response to the changtng significance of various economic systems. Focus Is placed on managed capitalist systems. viz., the United States, France, Japan, Holland. Sweden, and the emerging Asia-Pacific economies.

References

Gregory. P .. and Stuart. R.C. 1992. Comparative Economic Systems. 4th edn. Houghton Mlffiln.

Haltanl. K. 1986.Comparatlve Economic Systems: Organlzattonal and Managerial Perspectives , Prentice-Hall.

Kohler. H. 1989. Comparative Economic Systems .. Scott. Foresman.

Ward I.D.S. andWrtght.J.C.G. 1977.Anlntroduction to Market Capftalism , Longman Cheshire.

Faculty of Economfcs and Commerce

ZimbaHst. A. and Sherman. H.J. 1984. Comparing Economic Systems: A Political-Economic Approach. Academic Press.

ECON209 COMPARATIVE MODELS AND CASES lOep

Lecturer J.C.de Castro Lopo

Prerequisite Microeconomics [ECONIIO) IIIlI MacroeconomIcs I [ECON III)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week and 1 hour optional workshop per week

&amtnation Either a 3 hour paper or progressive assessment

Content

This course extends the scope of the analysts camed out In ECON208 (which is not, however. a prerequisite).

The main emphasis is placed on the examination of the more Significant critiques of modem capitalism and the embodiment of those critical Ideas in the development of a number of econdmlc systems -social democracy, command socialism, market socialism, and labour-managed socialism.

References

Bomstein. M .. led) 1989. Comparative Economic Systems. 6th edn. Irwin.

Gregory. P .. and Stuart. R.C. 1992. Comparative Economic Systems. 4th edn. Houghton Mlffiln.

Kohler. H. 1989. Comparative Economic Systems. Scott. Foresman.

Zimbaltst. A. and Sherman. H.J. 1984. Comparing Ecorwmic Systems, Academic Press.

ECON210 POLlTICAL ECONOMICS


lOep

Prerequisite Microeconomics (ECON 11 0) and Macroeconomics I [ECON III)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week

Exwnination One examination paper and other assessment

Content

This course wtll examine a range of economic Issues and theories wtthln a political context. Contemporary policy questions such as the environment, unemployment, income distribution and the role of planning and markets, will be evaluated. Emphasis

SectIon Flv. Economfcs SubJect DescrlpUons

Is placed upon Ideology. power and conl1!ct In the assessment of these Issues.

References

Byrt.W.199O.BuslnessandGovemmentlnAustra1!a, Macmlllan.

Deane. P. 1989. The State and the Economic System: An Introduction to the History oj PoI!tical Economy • OUP.

Eatwell. J. and Mllgate. M. (eds) 1984. Keynes's Economics and the Theory oJValue and Distribution. Duckworth.

Fitzgerald. T. 1990. Between UJe and Economics • ABC.

Galbralth. J. 1977. The Age oj Uncertainty. HutchInson.

Hodgson. G. 1984. The Democratic Economy: A New Look at Planning. Markets and Power. PengUin.

Jennet, C. and Stewart, R. 1990, Hawke and Australian Public Policy. Macmlllan.

Roddick. J. 1988. The Dance oj MlUtDns. Latin American Bureau.

Schumpeter. J. 1943. Capitalism. Soctalism and Democracy, Unwtn.

ECON211 THEORY OF PUBLIC CHOICE lOep

Lecturer J.A. Doeleman

Prerequis!tes MIcroeconomics I [ECON I 10) and Macroeconomics I (ECON II I)


Assessment: To be advised

Content

This course is analyttcal In nature and concerned with economic principles governing political behaviour. The theory of public or social choice can be viewed as an extension of welfare economics. Traditionally, welfareeconomlcsdealswtthquestlons of allocation and distribUtion in the context of market interaction. Related questions can be asked where choice is determined by political Interaction. Topics Include aspects of conflict theory, of game theory. and ofvotlng theory.

References

Bouldlng. K. 1962. C"'lfllct and DeJense. Harper.

Colman. A. 1982. Game Theory and Experimental Games. Pergamon Press.

Faculty of Economcs and Commerce

Frey. B.A. 1983. DemocrattcEcorwmlcPoIfcy. Oxford.

Frohlich. N. & Oppenheimer. J.A. 1978. Modem Political Economy. Prentice Hall.

Mueller. D.C. 1979. Public Choice. Cambridge.

Olson. M. 1982. The Rise and Decline oj Nations. Yale UP.

Schellenberg. J.A. 1982. The Science oj Conflict . OUP.

Tullock. G. 1967. Towards a Mathemattcs oJPoIltics. Ann Arbor.

Van den Doel. H. 1979. DemDCracy and Welfare Ecorwmlcs. Cambridge.

Weintraub. E.R 1975. Conflict and Co-operation In Ecorwmics. Macmillan.

ECON216 INDUSTRY ECONOMICS A IOcp

Lecturers To be advised

Prerequisite Microeconomics 1 (ECON 110) IUld Macroeconomics I (ECON 111)


Examination One 2 hour paper and progresstve assessment

Content

The study of market structure. conduct and perfonnance. The topics include: extensions to the theory of the finn; the role of the large corporation in Industry; the Importance of growth and profitability objectives; integration, diversification and merger; determinants of market structure (stochastic processes. cost conditions. advertising etc.); relationships between structure and market conduct. reasons for government inteIVention.

References

Clarke. R 1985. Industrial Economics. Blackwell.

Clarke. R & McGuiness. T. (ed) 1987. The Ecorwmlcs oj the Finn. Blackwell.

Devine. P.J. et al 1985. An Introduction to Industrial Ecorwmlcs. 4th edn. Allen & Unwin.

George. K.D. &Joll, C. 1981. Industrial Organisation. Allen & Unwin.

Martin. S. 1988. Industrial Economics. Macmillan.

Shepherd. W.G. 1985.The Economics oj Industrial Organisation. 2nd edn, Prentice-Hall.

Scherer. F.M. 1990. Industrial Market Structure and Economic PerJormance. 2nd edn. Houghton-Mlffiln.

section Five Economics Sublect Descriptions

ECON217 INDUSTRY ECONOMICS B IOcp

Lecturers To be advlsed

Prerequisite Industry Economics A (ECON216)

Hours 2 hours per week

Exambultton One 2 hour paper plus an assignment

Content

Thts course provides a study of the causes and suggested remedies for the malaise that has been said to characterise Australian industry in recent Urnes. The tncentlvesand impediments to structural adjustment within the Australian economy will be examined. Students will be Introduced to AustraUan Industry data sources. The structure and uses of the ASIC will be examined. Students will be expected to prepare a research paper and present the findings at a class seminar.

References

There is no one set text recommended for purchase. but a Itst of references (mainly Industries Assistance Commission and Bureau of Industry Economics reporls and papers) will be provided.

ECON2lS PROBlEMS OF DEVELOPING COUNTRIES lOcp

Lecturer C.W.Stahl and M.A.Hossaln

Prerequisite Microeconomics I (ECON 110) IUld Macroeconomics I (ECONIII)

Hours 2 lecture hours per week for one semester

Examination One 3 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content

This course commences with a discussion of the nature of underdevelopment and the development problem. Major topics that follow are: growlh. poverty and income distribution; population growth and economic development; urbanisation and migration; agricultural and industrial development; internaUonallabour migration; and environmental issues in developtngcountrtes. Case studies materials from Asia will be used extenSively throughout the course.

Text

To be advised

References

Gillis. M. et al. 1983. Economics oj Development. Norton.


Getublg. Ismael and Oshima. Harry T. (eds.) 1991. Towards Full Employment Strategy Jor Accelerated Economic GrOlVth. Asian and Pacific Development Centre. Kuala Lumpur.

Hughes. Helen (ed.) 1988. AchieVing Industrialization In East Asia, Cambridge University Press.

Meier. G.M. (ed) 1989. Leading Issues In Economic Development. 5th edn. Oxford. Note: the 4th edn will also be placed In Short Loans.

Shand. RT. (ed.) 1986. Off-Farm Employment In the DevelopmentoJRuralAsia, Volumes I and2. National Centre for Development Studies, Canberra.

Todaro. M.P. 1989. Economic Development In the Thtrd World. 4th edn. Longman Cheshire.

World Bank.I992 and 1993. World Development Report.. Oxford University Press.

United Nations Development Programme. Hwnan Development Report. 1992 and 1993. Oxford University Press.

ECON220 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IIA IOcp

Lecturers D.K.Macdonald

Prerequisite 40 credit points

Hours Two lecture hours per week plus 1 hour tutorial per forlnlght

Examination One 2 hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content

This course aims to provide students with an introduction to industrial relations concepts and tools of analysis in both the international and Australian contexts. Special emphasis will be given to the origins and historical development of the main Australian institutions.

Text

Deery. S. and Plowman. D. 199I.Australlanindustrial Relations. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hill.

References

Dabscheck. B .. Griffin. G .• & Teicher. J. (eds) 1992. Contemporary Australian Industrial Relations. Longman Cheshire.

Macintyre. S. and Mitchell. R (eds) 1989. Fowulations oj Arbitration, Oxford UP.

Turner, I. and Sandercock, L. 1983. In Union is Strength. 3rd edn. Nelson.

section RYe Economics Subject Descriptions

ECON221 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS lIB lOep

Lecturer RH. Green

Prerequisite Industrial Relations lIA (ECON220)


Examfnation One 2 hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content

This course focuses on Australia's conctliaUon and arbitration system. It covers the structures and processes of conclllatlon and arbitration. the law governing strtk.esandindustrial actlon. theprtnclples and operation of wages policy and the nature and direction of Industrial relations reform.

Texts

Deery. S. and Plowman. D. 1991. Australianindustrial Relations. 3rd edn. McGraw Hill.

Creighton. B. and Stewart. A. 1990. Labour Law: An Introduction. Federation Press.

References

Dabscheck B. Griffin G and Teicher I (eds) 1992. Contemporary Australian Industrial Relations. Longman Cheshire.

Easson M. and Shaw J. (eds). 1990. TransJorming Industrial Relations (Pluto Press)

Ford W .. Hearn. J .. et al (eds). 1987. Australian Labour Relations: Readings. 4th edn. Macmillan.

Mitchell. R and Macintyre. S.(eds) 1989. Fowulations oj Arbitration; The Origins and Effects oj State Compulsory Arbitration. Oxford University Press.

ECON225 JAPANESE ECONOMY IOcp

Lecturer H.W.Dlck

Prerequisites Both Microeconomics I (ECON II 0) mlI. Macroeconomics I (ECON III); or Asian Economic History" (Japanese) (ECON204)


Examination One long essay and final examination

Content

Japan now so dominates the Asia-Pacific region that an understandtng of the nature. dynamics and institutions of the Japanese economy is vital to a small. trading nation like Australia. Thts course seeks to go beyond populist cliches, prejudices and simpllficatlons to offer an overview of Japan's postwar economic expansion and the processes such as

Faculty of Economics and Cornrnerca

tnvestmentand structural changewhtch gave rise to it. The nature and institutions oflabourand financial markets and the structure of public finance will be examined in detan, as also the fonnulation and Implementation of poltcy In the fields of trade. Industry poltcy. public finance and regtonal balance. The final section looks at Japan's economic relations with the Asia-Pacific regton and especially Australta. The course Isdestgned to followuponAstan Economic History II (Japanese). although this Is not a formal prerequisite.

References

Johnson. C. 1982. Mm and the Japanese Miracle: 1heGrowthoJlndustrtalPollcY.1925-1975. Stanford

Minami. R 1986. The EconomJc Development oj Japan: A Quantitative Study. Macm!llan

Nakamura, T. & Kaminski, J. 1981, TIle Postwar Japanese Economy. Tokyo UP

Uchino. T. 1978. Japan's Postwar Economy, Kodansha

Yamamura. K. & Yasuba. Y. 1987. The Political Economy oj Japan: The Domestic 'Il"ansJormation. Stanford

ECON230 INTRODUCTORY LABOUR ECONOMICS lOop

Lecturer B.L.J.Gordon

Prerequisite Microeconomics (ECON 11 0) and Macroeconomics 1 (ECON III)


Examination One 2 hour paper. plus progressive assessment

Content

The purpose of this course Is to offer an Introduction to the multifaceted perspectives of the economics of labour markets and wage detennlnatlon. Topics include: alternate models of the labour market; analysis of the demand for and supply of labour services; human capital theory; theories of wage detennlnatlon; bargaining theory and wages; wage structure differentials; the wage share In national income.

Rejerences

King. J.E. 1990. Labour Economics: an Australian Perspective. Macmtllan.

NOrris. K. 1993. The Economics oj Australian Labour Markets, 3rd edn. Longman Cheshire

Section Five Economic. Subjoct Descriptions

Kaufman.B.E.I991. TheEconomJcsoJLaborMarkets and Labor Relations. 3rd edn. Dryden.

McConnell. C.R and S.L. BTUe 1992. Contemporary Labor EconomIcs 4th edn. MCGraw-Hill.

Whitfield. K. 1987. The Australian Labour Market Harper and Row.

ECON~ INTRODUCTORY ECONOlllETRlCS


lOop

Prerequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods A (ECON 115) IIIlI Introductory Quantitative Methods B (ECONI16)

HolUs 2 lecture hours and 1 hour tutorial per week


Content

The course extends the economic statistics component of Introductory Quantitative Methods to include two-sample hypothesiS testing (means and proportions) and k-sample hypothesis testing (analysis-of-variance and Chi-square tests). The simple regression model is extended to the multiple regreSSion model and the basic assumptions and problems of economebics are discussed. HypotheSiS testing In the classical general linear model framework is also covered. Detailed economic appHcattonsare investigated using software packages such as SHAZAM. MINITAB. GB-STAT and dX.

Text

Berenson. M.L. & Levine. D.M. 1992. BaslcBustness Statlsttcs. 5th edn. Prentice Hall

GB·STAT V3.0 Statistical Package. Dynamic Mlcrosystems Inc.

References

Hamburg 1987. 4th edn. Statistical Analysis Jor Decision Making, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich

Brown. W.S. 1991. Introducing Econometrtcs. West Publishing Co.

Joiner. B.L .. Ryan. B.F. eta11985. MtnttabStudent Handbook. Duxbury

Kenkel. J.L. 1990. Introductory Stattstlcs Jor Management and Economics. PWS.

Lapin. L.r.. StatlsttcsJorModemBustnessDectstons. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich


Mansfield. E. 1990. Stattstlcs Jor Business & Economics. W.W. Norton & Co.

White. K .. Haun. S .. & Horsman. SHAZAM: User's ReJerenoe Manual. UBC.

ECON241 ECONOlllETRlCS I lOop


Prerequisite Introductory Econometrics (ECON240)

HolUs 2 lecture hours plus 1 tutortal hour

Examination Progressive assessment plus examinations

Content

The first part of the course examines the mathematical and statistical techniques necessmy to undertake a detailed reading of econometric theory. tncludingmatrtxalgebra. distribution theory and estimation theory. The second part of the course focuses on the General Nonnal Linear Model In matrix fonn. including Least Squares Estimation and Maximum Likelihood Estimation. properties of the estimators and approaches to hypothesis testing (including LM. LR and Wald tests).

References

Hoel, P.G. 1984. Introduction to Mathematical Statistics. Wiley

Johnston. J. 1987. Econometric Methods. McGrawHtll

Judge. G. Htll R Griffiths. W. Lutkepohl. H. Lee. T 1988. Introduction to the Theory and Practtce oj Econometrtcs. John Wiley

ECON242 APPLIED ECONOMETRICS I lOop


Prerequisite Introductory Econometrics (ECON240)

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour

Examination Progressive assessment plus examination

Content

The cOUrse is designed to give economics and commerce students a working knowledge of the common econometric tests and methods found In the journal literature, using the econometric packages SHAZAM. PC-GIVE and the dX database. Topics include multicollinearity. autocorrelation, heteroscedasttcfty. dummy variables, nonparametric testing and BayeSian decision theory.

_nFive

Text

To be advised

References

Economics Sublect: DHcrlptions

Brennan. M. & Carroll. T. 1987. PreJace to QuantItatIve EconomIcs and Econometrtcs • 4th edn. South Western Publishing Co.

Doomtck. J.A .. & Hendry. D.F. 1992. PC-Glve V7 ReJerenoe Manual. Oxford

Doran. N.E. & Guise. J.W.B. 1984. Single Equation Methods in Econometrtcs - Applied Regression Analysis. UNE Monograph

GUJarati. D. 1988. Basic Ecorwmetrtcs. 2nd edn. McGraw-HUl

GUJarati. D. 1992. EssenttalEconometrics. McGrawHtll

Hamburg 1987. Statlsttcal Analysis Jor Dectslon Making. 4th edn. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich

Lott. W.F .• & Ray. S.C. 1992. Applied Ecorwmetrtcs: Problems wtthData5ets. Harcourt BraceJovanovtch

Maddaia. G.S. 1988. Introductton to Econometrtcs. Macmlllan

Ramanathan. R 1992. Introductory Econometrtcs with Applications. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich

White. K.J. et ai. Shazam Users ReJerenoe Manual. McGraw-Htll

ECON243 MATHEMATICAL ECONOMICS A lOop


Prerequisite Introductory Quantitative Methods A (ECON 115) and Introductory Quantitative Methods B (ECONI16) or Mathematics 103

HolUS 2 lecture hours

Examination: One 2 hour examination and progressive assessment

Content

This course Is designed primarily to provide an introduction to mathematical tools used In economics and econometrics. The topiCS dealt with include economic applications of differential and Integral calculus, the principles of matrix algebra and Its appllcatlon to input/output analysts and linear programming.

Texts

Chiang. A. 1984. Fundamental Methods oj Mathematical Economics. McGraw-Htll

References


Archibald, G,C. and Lipsey, RG. 1967, An Introduction to a Mathematical Treatment of Economics, Weldenfeld and Nicholson

Dowling, E.T. 1967, Mathematics for EconomIsts, Schaum OUtline Series

ECON211O IIICROECONOIIICS D lOep

Lecturers: P.RAnderson,A. Mahmood and C.W.Stahl

Prerequisite: Microeconomics [ (ECONllO)

Hows: 3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examlnation: One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content:

This section covers some speclaUsed microeconomlc topics not covered In Economics 1. The follOwing subjects are amongst those considered: Theories of production and consumption: Paretian optimality conditions, market power, special aspects of imperfect competition and microeconomic aspects of distribution theol)'. Alsodlscussed are externalities and market failure and the economies of common property resources.

Text:

Katz, M.L. & Rosen, H.S. 1991, Mkroeconomlcs, [rwln.

References

Eckert, Ross D. and Leftwich, Richard H. 1988, The Price System and Resource A[location, 10th edn, Dl)'den Press, Chicago

Maddala, G.S. and Miller, Ellen [989, Microeconomics: Thea'll and App[ications, McGrawHill, New York

Plndyck, Robert S. and Rublnfield, Dan[el L. 1989, Microeconomics, Macmillan, New York

Glahe, Fred R and Lee Dwight R 1981, Microeconomics: Thea'll and App[ications, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich, New York

Landsburg, Steven E. 1989, Price Theory and App[ications, 2nd edn, Dl)'den Press, Chicago

Nicholson, Walter 1987,Intennedlate Microeconomics and UsApplications, 4th edn, Dl)'den Press, Chicago

Tisdell, C.A. 1982, Microeconomics of Markets, Wiley, Brisbane

Economics Subjoct Descriptions

ECON2S1 IlACROECONOIIICS D lOcp

Lecturer W F Mitchell and M.J.Watts

Pren?QUlslte Macroeconomlcs [ (ECONIII)

HoW'S 3 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examtnatton One 3 hour paper

Content:

The broad relationships between the aggregates In the economy are analysed In this course. The principal part of the course Is focused on the detennination of the level of economic activity In the macroeconomy. this focus necessarfly embraces the factors which influence aggregate demand, the level of interest rates. the price level. and the level of employment.

As such the complex interactions between the product. money and labour markets are the key areas of study. This analysIs Is complicated by the recognition that the Australian economy Isopen and highly dependent on the International economy. The course discusses exchange rate detennination and the factors influencing the domestic economy.

The course is "debate-oriented" In the sense that conflicting models of economic activity are critically compared. The major alternative schools ofthought are introduced In this context.

The course develops theory as a foundation for policy analysts: the effectiveness of fiscal. monetary and Incomes poliCies are considered. In the context of Australla's current economic pOSition.

Texts:

Bailey, N.B. & FrIedman, P. 1991, Macroeconomics, FlnanclaIMar/rets. and the IntematlonalSeootr, [rwin

References:

Okun, A.M. 1981, Prices and Quantities: A Macroeconomic Analysis, Basis Blackwell, Oxford

Hansen, AH. 1953, A GufdetoKeynes, McGraw-Hill

Ackley, G. 1978,Macroecorwmics:ThearyandPolicy, Macmillan

ECON306 INTERNATIONAL ECONOIIICS A lOcp

Lecturer P.J .Stanton

Prerequisite Mlcroeconomlcs II (ECON250) l!I!!I Macroeconomics II (ECON25I)


Faculty of Economics and Convnerce

Examination 3 hour exam and progressive assessment

Content

The theol)' and analysis of International trade and polley. This covers the ro[eand scope for International speclaltzation, the gains from trade, optimal trade Intervention, the effects of trade at the national and International levels and the theory of preferential trading. Australian lIIustrations are used wherever poSSible.

Text

To be advised.

Reference

Krugman, P and Obstfeld, M. 1991, International Economics, 2nd edn, Harper Collins

ECON307 INTERNATIONAL ECONOMlC8B lOcp


Prerequisite International Economlcs A (ECON306)

Hows 2 lecture hours per week for one semester


Content

The course covers theory and policy relating to foreign exchange markets and exchange rate detenntnatlon; money; Interest rates and exchange rates; fixed exchange rates and foreign exchange intervention; the international monetary system and international macroeconomic polley.

Text

To be advised.

ECON308 MACROECONOMIC PLANNlNG lOcp

Lecturer J. C. de Castro Lopo

Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) Uld Macroeconomlcs II (ECON251) and Introductol)' Quantitative MethodsA (ECON 115) IIDd [ntroductol)' Quantitative Methods B (ECONI16)

Hows 2 lecture hours per week and occasional workshops for Year IV students

Examination Progresstve assessment

Content

Thts course Is essentially an Introduction to substantial issues tn the theory, design and

SectIon Five Economics Sublect DNcrlpdono

application of macroeconomlc polley In planning contexts.

Emphasis Is placed on the loglc, specification and structure of planntng designs, rather than on statistical estimation. A number of case studies are sUJveyed, but emphasis Is placed on polley planning for market economlcs, including Australia.

References

Bowles, R, and Whynes, D.K. 1979, Macroeconomic Planning, Allen and Unwin

Eatwell, J .. Mtlgate, M .. and Newman, P. 1990, Problems of the Planned Economy: the New Palgrave, Macmillan

ECON309 llRBAN ECONOIIIC8

Lecturer S.N.Jacobl

lOcp

Prerequisite Mlcroeconomlcs II (ECON250) ODd Macroeconomics II (ECON251)

HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week for one semester

Assessment To be detennined

content

This course provides a sUlVey of the economic Issues arlslngwtthin the particular framework of the urban or metropol1tan environment with emphasis on the majorcontemponuy soclo-economic Issues: poverty. crime. congestion. sprawl. slum development. and decline In the qualltyofllfe. The course also Includes discussion of the following topics: the relation of clUes to the national and regional economy; central place theory and location analysts; housing and land use theory; urban economic development and gmwth; urban sociology; urban planning; public polley and welfare.

References

Blsh, RL. & Nourse, H.O. 1975, Urban Economics and Policy Analysis, McGraw-Hill

Brown, D.M. 1974,IntroductiontoUrbanEconomlcs, Academic Press

Edel, M. & Rothenburg, J. 1974, Readings In Urban Economics, Macmlllan

Hirsch, W.Z. 1973, Urban Economic Analysis, McGraw-Hill

Leahy, W.H .. McKee, D.L .. & Dean, RD. 1970, Urban Economics. Free Press

Neutze, M. 1978, Australian Urban Policy, Allen & Unwin

Faculty of Economfcs and Col1"lf1Wrce

Perloff. H.S. & Wingo. L. 1968. Issues in Urban Economics. John Hopktns UP

Richardson. H. 1978. Urban Economics. Dayden

Schreiber, Gatons & Clemmer 1971, Economics oj Urban Problems. Houghton-Mlffiln

ECON310 REGIONAL ECONOMICS IOcp

Lecturer M.T. Gordon

Prerequisites Microeconomics II (ECON250) and Macroeconomics II (ECON251)


Examination Progressive Assessment

Content

The focus of this course is the region as a unit of economic activity and, in particular, the region as a sub-unit of the national economy. The course will be concerned with the principles underlying the formation of regional units, with the functioning of regional economies, and with investigating the detenn1nants of regional growth or decline and how these detenntnants might be altered by poltcy. Topics Included are: factor mobtltty; regional problems; regional growth; techniques of regional analysis (e.g. export base models. shift-share. Input-output models. econometric models); contemporary patterns of regional change in Australia: an introduction to regional questions in other contexts; policy issues.

ReJerences

Annstrong. H. &Taylor. J. 1987. Regional Economics and Policy. Phtltp Allan

Chisholm. M. 1990. Regions in Recession and Resurgence. Unwin Hyman

Hoover. E.M. and Glarratanl. F. 1984. AnIntroductlDn to Regional Economics. Knopf

Richardson. H.W. 1979. Regional Economics, University of Iltnois Press

Brown. A.J. & Burrows. E.M. 1977. Regional Economic Problems. Allen & Unwtn

Gore. C. 1984. Regions in Question: Space, Development theory and Regional Policy. Methuen

Butler. G.J.& Mandevtlle. T.D. 1981. Regional economics: An Australian Introduction. ugP

SectIon Five Economic. SubJoct DescrlpUons

ECON3ll Bl'lVlRONIIENTAL ECONOIIICS lOop

Lecturer J A Doeleman. M T Gordon. C W Stahl

Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) um Macroeconomic. II (ECON25I)


EKaminatJon One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content

Topfcscovereconomic analysis of pollution (including global warming). of natural resource exploitation. of conservatlonandof population growth. Externalities, cost-beneftt techniques anddtscountlngareamongst the conceptual tools common to these topiCS. Furthermore, the course discusses issues of life style and economic growth. both in the Australian context and international setting.

Main Reference Texts

Pearce. D.W. & Turner. R.K. 1990. economics oj Natural Resources and the EnVironment. Harvester Wbealsheaf

TIetenberg, T. 1988. Environmental & Natural Resource Economics. 2nd edn. Scott Foresman & Co.

Other ReJerences

Baumol. W.J. and Oates. W.E. 1979. Economics. ErwironmentalPolicyandtheQualityoJUJe.Prenttce Hall

Common. M. 1988. Environmental and Resource Economics: An Introduction. Longman

Harris. S. & Taylor. G. 1982. Resource Development and the FUture oj Australian Society. CRES.

Hartwick. J.M. and Olewtler. N.D. 1986. The Economics of Natural Resource Use. Harper and Row

Johansson. P. 1987.The Economic Theory and MeasurementofErwironmentalBeneflts. Cambrldge: Cambrldge University Press

Kneese. A.V. and Sweeney. J.L. (eds). Handbook oj Natural Resource and Energy Economics. North Holland

Seneca. J.J. & TaUSSig. M.K. 1984. Environmental Economics. Prenttce-Hall

Simon. J. 1981. The Ultimate Resource. Martin Robertson


World Commission on Environment and Development. 1987. Our Common Future. Oxford University Press

ECON312 MANAGERIAL ECONOIIICS lOop

Lecturer A. Mahmood

Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) IA4 Macroeconomics II (ECON251)



Content

This is an applied microeconomics course invoMng the application of microeconomics to managerial decision making. The topics covered include: economic optimization. demand theory. production and cost theory. market structure. forecasting. linear programming, risk and uncertainty. regulation, and capital budgettng.

Main References:

Pappas. J.L. & Hlrschey. M. 1990. Managerlal Economics. Dryden Press

Peppers. L.C. & Batls. D.G. 1987. Managerial Economics. Prentice Hall

Other ReJerences

Browning. E.K. & Browning. J.M. 1983. Microeconomlc1heory andApplicattons. Utile. Brown

Caves. R. et al. 1988. Australian Industry: Structure. Conduct and Peljonnance. Prenttce-Hall

Peterson. H.C. & Lewis. W.C .. ManagerlalEconomics. Macmtllan

Plndyck. S.R .. and Rublnfeld. L.D. 1989. Microeconomics. Macmillan

Salvatore. D. 1993. Managerial Economics in Global Economy. McGraw-Hill

Scherer. F.M. & Ross. D. 1990. Industrial Market Structure and Economic Performance. Houghton Mlffiln Co.

ECON313 GROWTH AND FWCTUATIONSIOop

Lecturers A.C.Oakley. W.F.Mltchell

Prerequisites Microeconomics II (ECON250) IUld Macroeconomics II (ECON251)

Hours 2 lecture hours for one semester

Assessment One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment

SectIonFiv.

Content

Economics Subject DescrlpUon.

The course is devoted to a study of the various dimensions of the evolution and 'motion' of the caplta1tsteconomJcsystem through time.ltconslders explanatlonsofcapltaiaccumulatton and structural change. real economic growth and fluctuattons In growth rates. Spectllc topics wtll Include expanding reproduction and balanced growth, capital accumulation and income distribution, short-term fluctuations, and the role of innovations and technological change in growth and fluctuations.

References

Harris. D.J. 1978. CapitalAccwnu/atlDnandIncome DistrtbuJion. Routledge

Kaieckt. M. 1971. Selected Essays on the Dynamics oj the Capiialist Economy. Cambrldge UP

Kregel. J. 1971. Rate oj Profit. Distribution and Growth: Two Views, Macmtllan

Lowe. A. 1976. The Path oj economic Growth. Cambrldge UP

Oakley. A. 1990. Schumpeter's Theory oJCapitalist Motion, Edward Elgar

Pasinettt. L. 1974. Growth and Income Distribution, Cambrldge UP

ECON314 TOPICS IN ECONOMIC DEVELOPMENT

Lecturers A. Hossain & B McFarlane

lOop

Advisory Prerequisite Problems of Developing Countrtes (ECON218)

Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) ODd Macroeconomics II (ECON251)



Content

Topics include dual economy models. mobtlisation of resources. labour migration, tndustrtaltsation strategies in East and Southeast Asia. and the Green Revolution. planning and the market in developtng countries; models for accelerated growth.

References

Arlff. M. & Htll. H. 1985. Export·Oriented Industrialisation: The ASEAN Expertence. Allen & Unwin

Foeutty 01 Econom .. .ndCo~

Booth. A. 1988. Agricultural Development In Indonesia. Allen & Unwin

Gnlls. M .• Perkfns D. et al. 1983. Economics oj Development, Norton

Hughes. H. 1988. Achieving Industrialisation In East Asia. cambridge UP

Kaleckf. M. 1976. Essays on Developtng Economies. Harvester Press

McFarlane. Bruce 1991. Other EconomIc Systems. Oxford UP. Melbourne

Meier. G.M. (ed) 1988. Leading Issues In EconomIc Development, 5th edn. Oxford UP

Todaro. M.P. 1988. economic Development In the Thtrd World, 4th edn. Longman Cheshire

£CON3lS PUBLIC FINANCE

Lecturer To be advised lOep

Prerequisite Microeconomics 11 (ECON250) IIIlI Macroeconomics 11 (ECON251)


&amination One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content

Theeffects of govemmenttnterventton in the economy through the budget and inter-governmental fiscal relationships are examined.

At the microeconomic level, there Is an analysts of the effects of tax and expenditure poliCies on, In partlcular. community welfare and incentives. At the macroeconomic level. aggregate models are used to analyse the relation of fiscal policy to other economic poliCies for stabtlity and growth.

References

Brown. C.V. & Jackson. P.M. 1982. Public Sector Economics. Martin Robertson

Buchanan,J.M. & Flowers, M.R ThePublfcFYna.nces. Irwin

Groenewegen. P.O. 1990. PubllcFinanceInAustralla: Theory ond Practice. Prentice-Hall

Houghton. RW. (ed) 1970. Public FInance. Penguin

Johansen. L. 1965. Public Economics. North Holland

Mishan. E.J. 1982. Cost-BenejitAnalysis. Allen & Unwin

Musgrage. RA. & P.B. 1984. PubllcFinance InTheory ond Practice. McGraw-Hill

SectIonFl" Econom.. Subloc! Descriptions

Shoup. C.S. 1969. Public FInance. Weidenfeld & Nicolson

ECON3l8 AIIlITRAUAN PllBUC J1IIL\NCB lOep

Lecturer P.RAnderaon

PrerequtsUe Publlc FInance (ECON315)


Emmtnatton One 2 hour paper and progressive assessment

Content

The first part of the course places a heavy emphasis on the economics of taxation in the Australian context. This Is followed by a segment which discusses Australian public finance from a macroeconomic potntofyjew. The course ts rounded offwith an examination ofvartous specialised aspects of Australian public finance.

References

To be advised

ECONSl7 ECONOIIIC DOCTRINES AND METHODS A lOep

Lecturer B.L.J. Gordon

PrerequisUes Microeconomics II (ECON250) and Macroeconomics II (ECON251)


EKaminaUon One 2 hour paper. plus progressive assessment

Content

Study of earner economic thought has a number of rationales. These Include the opportunity for increased awareness of the ways In which major economists Integrated their ideas. and the opportunity to Judge the present scope and current preoccupations of profess tonal Economics from the perspectives of its fonner dimensions.

In thts course we are concerned with the emergence of Econom!cs as a distinct field oftnquiry. and with the types of economic analysis which preceeded that emergence. A major focus is the thought of Adam Smith (1723-90) who Is generally regarded as the founder of classical political economy. Mercantilism and Physlocracy. the economics of which were rejected by Smith. are also surveyed. The rematnderofthecourse deals wtth the evolution of economic analysiS from the writings of the Greek philosopher ArIstotle to the seventeenth century.

Texts


Spiegel. H.W. 1991. The GrowthoJEconomicThought, 3rd edn. Duke UP

Prtbram. K. 1983. A History oJEconomlc Reasoning. John Hopkins UP

References

Lowry. S .. Todd (ed) 1987. Pre-Classlcal Economic Thought. Kluwer

Lowry. S.T. 1987. The Archaeology oj Economic Ideas. Duke. UP

Gordon. B. 1975. Economic Analysis BeJore Adam Smith. Macmillan

Langhohn. O. 1992. Economics In the Medteval Schools. Brill

Hollander. S. 1973. The Economics oj Adam Smith. Heinemann

ECON3l8 £CONOIIIC DOCTRINES AND METHODS B lOCp

Lecturers B.L.J. Gordon. A.C.Oakley

Prerequisites Microeconomics II (ECON250) and Macroeconomics II (ECON251)


Assessment Examination plus progressive assessment

Content

The course Is concerned with leading contributions to Economics during the nineteenth and early decades of the twentieth century. Topics Include: the development ofBriUsh economic orthodoxy from David Ricardo to Alfred Marshall; the general equtltbrium economics of Leon Walras; the political economy of Karl Marx, including a study of his methodology, theory of value, production and distribution theories; and 'laws of motton' of the capitalist system; and, Joseph Schumpeter's theory of economic development and business cycles In the capitalist economiC system.

Text

Blaug. M. 1985. economic Theory In Retrospect 4th edn. Cambridge. UP

SpiegeI.H.W.I991. The GrowthoJEconomicThought.

References

Carver. T. (ed) 1975. Karl Marx: Texts on Method. Blackwell

SectIon Flv. Economl .. Subloc! DeKrlption.

Hollander. S. 1987. Classical Economlcs. Blackwell

Howard.M.andKlng.J.1975. ThePo/l1icalEconomy oj Marx. Longman

Marx. K. Capital • volumes I. II and 1lI

Oakley. A. 1990. Schwnpeter's Theory oJCapltalist Motton. Elgar

O·Brien. D.P .• The Classical Economists. Oxford UP

Schumpeter. J.A..1951. The Theory oj Economic Development, Harvard UP

Schumpeter. J.A. 1939. Business ClICleS. McGrawHill

Schumpeter.J.A.1959.HistoryojEconomlcAnalysis. Oxford

ECON3l9 ECONOIIIC DOCTRINES AND METHODS C lOep

Lecturer B.L.J. Gordon, R.H. Green

Prerequisite Microeconomics 11 (ECON250) _ Macroeconomics II (ECON251)

HOUTS 2 lecture hours per week for one semester

Examlnatton One 2 hour paper. plus progressive assessment

Content

The aim of this course Is to examine the background to certain of the currents in modern economic debate. One focus Is the evolution of the Austrian school of economics, Including a treatment of the major works of the first generation -Menger. von Wieser. andBohm-Bawerk - plus some of the leading Ideas of their successors. including Mlsesand Hayek A second focus Is the development of the thought of John Maynard Keynes. follOwing through from such early works as The EeODomlc ConRm'opeet of the reMe to the QeD.eral Theory and tts aftennath. there Is also treatment of the role of the 'surplus' approach to value and distributton based on modern Interpretations of classical economics and the relationship to Keyne's principle of effective demand.

References

Spiegel. H.W. 1991. The GrowthoJEconomIcThought, 3rd edn. Duke UP

Blaug. M. 1985. Economic Theory In Retrospect 4th edn. Cambridge UP

Fitzgibbons. A. 1988. Keynes's Vision. Clarendon

Schumpeter.J.A. 1959.HistoryojEconomlcAnalysts. Oxford


Eatwell. J. and Mtlgate. M. (eds) 1984. Keynes's Economics and the Theory oJValue and DIstribution, Duckworth

Littiechtld. S. (ed.) 1990. Austrian Ecorwmics. 3 vols .• Elgar

Wood.J.C. (ed.) 1983.JohnMaynardKeynes:CrU1ca1 Assessments, Vol. 2. Croom Helm

O·Donnell. R 1989. Keynes' PhUosophy. Ecorwmlcs and PolUlcs. Macmillan

ECON322 MONETARY THEORY lOop

Lecturers P.R Anderson and M.A.Hossatn

Prerequtsite Microeconomics 11 (ECON250) UI4 Macroeconomics 11 (ECON251)


Examlnation One 3 hour paper

Content

This course begins with an examination of the controversy concerning the definition of money, and proceeds to a brief overview of the financial system. The classical. Keynesian and Monetarlst theorles of the role of money In the economy are examined and compared. and their policy lroplicatlonsare analysed. Topics such as the supply and demand for money and the relationship of the real and monetaJy sectors of the economy are considered in depth.

Theories of Interest rates, such as the loanable funds approach and the liqUidity preference theory. are studied and alternative theorles of the term structure of Interest rates are examined. A monetaty model of the Interest rate is also developed.

Addttional topics such as the monetaty dynamics of hyper-inflation and the examination of the roles of monetary factors In both exchange rates and balance of payments determination. are also Included. The course ends with an examination ofthe neoclassical monetary growth models.

References

To be advised.

ECON323 FINANCIAL INSTI11JTIONS AND POLICY lOop

Lecturer P.RAnderson. M.A. Hossain

Prerequtsite Monetary Theory (ECON322)


Examination One 3 hour paper

SecdonFive

Content

Economic. Subjoct Descriptions

11llscourse examtnes theAustral!an ftnanc!al system In detatl. considertng the maln financial Instltutlons and markets. The causes of. and effects of. the major changes whlch have occurred In the post World War 11 period are considered. Special focus is placed on recent development In financing in Australia. but aspects of internatlonal finance and global financial markets are also reviewed.

A second main theme of the course Is the study of AustralJan monetaty poHcy. The main changes that have occurred In relation to the nature and effectiveness of monetary policy (and broader financial policies) pursued by the Australian authoritles during the post World War 11 period are exam!nedlndetaU.ln partlcular. thelnterrelatlonship between changes in monetary policy and changes In the structure of the financial system are considered. The Impact of theoretical developments is also highlighted.

Text

To be advised

References

Davis. K. and Lewts. M. (eds) 1981. Australian Monetary Ecorwmics. Longman Cheshire

Hicks. John R & Wheller. Denise (eds) 1990. Money and Capital Markets in Australia. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich

Hunt. B .. & Terry. C. 1993. Financial Instntments and Markets. Thomas Nelson Australta

Juttner. D. Johannes 1990. Financial Markets. Interest Rates and Monetary Economics. 2nd edn. Longman Cheshire

Juttner. D. Johannes 1992. International Finance and Global Financial Markets. 2nd edn. Longman Cheshire

Moore. D. et al 1988. Financial Institutions and Markets. Serendip Publicatlons

Shems. Michael 1991. Money and Capital Markets: Prtcing Yteld and Analysts. Allen & Unwtn

ECON3211 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS 11IA lOop

Lecturer RH.Green

Prerequtsite Industrtal Relatlons liB (ECON221)



Content


This course covers international and comparative industrial relations. In particular. it compares the framework. conduct and performance of industrial relations In a number of countries and draws implications for Australia. Thecountries to be studied Include the UnltedStates, Brltain. Gennany. France, Italy. Sweden. canada. New Zealand. Japan and South Korea.

Texts

Bamber. G. andLansbury. R (eds) 1993. International and Comparative Industrial Relations. Allen & Unwtn

Niland. J. and Clarke. O. (eds) 1991, AgendaJor Change: An International Analysts oj Industrial Relations in 1l"WlSitlon, Allen & Unwtn.

References

Bean. R. 1987. Comparative Industrial Relations

Doeringer. P. (ed) 1981, Industrial Relations in Intematfonal Perspective

Peetz. D .. Preston. A .. and Docherty. J. (eds). Workplace Bargaining in the International Context.. Federal Department of Industrial Relations

ECON326 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS mB lOop

Lecturer D.K.Macdonald

Prerequtsite Industrial Relations liB (ECON221)

Hours 1\vo lecture hours per week

Examtnatfon One 2 hour paper plus progressive assessment

Content

Building on the foundations laid in the earlier Industrial relations courses, this course will focus on recent developments and contemporary Issues such as award restructurlng. enterprlsebargainlng. wages poltcy, occupational health and safety and disadvantaged groups In the labour market.

Text

Deery.S. and Plowman. D. 1991.Australianindustrial Relations. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hlll

References

Dufty. N. and Fells. R 1989. Dynamics oJIndustrial Relations in Australia. Prentice Hall

Dabscheck. B .• Grtffin. G .. & Teicher. J. 1992. Contemporary Australian Industrial Relations. Longman Cheshire

Section Five Economics Su~ect Descriptions

ECON330 TUB ECONOIIICS OF BIIPLOYIIBNT AND UNEMPLOYMENT lOop

Lecturers B. Hughes

PrerequfsUes Introductory Labour Economics (ECON230) and Microeconomics 11 (ECON250) IIIIIl. Macroeconomics n (ECON251). This course Is also available to students who have passed the old ECON206 or ECON207.

Hours One 2 hour lecture per week

Examination End of semester examination and progressive assessment.

Content

This course covers topiCS related to labour market adjustments between the status of employment. unemployment and not tn the labour force. with special reference to the Beverldge CUlve.

Text

Elliot. R.F .• Labour Economics: A Comparative Text. McGraw-Hlll

References

A list of references wtll be distrtbuted in the first lecture.

ECON331 CONTEMPORARY ISSVE8lN LABOUR ECONOMICS lOop

Lecturers M. Watts

Prerequisites Introductory Labour Economics (ECON230) and Microeconomics II (ECON250) 8Dd Macroeconomics II (ECON25I). The course is also available to students who have passed the old ECON206 III ECON207.

Hours One two hour lecture per week

Examination End of semester examination and progressive assessment.

Content

This course will examine Issues arlslng from the functioning of the Australian labour market. with a particular emphasis on theoretical analysis and poltcy formulation. Topics Include labour market segregation and wage inequaltty. Inflation and unemployment and the impact of enterprise bargaining.

References

A Ust of references wtll be distrtbuted In the first lecture.

Feculty of economics end ColTUTterce

ECON340 ECONOMETRICS n Lecturers To be advised

IOcp

Prerequisite Econometrics I (ECON241)

HotUs 2 lecture hours plus one tutorial hour

Examination One 2 hour examination plus progressive assessment

Content

This course in econometric theory includes a discussion of econometric methodology (emphasising general to specific compared to specific to general modelllng) and topics In choice of functional fonn. dummy variables. structural change. Generalised Least Squares. autocorrelatton. heteroscedasttctty. multtcollinearlty. errors In variables and stochastic regressors.

Students are expected to complete an applted econometrics project using econometrics packages SHAZAM and PC-GIVE and the dX database.

References

Doornick. J.A. & Hendry. D.F. 1992. PC-GIVE V7 ReJerence Mwuml, Oxford

Judge. G .. carter H1I1, R. Griffiths. W .. Lutkepoh1. H. & Lee. T.C. 1988. Introduction to the Theory and Practice oj Econometrics. W1Iey

Johnston. J. 1984. Ecorwmetrtc Methods. 3rd edn. McGraw-H!lI

Maddala. G.S. 1988. Introduction to Ecorwmetrics. Macmtllan

Pindyck. RS. and Rubinfeld. D.L. 1991. Econometric Models and economic Forecasts. McGraw-Hill

Ramanathan. R 1992. Introductory Econometrics with Appltcatkms. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich

White. KJ. et al.. SHAZAM Users Reference Manual. McGraw-H!lI

ECON341 ECONOMETRICS III


Prerequisite Econometrics II (ECON340)

IOcp

HotUS 2 lecture hours plus one tutorial hour

Examinations One 2 hour examination plus progressive assessment

Content

Topics In single equation modelling Include specification errors. distributed lags and expectations. qualttattve dependent variables. Box-

s.ctIonAve Economics Sublect DucrlpUon.

Jenkins methods. unit roots and cOintegratlon.

Topics in simultaneous equation modelling include Identlftcation. recursive systems. SURE. 2SLS and 3SLS and forecasting.

Students are expected to complete an applied econometrics project using econometrics packages SHAZAM and PC-GIVE and the dX database.

Texts

As for Econometrics II (ECON340)

ECON342 APPLIED ECONOMETRICS n IOcp


Prerequisite Applied Econometrics I(ECON242) (or Econometrics I (ECON241) conditional on the approval of the Lecturer In Charge)

HotUS 2 lecture hours. one tutorial hour


content

Further testtng of applied econometric models is covered. Including distributed lags. diagnostic checking. model selection and specification. econometric forecasting. time series analySIS and slmultaneousequatlon models (with special reference to Australian models). Extensive use is made of SHAZAM. PC-GIVE and the dX data base.

References

Brown W.S. 1991, Introducing Econometrics. West Publishing Co.

Dotl. J .L. and Adibl. E. 1988. Ecorwmetric Analysts. Prenttce-Hall

Holden. K. Peel. D.A. and Thompson J.L. 1991. Ecorwmlc Forecasting: An Introduction. Cambridge University Press

Gujarati. D.N. 1988. Basic Econometrfcs. McGrawHHI

Lott. W.F .. & S.C.Ray 1992. Applied Econometrics Problems wfthData Sets. Harcourt BraceJovanovich

Maddala. C.S. 1992. Introduction to Econometrics. MacmHIan

Plndyck RS. and Rubinfeld. D.L. 1991. Ecorwmetrtc Models and EconomIc Forecasts. 3rd edn. McGrawHHI

Ramanathan. R 1992. Introductory Econometrics with Applications, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich

Faculty of economic. end Commerce

ECON34S MATHEMATICAL ECONOMlCSB IOcp


Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250) IIIlI Macroeconomics II (ECON251) and Mathematical Economics A (ECON243)

HotUS 2 Lecture hours


Content

This course Is designed to extend the application of mathematical tools used In economics and econometrics. The topics dealt with Include the solution offirstorder. second order and simultaneous difference and differential equations and their economic applications. game theory. revision of linear programming and introduction to non-linear programmtog.

Text

Chiang. A. 1984. Fundamental Methods oj Mathematical Economics, McGraw -H!lI

References

Hoel. P.G. 1974. FInite Mathematics and Calculus with Applications to Business. W1Iey

Holden. J. and Pearson. A.W. 1983,1ntroductory Mathematics Jor Economists. Macm!lIan

Horadam. E.M. 1983. Prlncfples oJMathematicsJor Economists. Angus and Robertson

Intril!qator. M.D. 1971, Mathematical Optimisation and Economic Theory. Prentice-HaIl

The1l.H .• Boot.J.C.G. andKloek. T. 1965. Operations Research and Quantitative Economics :An Elementary Introduction. McGraw-HHI

References

Same as for Appl!ed Econometrics I (ECON242)

ECONS60 PHILOSOPHICAL ISSUES IN ECONOMICS

Lecturers S.N.Jacobl. A.C. Oakley

IOcp

HotUS 2 hour lecture per week for one semester

Assessment Written assessments; detatls to be advised

Content

This course will Critically examine the follOwing major Issues:

SectIon Five Economics Su~ect Descriptions

What are the appropriate criteria for demarcating science from non-science?; what are the appropriate criteria for demarcating 'hard' science from 'soft' science. or natural science from social science?; whatc1aimscaneconomics make for being ascience?; and wbat methodological alternatives are ava1lable for economics relative to these criteria?

The investigation of these issues wtll involve!" consideration of the follOwing topiCS: an overview of the major positions and debates In the philosophY of science durtng the 20th century; a review of the philosophical foundations of econometrics from a variety of perspectives; the concept of rattonallty and human agency In economic decision-making; a discussion of selected major phtlosophlcallssues In contemporary economic thought.

References

Blaug. M. 1980. The Methodology oj Economics. cambridge UP

Caldwell. B. 1990. Beyond PosUtvtsm, 2nd edn. Allen & Unwin

Chaimers.A. 1979. What is thisThingCalledSctence? Uni of Qld Press

HolUs. M. 1977. Models oj Man. cambridge UP

Lowe. A. 1977. OnEconomlc Knowledge. M.E. Sharpe Inc.

Machlup. F. 1978. Methodology oj Economics and Other Social &lences. AcademiC Press

Wagner. H. 1983. Phenomenology oJConsciousness and Sociology oJthe LIfe World. Unl of Alberta Press

ECONS60 MICROECONOMICS III IOcp

Lecturers P J C Stanton

Prerequisite Microeconomics II (ECON250)

HotUS 2 lecture hours per week plus 1 seminar hour per fortnight

Examination Final examination and progressive assessment

Content

This course deals with topiCS In applied mlcroeconomic analysIs. Students are encouraged to use the theory and tools they have acqUired to aSsess and question the rationale. aims and likely effects of government policy In selected topic areas, using an economic perspective. The policy areas vary from year to year according to the research Interests of the lecturers.


References

To be advised.

ECON381 MACROECONOMICS m Lecturer B.Hughes

Prerequisite Macroeconomics II (ECON25I)

lOcp

Hours 2 lecture hours per week plus one seminar hour per fortnight

&amination Final examination and progressive assessment

Content

An extension and development of topics In applted macroeconomic theory and policy that were covered In Macroeconomics II.

References

To be advised

ECON401 ECONOMICS IV ECON402

40cp 40cp

Full-time candidates will enrol In ECON40 I and ECON402.

Part-time candidates will enrol In ECON401ln the first year and ECON402 in the second year.

It Is recommended that potential Honours students consult with the Head of Department t ....... ds the end of the year prior to that In which they Intend to enrol.

Prerequisites As listed In Schedule. with Ibe general reqUirement that candidates have achieved a credit or better average In their degree studies. This requirement may be waived at the discretion of the Head of Department.

Entry to these subjects reqUires the wrltten approval of the Head of the Department of Economics

Content

Students are reqUired to take 6 semester subjects and to submit a research essay not to exceed 10,000 words.

Subjects

Students may choose from subjects and topiCS currently offered at the third and fourth year level by the Department of Economics.

Topics offered at the fourth year levellnc1ude:

Econometrics IV

Macroeconomic Analysts

SectIon Five Economl.. Subject Description.

Mlcroeconomlc Analysis

Labour Economics III

Issues in Australian Economic History

Special Topic A

Special Topic B

Additionally. up to 2 semester units from suitable programs offered by other Departments may be taken. subject to approval from Ibe Head of the Department of Economics.

ECON404 INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IV ECON405

40cp 40cp

Full·time candidates will enrol In ECON404 and ECON405.

Part·time candidates will enrol In ECON404 In the first year and ECON405 In Ibe second year.

It I. recommended that potential Honours students consult with the Head of Department towards the end of the year prior to that In which they Intend to enrol.

Prerequisites As listed In Schedule

Entry Into these subjects reqUires the written approval of the Head of the DepartmentofEconomics.

Content

Students may choose thefr program In accordance wilb the follOwing guidelines and with the approval of the Head of Department of Economics.

For the students In BEc:

a) Industrial Relations Theory and Policy; and

b) Etther Macroeconomic Analysis or Microeconomic Analysis;

and

c) 1\vo of Ibe follOwing:

Labour Economic III

Contemporary Issues in Industrial Relations

Workplace Industrial Relations

Any Economics IV topiC

Topics offered by the Department of History, Management or Sociology and approved by the Head of the Department of Economics; and

d) A research theslsofapproxtmately20,OOOwords

For students enrolled In BCom. and BA:

a) Industrial Relations Theory and Policy; and


b) Three of Ibe follOwing:

Labour Economics III

Contemporary Issues In Industrial Relations (ECON504 (MBA))

Workplace Industrial Relations (ECON505 (MBA))

Any Economic N topic

Topics offered by the Department of History. Management or Sociology and approved by the Head of the Department of Economics; and

c) Aresearch theslsofapproxtmately20,OOOwords

SUBJECTS AVAILABLE ONLY TO HONOURS STUDENTS

ECONOMETRICS IV


20cp

Prerequtsltes Requirements for Economics IV enrolment and Econometrics III

Hours 2 lecture hours per week for two semesters

&amlnation Two 2 hour papers.

Content

This honours course builds upon the single equation, simultaneous equation modell1ng and time series modelling techniques introduced In Econometrics III.

Each student is expected to complete a major applied econometrics project using packages such as SHAZAM. PC-GIVE. PC-FIML. RATS and dX.

References

Challen. D.W. & Hagger. A.J. 1983. Macroeconometric Systems Construction. Validation and Applications. Macmllian

Dhrymes, P. 1970. Econometrics, Statistical Fowulatlons and Applications. Harper & Row

Engle. RF .. & Granger. C. W.J. et al. 1991. Long-Run Ecorwmlc Relationships -Readings In Colntegratlon, Oxford UP

Fishman. G.S. 1969, Spectral Methods in Econometrics, Harvard UP

Granger. C.W.J. 1990. ModeUlng economic Series. Oxford

Harvey. A.C .• The Econometric Analysis oj TIme Series. Oxford Philip Allan

SectIon Flv. Economic. Subject Descrlptfon.

Holden. K.. Peel. D.A. and Thompson. J.L. 1990. Economic Forecostlng: An Introduction. cambridge

Hood. W.C. & Koopmans. T.C .. Studies inEcorwmetric Method, Wiley

Intrillgator. M.D .• Ecoflometrtc Models. Techniques and Applications. North-Holland

Judge. G .. GrIlBIb •• Hm. W. et aI .. The Theory and Proctfce oJEconometrtcs. Wiley

Klein. L. R et at.. Ecorwmetrtc Gaming. Macmillan

Maddala. G.S. 1977. Econometrfcs. McGraw-Hill

Malinvaud. E. 1970. Statistical Methads oj Ecorwmetrfcs. North-Holland

Mills. T.C. 1991. Time Series Techniques Jor Ecorwmtsts. cambridge UP

Plndyck. RS. & Rublnfeld. D.L. 1991. Econometric Models and Ecorwmlc Forecasts. McGraw-Hill

Theil. H .. Princtples oJEconometrfcs. North-Holland

MACROECONOMIC ANALYSIS lOcp

Lecturer W.F. Mitchell

Prerequisite ReqUirements for Honours enrolment. Including Microeconomics III (ECON360) and Macroeconomics III (ECON361)

HolUS 2 lecture hours per week for one semester and 1 seminar hour per week for one semester

Examination Sixty per cent in fonnal examination, forty per cent in essays/ seminars

Content

The course examines the historical evolution of contemporary macroeconomic theory and current issues in macroeconomic policy.

References

Argy. V. 1992. Australian Macroeconomic Policy in a Changing World Envtronment. Allen and Unwin

Chick. V. 1983. MacroecorwmlcsAfter Keynes. Philip A1lan. Oxford

Coddington. A. 1976. Keynesian Economics: the Searchfor First Principles. Allen and Unwin. London

LeIJonhufvud. A. 1971. Keynes and the Classics. Institute of Economic Affairs, London

Freedman. R 1973. Marx on Economics. Penguin. Hannondsworth

Thurow. L. 1983. Dangerous Currents: The State oj Economics. Oxford University Press


MICROECONOMIC ANALYSIS IOcp


Prerequisites Requirements for Honours enrolment. including Microeconomics III and Macroeconomics III

HolUs 2 lecture hours per week for one semester

&amlnatton One 2 hour paper plus asstgnments

Content

Microeconomic theo!)' is developed with policy applications in mind. Topics include: recent advances in demand and production theory. equtUbrium theories of markets and the correspondenceprinciple. Paretian opttmality. market failure including decreasing costs. uncertainty. second-bestsolutlons. recent developments in oligopoly theory. an examination of variations with market structure. resources allocation over time. Implicattons of uncertatntly and learning for economic behaviour and planning. and various topics In cost-benefit analysis.

References

No single text is suitable and a full reading list will be supplied. Background texts of relevance include:

Becker. G. 1971. Economic Theory. Knopf

Ferguson. C.E. 1972. Mtcroeconomtc Theory. Irwin

Henderson. J.M. & Quandt. R.E. 1980. Microeconomtc Theory. 3rd edn. McGraw·H!ll

Horowitz. I. 1970. DecisfonMaklngandTheoryofthe FInn. Holt Rinehart & Winston

Intrtligator. M.D. 1971. Mathematical Optimization and Economtc Theory. Prentice-Hall

Katzner. D. 1988. Walrasian Economics. AddisonWesley

Ng. Y.K. 1979. Welfare Economics. Macm!llan

Ma1invaud. E. 1972. LectlUes on Mfcroeoonomic Theory. North-Holland

Koutsoytannls. A. 1982. Non-Price Decisions • Macmillan

Samuelson. P.A. 1947. Foundations of Economic Analysis. Harvard UP

Tisdell. C. 1972. Microeconomics: The Theory of Economic Allocation. Wiley

Varian. A. 1984. MicroeoonomicAnalysis. Norton

SectIon Five Economics Subject Descriptions

INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS THEORY AND POUCY IOcp

Lecturers D.K.Macdonald. RH.Green

Prerequisite Requirements for Industrtal Relations IV enrohnent

Hours Two hours per week

&amfnat1on One 2 hour paper plus essay and assignments

Content

This course wt1l analyse the principal theoretical perspectives on the employment relatlonship. on trade unionism and on management and will relate them to policy prescrtptions at both the macro and micro levels.

References

To be advised.

ISSUES IN AUSTRALIAN ECONOMIC mSTORY IOcp

Lecturers J.R. Fisher

Prerequisites ReqUirements for Honours enrolment


&amlnation Progressive assessment

Content

The nature and problems of the contemporary Australian economy can only be understood through the study of its histortcal development. Accordingly this course provides an overview of Australlan economic growth during the past century with particular emphasis on the pattern of booms and slumps. structural adjustment and the changing role of government In the economy.

Text

Maddock. R and Mclean. I.W. (edsl 1987. The AustTalian Economy in the Long Run. Cambrtdge UP

References

Butlin. N.G .. Barnard A. and Pincus. J.J. 1972. Investment in AustTallan Economtc Development 1861-1900. Australian National UP

Butlin. N.G. Barnard. A. and Pincus. J.J. 1982. Government and Capitalism. Allen & Unwin

Chapman.B. (ed). 1989.AustTalianEconomicGrowth. Macm!llan

Duncan. T. & Fogarty. J. 1984. AustTalfa and Argentina: On Parallel Paths. Melbourne UP


Forster C. (ed). 1970. Australian Economic Deve/opmentin the1WentJethCentury. Allen & Unwin

LABOUR ECONOMICS m IOcp

Lecturers M. Watts

Prerequisites Requirements for Honours enrolment and Labour Economics 11

HolUs 2 lecture hours per week for one semester


Content

In this course different theoretical approaches to explaining the Incidence and persistence of unemployment In Western Economies are critically assessed. Particular attention Is paid to the Post Keynesian. New Keynesian and New Classical perspectives. Reference is also made to relevant empirlcalliterature.

References

To be advised

SPECIAL TOPIC A SPECIAL TOPIC B


IOcp IOcp

Prerequisite Requirements for Honours enrolment

HolUs 1\vo lecture hours per week

examination To be advised

Content

The subjects covered by the Special Topic A and Special Topic B vary from year to year. Details for 1994 may be obtained from the Head of Department at the time of program approval.

_nFlve Management Subject Descriptions

........ m .. t ..... ject DellCriptiOIlO

_OTIII INTRODUCTION TO IlANAGBllENT AND ORGANISATIONAL BBBAViOUR IOcp

Prerequisite 2Ocred!t points at 100 level (for B.Bus studentsl. 30 credit points at 100 level (for students in other Degress)

HOlUS 3 Lecture hours per week. 1 or 2 Tutorial hours per week

Content:

Thts course examines the distinct but related disciplines of Organisational BehaViour and Management at the individual. group and organisational levels. The course provides a review of major thoughts organisational behaviour and management. It examines aspects oftndividual and group behaviour Including; Communication & Interpersonal Skills. Motivation. Attitudes. Perceptions. Leadership. Power & AuthOrity. Group Dynamics. Corporate PIanningand Control. Decision Making. Organisational Effectiveness. Corporate Strategy and Corporate Culture. Types of Organisation Structures.

The practical relevance/applications of the theories and models. exposed in the course. are highlighted through tutorial case-studies. mint-prOject assignments and In-class experiential exercises which emphasise linkages between the two diSCiplines.

Text

To be advised

KNGT 113 AUSTRALIAN GOVERNMENT ANDPOUTICS lOcp

Prerequisite Nil

HoLUs 2 Lecture hours per week. 2 Tutorial hours per week

Content:

Thts course will examine the Institutions. processes and trends In Australian government. pollttcs and public management.

Lectures will deal with such topics as:

•

•

The principles and politics of Federalism and the Constitution.

State and Local Government .


• Executive Government, the Prime Minister and cabinet,

• • •

ParUament and the Legislative Process,

The role of the Public Service

Public Management

• •

Political Parties and the Electoral Process

Interest Groups, Lobbymgand the Policy Process

• Buslnessand the Issues-Management function.

Tutorials will focus on case studies !llustratlng the roles ofthevarlous Institutions in relation to relevant current issues. Tutorial topiCS could Include such issues as tax reform. Industrial relations, regulation/ deregulation, prtvattsatton, environmentalism. economic development social welfare. equaltty of opportunity, education and training, electoral reform and communications.

Text

To be advised

MNGT114 BUSINESS STUDIES

Prerequisite Nil

lOcp

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week, 1 Tutorial/ Workshops hour/week

Content

This unit acquaints students to a number of diSCiplines in relation to their role in the evolution and development of a business as it progresses from conception to a fully fledged organic entity. These disciplines include: Entrepreneurship and new enterprise development, Marketing and Organisational Behaviour.

Text

To be advised

MNGT224 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT230 - Marketing Prlnciples

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. TutoI1als and Workshops as required

Content

Strategic planning and marketing is more effective when it Is based on an understanding of how consumers decide which goods and services best fill their needs. Thus marketeers should understand how each Individual's personality, lifestyle (psychographics). attitudes and perceptions are

SectIon Five Monogoment Subject Descriptions

detennlned; and how they affect the consumer's decision. These issues are covered in this course which integrates marketlngprlnciplesandconsumer actions.

A second important area covered is the effect of society and culture on the decision making process of the consumer. Factors such as reference groups. thefiun!ly, socialclassandculturewillbeconsidered.

Finally the consumer's decision-making process will be analysed. Understanding this process is of utmost importance when deciding how to introduce new goods to the market.

Text

To be advised

MNGT225 ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequisite MNGf 111- Introduction to Management & Organisational Behaviour

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorlals and Workshops as Required

Content:

This course Is deSigned to investigate the essential requirements for managtng small and medium sized enterprises to success. EnterpI1se management will be based on a holtstic approach rather than using any particular function emp~s. The nature of the management task wUl be examined and compared with traditional/classical prescriptions.

Specific topiCS include:

•

• • •

• •

•

•

•

essential skills and motivations (technical. managerial and entrepreneurial - mix and balance)

the characteristics of successful enterprlses

crlteI1a for excellence In business

the management process In growing and changtng enterprises

the growth v survival dilemma

stage theory. crlsls points and business life cycles (application of the theory of discontinutttes)

business planning - strategtc and operational dimensions

strategy, competition and sustainable competitive advantage

frameworks for business growth and development

Faculty of economics and CoI'I"IIMrCe

• the performance of small and medium enterprises

Text

To be advised

MNGT228 BUSINESS VEN'nlRlNG l()cp

Prerequisite MNGf III - Introduction to Management & Organisational Behaviour

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week, Tutorlals and Workshops as ReqUired

Content:

Business Venturing examines the complex and convoluted process of creating new Business Ventures.

This process involves the synthesis of concepts (i.e. the business idea or concept). relevant resources, personal commitment and entrepreneurial drlve, and a marketable product or seIVIce. The result of successful venturing Is a viable enterprlse, but this requires more than merely accumulating the necessruy Ingredients. Business enterprises having the capacity to survive and grow, to create wealth and employment. are invariably those which are soundly conceived, planned and created, and effiCiently and effectively managed.

This course examines the process rather than the ingredients ofbuslness creation, and seeks to Identify the most appropriate process of synthesis for particular types of enterprise.

Specific topics include:-

• • • • • • • • • •

the entrepreneurial process

the ingredients of successful buslnessventurlng

types of entrepreneurs

a national process or creative iteration

the personal factor - motivation and skills

location of business activity

new venture Ideas and options

startup sequences and entry wedges

feasibility analysis and business planning

startup and early crisis and problems

• current research Issues in business venturlng

Text

To be advised

_nFlve Monogoment Subjoct Descriptions

1IN0T227 IIlJIL\lIf RBSOURCE IIAKAGEIIENT lOcp

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week, Tutorlals and Workshops as required

PrerequIsIte MNGT 111-Introduction to Management & Organisational Behaviour

Content:

This course aims to develop a crltical understanding of the role and functions of the various personnel/ human resource acttvtties In an organisation. It covers fundamental human resource management concepts. theories and issues such as human resource forecasting; job analysts and design; recruitment & selection; perfonnance evaluation; job evaluation; payment systems. employee tennlnatlon, the training function and the impact of relevant legislation on the technolOgical change on the human resource function.

Text & References:

Clark. R. 1992. Australian Human Resource Management. McGraw Hm, Sydney.

MNGT228 ORGANJllATION STRUCTURES AND DESIGN lOcp

PrerequIsite MNGf III - Introduction to Management & Organisational Behaviour

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and Workshops as reqUired

Content:

This course focuses on the problems of choice of organisational fonns and the human processes related to these. It examines the varlous theories and models of organisation/work design. It also addresses issues pertaining to the relationship between structures and human resource management processes. Aspects such as the effects of size. technology. environments, corporate strategies and corporate cultures on the structuring of organisations, are critically examined. Practical! experiential exercises. and contemporary case studies are used throughou t the course.

Text

To be advised

MNGT230 IlARKETlNG PRINCIPLES lOcp

Prerequisite MNGf III - Introduction to Management & Organisational Behaviour


Hows 2 Lecture hours per week, 1 Tutorial/ Workshop hour/week

Content:

The course introduces bastc concepts/frameworks tn marketing. Both strategic and short tenn Marketlng plannlng perspectives are developed. TopIcs Include the marketing environment. market segmentation. new product development. the marketlngmix, aswellas mixinteractions; strategies. implementations and controls.

Text

To be advised

MNGT231 MARKETING RESEARCH IOcp

Prerequisite MNGT230 - Marketing PrInciples and STATIOI -lnlroductOJy Statistics .

Hows 2 Lecture hours per week. 1\J.tortals and Workshops as reqUired

Content:

The basts of effective decision making is clear, concise and accurate Infonnation. In marketlng there are a variety of methods that can be used to gather information. For example, surveying, accessing existing publtshed government data. inteIVtewtngand so on. Each method has advantages and disadvantages.

In this course students consider the different types of data whIch can be gathered and whIch methods should be used to obtain that data.

Thiscourseexamlneshow to evaluate the information needs of the finn. how to best satisfY these needs and finally covers a varlety of methods bywh!ch the data can be turned Into useful Information.

Text

To be advised

MNGT232 SERVICES MARKETING IOcp

Prerequisite MNGT230 - Marketing PrInciples

Hows 2 Lecture hours per week. 1\J.torials and workshops as reqUired

Content:

The rapid growth of the service sector In Australta and the unique challenges facing organisations involved In the deltvery of services have contributed to the evolution of services marketmglnto aslgntflcant diSCipline of its own.

SectIon Five Ma .... gomont Subjoct Descriptions

This subject will examine the differences between the marketing of products and services. tmpUcatlons on the stages of the planning process and extend the traditional strategic marketing mix to Include additional elements appropriate to the distinct features of services. Additional aspects will Include Internalmarketlng. managing evidence. relationshIp marketlng.quaUtyservtcedeUveryandmeasurement and service customisation.

Practical/expertential exercises and contemporary case studies wtll be used to assist In the understanding of the material.

Text

To be advised

MNGT 240 AUSTRAUAN LABOUR HISTORY IOcp

Prerequisltes 60 credit points including at least ~ of the follOwing subJects:-

MNGT299. ECON220. ECONI02. ECONI03. HISTIOI. HISTI02. SOC203

Hows 2 Lecture hours per week. Seminar Program

Objectives:

The subject alms to develop In students an understanding of:

(I) The relationshIp between capItal development and the development of unions In Australia.

(U) The political and cultural traditions of the Australian Labour Movement.

(UI) The Importance and sIgnIficance of the labour movement In contemporary Australian industrial relations.

Topics:

1. WorkandSoctety - Labour Hlstory.ADefinttlon.

2. The Labour Process.

3. Convict Labour.

4. Development of Unions.

5. New Unionism.

6. Class and Ideology.

7. Political Parties.

8. Government InteIVention and Regulation.

9. Technological Change and Labour Organlsatlon.

10. Working Class Culture.

11. Women and Work.

FlCulty of Economics end Cornrnerc.

12. Unions and Industrial Relations.

13. The Contemporary Labour Movement.

Text

To be advised

MNGT332 CONTEllPORARY MANAGEMENT ISSUES IOcp

Prerequisite 90 Credit poInts from prescrIbed Bachelor of Business Group A subjects

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and Workshops as required

Content:

The purpose of this subject Is to examine contemporary management Issues and to complete preparatory work leading to the compulsory second semester Projeet In an approved specialisation area. The focus of the course will be on the necessary interactions and linkages between the fundamental areas of management. including finance, business ethics. organisational change. Industrial relations and human resources management. marketing. etc.

Students will work in groups to simulate company decIsIon making techniques and either Individually or in groups, prepare proposals for the second semester project which follows. The company simulation will selVe as the Integrating component for discussion of wider management issues. Project Management, Research Methods. Organisational, negotiation and networkIng skills will be Introduced in the context of the ongOing activities of a corporate Board of Directors.

Students wtll be expected to access current management ltterature tn researching their project proposals.

Text

To be advised

MNGT333 STRATEGIC MARKETING MANAGEMENT IOcp

Prerequisite MNGT230 - Marketing PrInciples and MNGT224 - Consumer Behaviour

Hows 2 Lecture hours Per Week. Tutorials and workshops as required

Content:

This course is deSigned to develop the students' abilities to apply the various prlnclples and theorles to specific problems. The strategic analysis

_nFln ---. DHcripHonl

frameworks will be developed. relying on basic theory discussed In the prlnclples course.

Competitive and marketing strategIes will be Introduced. These wtU better allow students to plan. manage and control their future organlsatlons marketlng activities. The theorles will be appUed not only to different competltlve environments. bu t to different economic environments. This course will use both case analysts and lectures. This will ensure that students have a "practical" approach to strategy and simply a theoretical base.

ThU

To be advised

MNGT334 PROJECT IN MARKETING IOcp

MNGT340 PROJECT IN ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT

MNGT349 PROJECT IN INDUSTRIAL RElATIONS

MNGT3110 PROJECT IN IIUIlAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT

Prerequisite MNGT 332 -Contemporary Management Issues ilillI Approval of the Head of Department of Management

Hows 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and workshops as requIred

Content:

Students complete a major project based on the framework developed In the subject Contemporary MlUUlllemeDt _eo. The project will nonnally Involve interaction with the business community and will have a practical orientation.

Students from each of the discIpline areas will attend common lectures and seminars as well as lectures In theIr specIalIst areas throughou t the course. and will be closely monitored and evaluated by a supervisor from their area specialisation.

Groups will be required to present a seminar at the end of the semester detalling the work which they carried out and their results and conclusions.

MNGT3311 INTERNATIONAL MARKETINGIOcp

Prerequisite MNGT230 - Marketing PrInCiples

Hows 2 Lecture hours per week, Tutorials and Workshops as reqUired

content:


As we move toward a world economy it Is becoming increasingly necessary for firms not only to market goods In Australia but In a varieW of countries. The differences between countries are one of the reasons that opportunities exist. but these differences also cause problems.

The differing cultures of other countries must be analysed to ensure that decisions made by the firm in a local context are still effective and profitable tn the new environment. An effective International marketing strategy is Important not only to the foreign component of a finn but also to the local parent.

This course will address the techniques needed for development promotion and marketing management of products for the International market.

Text

To be advised

MNGTSS8 ANALYTICAL IlARKE'nNG lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT 230 Marketing PrInCiples

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and workshops as required

Content

This subject is a quantitative extension of Marketing PrinCiples. This subject involves students building and Interpreting the marketing models developed through the use of various computer marketing modelling packages. Addltlonally the student will modify the Infonnatlon to examine the implications of changes in the models. This enables students to utilise the modelling systems as aids In the decision process.

The models examine Include the areas of consumer behaviour. segmentation. planning. pricing and advertiSing. The students are expected to have a basic understanding of micro-computers as this Is an essential component of the course.

Text

To be advised

MNGTSS8 ADVERTISING AND PROMOTIONS MANAGEMENT lOep

Prerequisite MNGT230 - Marketing PrInciples


SectIonFl.,.

Content:

Monogoment Subjocl Descriptions

Advertising Is one of the major forms of promotion (as dlstlnct from sales promotion). This topic will concentrate on advertising. though It will touch on personal sell!ng. publlciW and sales promotion.

Determining effective advertiSing Is an essential pari of the promotional campaign. This topic will examine setting advertising objectives. determining advertising plans. developing media strategies. developing advertising and promotional budgets and analysing evaluation procedures. Advertising research technlques will be used. These techniques will complement the work done In marketing research. though it marketing research is not a prerequisite.

Text

To be advised

MNGTS39 lNDUSTIUAL MARKETING lOep

Prerequisite MNGT 230 - Marketing Prlnctples

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and workshops as requtred

Content:

Industrial markets and the Industrial marketing environment are explained. This topic win extend the marketing prtnclples to deal spectllcally with the business to business area. These Include producers. resellers. government non-profit organisations and any group who are using inputs to produce or resell goods or seIVIces.

Organisational buytng and buytng behaviour are discussed. The student will learn how to fonnulate product planning. channel strategy. marketing communication planning. promotional strategtes. pricing poliCies and Implementation and delivery procedures.

Text:

To be advised

MNGT341 ENTREPRENEURSHIP lOep

Prerequisite MNGT 225 - Enterprise Management

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and workshops as reqUired

Content:

This subject w1ll examine the theory. practice and nature of entrepreneurship. as a vital but often neglected and misunderstood mode of management.

Faculty of Economics end Col'l"ll'l1el'ce

Entrepreneurial managers are characterised by: Innovation. a positive attitude about change; creatlvlw. obsesslonforopportunlttes; high tolerance of rtsk. amblgulw and uncertalnw; self-reliance; adaptabtllW. strong motivation to excel; and strong leadership qualities. These characteristics have a major influence on their management style and behaviour.

A basic premise underlying this course is that all business entities require enterprising management to enhance their suJVivabtllty? This proposition Is relevant to new and older. small and large mature organisations.

SpeCific topics include: the role of the entrepreneur in business; entrepreneurs if capitalists and managers; the characteristics of entrepreneurial organisations; strateglc/ entrepreneurial management of operations management entrepreneurs as economic catalysts; theories of entrepreneurial origins and development; detenninants and measures of entrepreneurial effectiveness; entrepreneurial characteristics and behaviour; entrepreneurship In mature companies; female and ethnic entrepreneurs; entrepreneurship and the theory of the finn innovation and risk; stress and the entrepreneurial role.

Text

Bird. Barbara J. 1989. Entreprenewial Behaviour. Scott Foresman.

MNGT342 VENTURE CAPITAL " DEVELOPMENT CAPITAL lOep

Prerequisite MNGT225 - Enterprtse Management and MNGT226 - Business Venturtng

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. TUtorials and workshops as required

Content

As the world economy becomes globally focused "competitiveness" becomes increasingly Important. One way to increase the effectiveness of an economy is to place its productive resources into the hands of management teams most likely to make the best use of those resources. MargaretThatcher's "Enterprise Society" Is a classic example of this objective. So is the worldwide trend to prtvatlsatlon and the corporate shift to core operations. with the consequent divestment of non-core operattons.

Access toventure anddevelopmentcapltallsessenttal for those Involved In these management changes.

_nFlve Monogoment Subjocl Description.

This course considers the current mechanisms available for provlsion of venture and development capital.

Venture capital. development capital (and buyout funds) tend to be Invested. as equlW. In semlproven. highly promising enterprises. Venture capitalists. development capitalists and buyout arrangers are llnanclallntermed!artes. They obtain funds. In bulk. and Invest In a portfolio of potential high flyers. Funds are obtained from Institutional investors. wealthy individuals. larger corporations and sometimes from public subSCription.

Venture capitaHsts attempt to obtain funds and Invest them profitably. Obtaining funds depends usually on a good track record in the Investment sphere. Investing funds. successfully. reqUires picking winners. on average. and In providing strategic management advice.

Text

No textbook Is set. A comprehensive reading list will be supplied.

MNGT343 ENTERPRISE DEVELOPMENT lOep

Prerequisite MNGT226 Business Venturing


content:

This subject deals with enterprise and entrepreneurship concentrating on the business enterprise rather than the entrepreneur. which is more the concern of MNGT34 I Entrepreneurship.

"Enterprise" refers to the process of enterprise rather than the entity or structure. The process of being enterpriSing applies to any size of business and to a business of any age. New and small businesses generally have to be enterprising in order to survive. Large and mature businesses can often SUMve for some time without being enterprising.

Enterprise Development assumes that the process of enterprise is an Integral part of competition and economic development. The business world is characterised by change ; change in market demands for goods and seMces ; changes In the way that market demands are met. Enterprises compete to meet these demands and in meeting antictpated changes. Larger established enterprtses have advantages. however there win continue to be opportunities for new and smaner en terprises to compete and succeed.

Faculty of economics and Col'I"Imerce

Enterprise Development explores five areas of enterprise:

I The creation of new Independent enterpri ••. usually small. This may come about by the establishment of a new enterprise where none existed before or the purchase of an existing small business wtth the intention of growtng that business. Small business Is a high risk area. characterised by high failure rates.

2 Franchi.ing. the creation of new semiindependent enterprises. Enterprise Deve10pmentis more concerned with franchisees than franchisors. Franchisees are more numerous and more altke the new enterprises of the above section. Franchfsingtends to reduce the risks of new enterprise by followtng a market proven formula but reduce the business operators freedom of action.

3 Management Buyout. (MBO.) and llanatement Buylns (1IB1a) are the creation of Independent enterprises out of existing enterprises by divestment (sale). where the existing management team. MBOs. or mainly a new management team. MBls. buy the business from the existing owners. Many of you will have the ambition and abUtty to parttctpate In a management buyout. By the time you become part of a management team MBOs and MBIs are likely to be commonplace.

4 lD_prene .... blp. sIao \mown _ Corporate Venturini. Is concerned wtth malntatnlng and increasing enterprise In existing businesses. Generally intrapreneurshfp refers to enterprise in large. mature businesses where bureaucracy exists and hardentng-of-the-artertes is a continuing risk. Is the business you work for enterprising? How would you make It enterprising If given the chance?

5 Merge ... Ir; A<>qulsltlon. (Ma:Aj. Growth may be Internal. generated by extstlng operations. termed organic growth. or external by merger or acqulsltlon (takeover).

The major work for Enterprise Development is the production of a business plan or corporate plan for a project within one of the four areas above.

Text

No textbook Is set. Comprehensive reading Usts will be provtded.

_nFl .. Mo.-gement SUbJoct DeKrlpUons

11111GT344 ClOVBJUIIIIENT AND BU81J11E8810cp

PrerequIsite MNGI' III - introduction to Management & Organisational Behavtour iIIll1 MNGT 112 -Introduction to Law II[ LAW 101 - Foundations of Law


Content:

Students in Government and Business will examine:

(I) the relattonshlps of business with the institutions of government and polttlcs;

(U) the role of business as a participant In the public agenda-setting and policy processes; and

(III) current policy issues of particular relevance to business.

Modem theories and techniques of policy analysis will also be examined. and. where appropriate. comparative methods wtll be applied.

Text

To be advised.

II1IIGT345 ISSUES IN SMALL AND IlEDIUII ENTERPRISE MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT 225 - Enterprise Management


Content:

The purpose of this subject is to examine contemporary management Issues. The types of Issues are Finance. Marketing. Infonnation Systems. Training. Human Resource Management. Franchising and Planning. The subject wtll draw on current journal articles. conference papers and small business owners as guest lecturers.

II1IIGT348 SMALL AND IlEDIUII ENTERPRISE POUCY lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT225 - Enterprise Management

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week, Tutorials and workshops as required

Content:

Through the use of case studies and management simulation appropriate for small and medium-sized enterprises students in the Enterprise Management speclallsatton wtll have the opportunity to develop

Foeulty of Economic. and CoI'I"ImeF'Ce

"general management" competence by generating solutions to "real-life" business problems and being Involved in pro-active simulation of business management. The emphasis will be on fonnulation and implementation of strategies for survival and success. with a practlcalle. "hands on" orientation. Students will work in teams.

Text

To be advised

IINGT347 ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT228 - Organisational Structures & Design

HOUTS 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and workshops as reqUired

Content:

This course has as its primary focus the variety of ways In which the process of change can be both understood and implemented In the organisational setting. The course Involves an exploration of the soctal coordination of groups as well as an analysis of the ways in which organisations seek to Integrate differentiated groups. Thts approach to the concept of change in organisations recognises that any successful process of organisational renewal must account for mutual alteration between a variety of organisational sub-groupings. each of which has distinctive as well as common Interests.

Texts:

Solman. L.G. & Deal. T.E. 1991. Reframlng Organizattons. San Francisco. Maxwell MacMtllan.

Minkes, AL. 1987. The Entrepreneurial Manager. Middlesex. Penguin.

IINGT348 STRATEGIC/ADVANCED HUIIAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequlsite MNGT 227 - Human Resource Management

Hows 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and workshops as reqUired

Content:

This course is concerned with the role of human resource management In corporate planning and strategiC management. The course also addresses contemporary issues and debates such as mergers and acquisitions; workplace restructure; productivity measures; benchmarking and best practice.

_nFl .. Mo.-gomont SUbJoct DMcrlpdon.

'!ext

To be advised.

1I1IIGT3111 1'1lAIIIING AND DEVELOPMENT lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT227 - Human Resource Management


Content:

The purpose of this subject Is to Introduce students to the techniques and management skills for training and development. Students will examine training and development In termsofneedaanalysls. program design. conducttng tratntng. evaluation and re-deslgn of programs. Specific tratnlng and development schools will be examined in terms of behaviOUrism and humanism.

Text

To be advised

II1IIGT352 Il'f1I'ORllATlON SYSTEMS AND HUIIAN RESOURCE IlAJllAGEIlENT lOcp

Prerequisite INFOlD! - Introduction to Information Systems illlil MNGT227 - Human Resource Management

Hows 2 Lecture hours per week. TUtorials and workshops as required

Content:

This course examines the Interface between information systems and human resource management. In so doing. it also examines the practical issues surrounding the Implementation of information systems in the area of human resource management. In this perspective, the role of HUman Resource Informatton Systems (HRlS) Is critically examined. Through Computer-Laboratory workshops. students will experience and assess the use of infonnatton systems in the personnel function.

Text

To be advised

II1IIGT353 ORGANISATIONAL PSYCHOLOGY lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT 227 - Human Resource Management


HOUTS 2 Lecture hours per week. futorlals and workshops as required

Content:

This course provides an introduction to the major contribution that psychology can make to our understandlng of behaviour In organisations and explores the ways In whlch psychological knowledge Isapplted wlthtn organisations. with special reference to management issues.

Theafrn ofWs course is to help students who have little or no previous knowledge of thls subject In achieve a-an understanding of the scope and basic techniques of psychology and to use them crttlcally and with lmaginatton for practlcal professional applicatlons.

Topics include: Psychological Processes and Infonnatlon Processing

Principles of Ergonomics

Intelltgence, Human Abilities. and their Measurement

The Use of Personality Tests

Objective and Subjective Assessment of People:

Appraisal and Selection

The Psychology of Training

The Psychology of Stress and Anxiety

Psychological Dimensions of Organisational Change

Texts:

Rlbeaux.P. & Poppleton.S.E. 1988. Psychology and Work: An Introduction, MacMillan.

Warr.P.B. 1987. Psychology at Work. Prentice Hall. Penguin.

MNGT364 INTERNATIONAL IIUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT lOep

Prerequisite MNGT227 - Human Resource Management

HOUTS 2 Lecture hours per week, Tutorials and workshops as required

Content

This course examines the role and processes of human resource management In an international context. It focuses on the Interplay between the human resource functions, the types/origin of employees. and the countries of operation.

SecIIonFive IIonogomont SUbject Descriptions

Text

Dowling. P.J and Schuler. RS 1990. International Dlmenswns of Human Resource Management. Massachussetts. PWS-KENr

INFOIOI JlII'I1lODUCTION TO INFORMATION IIYlITBIIS lOep

Prerequisite Nil

HOUTS 3 Lecture hours per week. 2 Tutorial hours per week

Content:

This course seeks to provide not only a foundation in understanding Information systems but also to Impart those skUls necessary for soMng a wide range of information-based problems. For these reasons the course provides an essential grounding forallstudentstrrespectfveofthelrchosendlscipllne. In parttcular. the course is guided by the follOwing objecttves:

(a) To provide the student with an understanding of the nature of Infonnatlon systems and some of their associated concepts and terminology. In parttcular. we will examine the follOwing:

•

•

• • • •

The components of computer-based infonnation systems

The phases Involved tn Information systems development

The process of software development

Datahase systems

Management Infonnatlon systems

Data communications

• Legal and social aspects of Information systems

(b) To allow the student to obtain skills in the use of microcomputers as personal productivity tools. In particular. students will be given a practtcallntroductton to system andappltcatton software such as operating systems. spreadsheets. business graphics. database management systems and work processors.

Text

To be advised

INFOI02 INFORMATION STORAGE AND MANAGEMENT lOep

Prerequlstte INFOIO! - Introduction to Infonnatton Systems

Faculty of Economic. end Commerce

Hours 3 Lecture hours per week. 2 Tutorial hours per week

Content:

Vast amounts of data are stored in computer based infonnatlon systems. In this course we explore the common tools and techniques utHlsed to store/ retrieve data in computing systems. In particular. we will examine the follOwing:

• • • • • • • •

•

• Text

Introduction to relational database design

Entity-relationship modelltng

Data normalization

The relational environment

Structured Query Language (SQL)

Transaction processing

Introduction to the V AX/VMS operating system

Simple File Organizatlons - sequential. direct Indexed

Procedural programming techniques -modularizatlon. structured control constructs. information hiding. documentation. testing.

COBOL (Common Business Ortented Language).

To be advised

INFOllO PROGRAMMING CONCEPTS 20ep

Prerequisite Nil

Hours 3 Lecture hours per week. 2 TUtortal hours per week

Content:

This module provides students with the theoretical knowledge and practical experiences needed to produce correct. comprehensible and structured solutions to well-specified problems. In addition. the skills and information necessary to code a robust and maintainable Implementation of the solution using a high level programming language are developed by means of practical exercises. The prtmary language used Is Pascal but QulckBASIC Is also Introduced later In the year.

The module also provides an Introduction to the implementation of abstract data structures and the object ortented paradigm.

• Restricted to Students In The Diploma of Computing Studies

SectIon Five IIonogomontSubjoct Descriptions

INFO 11 1 COBOL

Prerequisite Ntl

lOep

HOUTS 4 Lecture hours per week. 2 Tutorial hours per week

Content:

This subject provides the student with an understanding of the concepts and programming techniques of the language COBOL. All the basic syntax of the language is covered to the level of the 1985 ANSI COBOL standard. Example problems that are appropriate to a commercial setting are treated In lectures to provide a model for similar problem solving durlng the tutorial sessions and the assignments. Example solutions are handled from a structured programming approach. and include common problems such as creating sequential files from online data entry. report generatlon from a Single sequential file. report from a sequential me with references to Indexed files. and updating files within a hatch process and within an onltneprogram.

• Restricted to Student. In The Diploma of ComPUtinC Studlu

1NF01lS COIlMERCIAL INFORMATION SYSTEMS lOep

Prerequisite INFO III - COBOL

Hours 3 Lecture hours per week. 2 1Utorial hours per week

Content:

Topics to be covered include: storage and representation of data In computing systems; data types. records. file structures and access mechanisms; using Cobol for online transaction processing and report writer facilities; entityrelationship modelltng; Introduction to datahase systems and their design. together with thefr manipulation using SQL.

• Restricted to Students In The Diploma of ComPUtinC Studlea

1NF01l4 COMPUTER SYSTEMS ARCHITECTURE lOep

Prerequisite Nil

HOUTS 3 Lecture hours per week, 1 Tutorial hour per week

Content

Thts subject focuses on the study of computer architecture; Including topiCS such as: basic


operating system functions demonstrated by the use of DOS and VMS, computer codes, number representation and operations. machine logic and assembly language.


1NF01l6 ANALYSIS OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS lOcp

Prerequisite INFOI01 . Introduction to Infonnation Systems

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week, Tutorlals and Workshops as required

Content

To introduce the philosophies. techniques and procedures of Systems Analysis.

The course will have a practical orlentation. studen ts will be expected to produce solutions for realistic problems which they mtght reasonably expect to encounter In their work.

Assignments will be marked as If they were being presented as business reports.

• The Systems Analyst and their Environment

• • • • • • • • • • • •

Systems Development Methodologies

Structured AnalYSiS and Design

Data Flow Diagrams

The Data Dictionary

Fact Finding. Recording and AnalYSiS

Communication and Interviewing Skills

Detennlnlng User Requirements

Input. Output. Fonn and Report Design

System Justification

Project Planning and Control

System Implementation

Restricted to Students In The Diploma of Computing Studies

INF0201 HUMAN CONTEXT OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS lOcp

Prerequisite INF0202 - Analysis of Infonnation Systems

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. 1 Tutorlal hour per week

Section Five

Content

Managemant Subject Descriptions

ThIs course focuses on the human andorgantzationai effects of computer based systems. It examines the impacts of computer technology and Infonnation systems at the lndtv1dual. group and organizational levels. In doing so, the course combines both the micro and the macro perspectives surrounding the human/organtzational aspects of computer/ information technology. More specifically. the course seeks to provide a crltical examination of Issues such as: the personal, social and organtzational factors which affect the success/failure ofinfonnation systems; the role oftnfonnation systems in human communication; the nature and Implications of computer-based human problem-solving. The course also attempts toaddress questions and controversies such as: What factors might affect an organizatlon's potential for successful technology management? Why do certain groups of employees resist technological change In their workplace? Why are certaJn organizations always riding the crest of the technological wave while others lag behind? Also. a substantial portton of the course will be devoted to examining the practical Issues surrounding the implementation of Information Systems In the area of Human Resource Management. Aspects such as the role of Human Resource Infonnatlon Systems (HRIS) In: manpower planning and recruitment; job evaluation and payment systems; monitoring absenteeism etc. are considered. These latter aspects are examined from both theoretical and practical standpoints. The Laboratory-based Workshops will aim at familiarising students with varlous aspects of Human Resource Infonnatlon Systems (HRIS) and their practical applications.

INF0202 ANALYSIS OF INFORMATION SYSTEMS lOcp

Prerequisite INFOI0l . Introduction to Information Systems

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorlals and Workshops as required

Content

To Introduce the philosophies. techniques and procedures of Systems Analysts.

Thecoursewill have a practlcalorlentatton, students will be expected to produce solutions for realistic problems which they might reasonably expect to encounterln their work. Assignments will be marked as if they were being presented as business reports.

• • • • • • • • • • • •


The Systems Analyst and their Environment

Systems Development Methodologies

Structured AnalysIs and Design

Data Flow Diagrams

The Data Dictionary

Fact Finding. Recording and Analysis

Communication and Interviewing Skills

Detenntning User Requirements

Input. Output. Fonn and Report Design

System Justification

Project Planning and Control

System Implementation

1NF0203 INFORMATION SYSTEMS DESIGN lOcp

Prerequisite INFO 102 - Infonnation Storage & Managementl!!!!! INF0202 - Analysis oflnfonnation Systems

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorlals and Workshops as reqUired

Content:

This subject follows on from Infonnation Systems Analysis. Students will work together in small groups to deslgnasmall computerbasedinformatton system. As well, groups will be expected to research a particular topic related to design and ordevelopment of infonnatlon systems and to present a lecture/ seminar on this topiC to the rest of the class.

These seminars will be examined.

• Logical and PhYSical Data Modelling

• Nonnallsatlon

• User Interface Design

• Object Oriented Software Engineering

• System Development Methodologies

• Human Factors In Software Engtneerlng

• CASE

• Project Management Software

• Development Support Software

• Implementation Strategies and Tools

1NF0204 COMMERCIAL PROGRAMMING lOcp

Prerequisite INFO 102 - Infonnation Storage and Management

SectIon Rve Management Sub[oct Descriptions

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week

Content:

This course introduces students to techniques used in Commercial Data Processing. In particular. the following are examlned:

•

• • • • • • •

Software design strategies. fOCUSing on structured techniques such as top-down design. control structures and modulartzatlon. Together with a study of object oriented design techniques.

Program testing and documentation.

Data structures and algorlthms.

Relational database concepts.

Structured Query Language (SQL).

The Cobol programming language.

The screen handler FMS.

The Database Management System RDB.

It Is assumed that students already have some familiarlty with at least one programming language and are able to use an editor on the VAXcluster.

1NF0210 COMMERCIAL APPLICATIONS (PROJECT) lOcp

Prerequisite INFOI0l - Introduction to Infonnation Systems. INFO 110 - Programming Concepts, CSl I3B - BuslnessStudiesorMNGTll4.INFOll3 - Commercial Information Systems

HolUs 1 Lecture hour per week

Content:

In this subject. students are presented with a commercial Information problem, with staff taking the roles of the users of the system. Students are then required to specify the requirements for the system. create a system design. and then develop and implement the Infonnatlon system. This module incorporates skills acqUired throughout the course and attempts to integrate those skills as well as exposing students to the problems of working within a teamandcoordinatlnga project to satisfydead1lnes.

• Restricted to Student. In The Diploma of Computing Studies

1NF0211 WORK EXPERIENCE 20cp

Prerequisite INFOlOl - Introduction to Information Systems. INFO 110 - Programming Concepts. INFOl!1 - COBOL. CS ll3B - Business Studies or

Faculty of economics .nd Commorce

MNGTlI4. INF01l3 - Commercial Infonnation Systems. INFO 114 - Computer Systems Architecture

and approval of Head of Department

Content:

This module draws on all the skills and knowledge acquired in the first year of study of this course and allows students to see how those skills can be applied within the nonnal systems development environment. In addition students assess how infonnation systems are used within organisations. As a result of the work experience participation the student will have an understanding of the roles of others and be aware of the requirements of a professional person working in a data processing environment. Entry Into this subject wiD be by merit.

• Restricted to Student. In The Diploma of Computing Studle.

1NF0212 APPLICATION GENERATORS lOep

Prerequisite INF0101 - Introduction to Infonnation Systems. INFO 113 - Commercial Information Systems

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and Workshops as reqUired

Content:

This subject examines the role of fourth generation languages and application code generators in developing new systems. The relationship between CASE technology and application generators in accelerating the developing process is also examined. A particular fourth generation language is used to demonstrate the basic components of such tools and for developing skills in their usage.


1NF0213 ADVANCED PROGRAM DESIGN lOep

PrerequisIte INFO 110 - Programming Concepts

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week, 2 Tu torial hour per week

Content:

This module extends and re-enforces the concepts and experiences gained tn INFO 110 and tntroduces some of the software engtneerlngphUosophies needed in the building oflarge and reliable software systems. A strong practical program is used to develop ideas

SectIon Rve Mo .. goment SUbject DelCrlptions

of modularity and separate compllation in conjunction with tnfonnation hiding. abstract data types and inheritance. These practical experiences also provide a solid foundation for Software Engineering and the Object-Oriented paradigm.

• IIeotricted to 8tucleDto In The Diploma nf CCIIIlputlng 1ItadI ..

1NF0214 IllANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS lOep

Prerequisite CS 113B - Business Studies or MNGT214. INFOIl3 - Commercial Infonnation Systems

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. 1Utorials and Workshops as required

Content:

This module examines the inter-relationship between decision making and information in a business environment. After an initial introduction to models of management and the decision making process. it considers in some detail the nature of Infonnatlon and processes associated with Its gathering. storage. manipulation. transmission and reporting. The module then examines the structure and requirements of both a Management Infonnation System and a Decision Support System.

• Restricted to Student. In The Diploma of Computing Studies

lNP02111 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS lOep

Prerequfsfte INFO 113 - Commercial Infonnatlon Systems

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week, 1Utorlals and Workshops as required

Content:

This subject covers the follOwing general topics associated with database management systems:

history of DBMS·s. objectives of DBMS·s.types of database structure (relational, network. hierarchical. object·orlented). database design with particular reference to the relational model and nonnallsatlon. physical storage options. concurrency problems assoctated with transaction processing. and security.


Faculty of Economics and Cornrnerce

1NF0216 TECHNICAL PROGRAIOIING lOep

Prerequtsite INFO II 0 . Programming Concepts

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. 21Utot1al hour per week

Content:

The language FORTRAN-77 wlII be studied within the context of a structured programming design approach. Once the syntax and ftle mechanisms of FORTRAN have been presented. Its use in the area of technical applications will be demonstrated with theuseof suitable case studies. Several mathematical algorithms will be investigated and their coded Implementations wtll be accomplished using FORmAN.


1NF0217 COMMtlNlCATIONS It NETWORKING lOep

Prerequisite INF0114 - ·Computer Systems Architecture

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. Tutorials and Workshops as required

Content:

This subject focuses on the study of computer communications; including topics such as: advanced operating system functions. communications protocols and the use and installation of commercial communications packages. networking and Issues of portabillty and security. together with an examination of small-system management tools.

• Restricted to Students In The Diploma of Computing Studle.

1NF021S PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES lOep

PrerequisIte INFO 110 . Programming Concepts

Hours 1 Lecture hour per week. 2 Tutorial hours per week

Content:

Structured program design is covered using the language ANSI C. The syntax of C. together with C's data structures. use of pointers. parameter passing mechanisms. and the use of mes will be studied. in the context of a structured design approach Incorporating graphical design tools.


SectIon FlM Mo .. go."."t Subject DelCrlptions

1NF0219 INFORMATION SYSTEMS DaUGN lOep

Prerequtsite INFOI13 - Commercial Infonnation Systems and INF01I5 - Analysis of lnfonnatlon Systems

Hows 2 Lecture hours per week

Content:

This subject follows on from Infonnatlon Systems Analysis. Students wlII work together in smaIl groups to deslgn asmaJlcomputerbasedinformation system. As well. groups will be expected to research a particular topic related to design and ordevelopment of infonnatlon systems and to present a lecture/ seminar on this topiC to the rest of the class.

These seminars will be examined.

• • • • • • • •

LogIcal and Physical Data Modelllng

Nonnallsation

User Interface Design

Human Factors In Software Engineering

CASE

Project Management Software

Implementation Strategies and Tools

IIeotricted to Student. In The Diploma of Computing Studle.

lNP0301 DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS lOep

Prerequtsite INF0203 -lnfonnation Systems Design and INF0204 - Commercial Programming

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week. 1Utorials and workshops as required

Content:

The database is the heart of any computer based Infonnatlon system. This subject examines both high level management Issues and low level implementation considerations for computerised data base management systems.

Topics will include:

• • •

• •

Data structures

Data modelllng techniques

Database design / Conceptual Models of the Database System

Design issues. nonnaHsatlon, controls. etc.

Transaction processing - back-up and recovery

•

• •


Multi access considerations - deadlock & the reader/writer problem

Data Models

Contempormy database Issues. databases, deducUve databases, databases

eg, logical distrtbuted

1NF0302 INFORMATION SYSTEMS METHODS AND TECHNIQUES lOcp

Prerequtsite INF0203 - InfonnaUon Systems Design

Hours 2 Lecture hours per week, Tutorials and workshops as required

Content

Alternative Information system analysis design and development techniques are compared with the aim of Identifying their strengths and weaknesses when used In particular problem domains.

Specific topics covered Include:

• Strategies such as proto typing, adaptive design and iterative design.

•

•

•

• • • • •

Alternative conceptual data modelling approaches such as NIAM

Practical systems development methods for: transaction based systems. real time systems. process systems. management reporting systems. decision support systems. etc.

Computer aided software engineering techniques

Reverse engineering

Application Generators

Systems Documentation

Systems Testing and Implementation

Ongoing Maintenance of Information Systems

INII'0303 INFORMATION SYSTEMS AND THE ORGANISATION lOcp

PrerequlsUe NF0202 - Analysis of InfonnaUon Systems

HOUTS 2 Lecture hours per week, 1 Tutorial hour per week

Content

This subject brings together the techniques Introduced In the other Information Systems units. blghUghUng their use In tbe management of information systems within an organisation.

SectIonFl" ..... goment Subject Description.

Specillc topics Include:

• Systems theory

• • • •

• • •

• •

Organlsational structure

Decision theory

The use of Information within an organisation

DtvIston ofresponstbillty forlnfonnaUon system development

End user compu ting

Stages of Information system growth

Securttycltsasterplannlngmanagementcontrol of Infonnation systems

Integration of information systems

StrategiC planning for Information systems

1NF0304 KNOWLEDGE SYSTEMS lOcp

Prerequtsite MA1ll212 - DIscrete MathemaUcsl!ll!l INF030l - Data Base Management Systems


Content

This subject provtdes a theoreUcal and pracUcal foundation for the development of computertsed knowledge systems. The theoretical aspects are based on classical and non-classical logics. These logiCS have well defined semantics and as such allow us to formalise Interesting facets of knowledge systems.

Specific topics Include:

• • • •

• •

Knowledge representation

Production rules and search strategies

Reasoning wtth uncertainty

Relational theories

Updattng knowledge

Theory revision

Planning

The practical aspects Involve the study and use of several knowledge processing programming languages

1NF0306 INFORMATION SYSTEMS PROJECT 20cp

Corequislte NF030 1 - Database Management Systems

Faculty of Economics and CoI'l1l'11M'Ce

HOUTS 2 Lecture hours per week, Tutorials and workshops as reqUired

Content

Students work in small teams to deVelop and tmplementasubstantialcomputerbasedlnfonnat:l.on system with at least the followtng characteristics;

• • • • • •

•

complex data storage requirements

a transaction processing foundation subsystem

an on-line masterfUe maintenance subsystem

a reporting and enqUiry subsystem

the need for concurrent user access

significant security Issues which must be addressed

the use of both third and fourth generation languages

In their work students must demonstrate competence In all aspects of the design and development of computer based systems. Assessment Is based both on the Individuals' efforts and· on their teams accomplishments.

Each group Is required to complete and submit a project proposal and schedule showtng the scope of the proposed project. Work on the project does not commence until this proposal has been reviewed and approved. Fonnal reviews are carried out at each signfftcantcheckpolnt In the development cycle.

In addition to the project. students present seminars and participate In discussions focussing on Issues arising from their work. Individual de-brtefing sessions with each student are held at the end of the course.

INII'0306 INDUSTRIAL RESEARCH lOcp

Prerequisite INFOlOl - Introduction to Information Systems. INFOl02 - Information Storage and Management. INF020 1 - Human Context of Information Systems. INF0202 - Analysis of Information Systems. INF0203 - Information Systems Design. INF0204 - Commercial Programming

(with mlnimum grade point average of ·credlt" ) and IIPprova1 of Head of Department

Corequlsite INF030 I - Database Management Systems. INF0302 - Infonnatlon Systems Methods and Techniques

_nFlve

Hows:

Content

..... goment Subject Description.

The subjectlndustrtal Research Involves completion of a unit of applied research Into some aspect of computerbaBedtnformatlonsystemslncoUaboration wtth an outstde organlsaUon. Before applying for enrolment In thts unlt the student Is reqUired to produce a brtef synopsis descrtblng the proposed research. Each proposal Is reviewed by a departmental sub-committee to ensure that the proposed work Is of a suffiCiently high standard.

Students completing the course submit a fonnal report detailing the study's objecttves, research method employed. results obtained and suggestions related to posslbtltUes for further study.


Stall.tics Subject Deacrlpllon. Statistics has been described as the science of turning data into information. This Involves collecting. presenting and analysing data. interpreting the results and using them to draw conclusions or make decisions. The principles of statistics are based on Ideas from the philosophy of sclenceandmathernatlcsand. more recently. tnsights from cognitive sctence and developments In computing. Computers play an essential role In Statistics for data management and analysts. Statistics ts a practical subject. It involves designing experimental plans and sampling procedures. calculating how many subjects or objects should be studied and determining how the measurements should be made tn order to obtain data whtch are rellable. accurate and relevant. Methods of statistical analysts. based on mathematics. Including probability theory. are used to decide what conclusions can validly be drawn from the data.

The Statistics Department offers subjects from the 100 level through to the Honours level as well as research degrees.

For a major in Statistics a student should take the follOwing subjects:

Year I: Either STATIO 1. MATIl 11 I andMATIlI 12

or STATl03. MATIl102 and MATH 103

INFO 101 is recommended

Choose other subjects worth 50 credit points from Level 100

Year 2: STAT201. STAT202. STAT206 and MATIl201


Year 3: STAT301. STAT302. STAT303. STAT304


Year 4: STAT401 to STAT411

80 credit points selected from STAT40 I to STAT4I!.

STATIO! INTRODUCTORY STATISTICS lOop

Note Not to count with STATl03. ECONI15.

Prerequislte(s) This course does not assume knowledge of calculus or matrix algebra.

SectIon Five Stadld .. Subject Descriptions

Hours 3 lecture hours. 1 laboratory hour and 1 tutortal hour per week. The course Is offered in Semester I and Semester II.

Pwpose To introduce students to the prinCiples of study deSign. data analysis and interpretation; the statistical computing program MINITAB will be used extensively.

Content

Study design. Including surveys and controlled experiments. SampUng and randomization. Scales of measurement. Descriptive and exploratory data analysis. ProbabIlIty. Statlstlcallnference: sampling distributions. confidence tnteIVals and hypotheSiS tests for means and proportions. Correlation and regression. Time series analysts. Quality control. Chi-square tests for frequency tables.

Text

Moore. D.S. & McCabe. G.P. 1989. Introduction to the Proct/ce oj Statistics. Freeman.

References

Freedman. 0 .. PIsani. R. PuIVIs. R & Adhlkarl. A. 1991. Statistfcs. 2nd edn. Norton.

Staudte. R 1990. Seeing. ThroughStatistfcs.PrentlceHall.

Ryan. B.F .. Jolner. B.L. & Ryan. T.A. 1985. MINlTAB Handbook. 2nd edn. Duxbury.

Miller. RB. 1988. MINlTAB HandbookJor Business and Economics. PWS-Kent.

Wonnacott. T.H. and Wonnacott. RJ. 1990. Introductory Statistfcs Jor Business and Economics. 4th edn. Wiley.

STATUl3 INTRODUCTORY MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS lOop

Note Not to count with STATIOI or ECONI15

Prerequisite or Corequisite MATIl102 or MATH 103

Hotus 3 lecture hours, 1 laboratory hour and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester.

Purpose To Introduce more mathematically interested students to probabiltty and statistical inference. Including the principles of study design. data analySiS and Interpretation of statistical results.

Content

Scales of measurement; summarising data

Probability laws; conditional probability

Facutty of Economics and Commerce

ProbabIlIty distributions and sample statistics

The central Hmit theorem and appUcatlons

Study design; surveys and randomlsedexpertments

Confidence intervals and hypothesis tests

Correlation and regression; least squares

Inferences from contingency tables

Text

Freund. J.E. & Simon G.A. (8th ed. 1992). Modem

Elementary Statistfcs. Prentice-Hall.

References

Freedman. 0 .. PIsani. R. PuIVIs. Rand Adhlkarl. A.. 1991. Statistfcs. 2nd edn. Norton.

Meyer. PL .. 1977. Introductory ProbabUlty and StatistfcalApplfcotlons. 2nd edn. Addison-Wesley.

Bhattachanya. A.K. &JohnsonR. (1977). Statistfcs. PrlncIples &. Methods. Wiley.

STAT201 MATHEMATICAL STATISTICS lOop

Prerequisite Either MATH I 03 or Introductory Statistics (STATIO!) and MATIl112 (or a level of mathematics eqUivalent to MATI-I112).

Hours 3 lecture hours and 1 laboratory/tutorial hour per week for one semester.

Content

Random variables. probability. density and distribution functions. expectation. Likelihood. potnt and inteIVal esUmation. Tests of slgntficance.

Text

Hogg. RV. & Tams. E.A. 1988. Probabalty and StatistfcallnJerence. Macmillan.

Reference

Kalbfleisch. J.G. 1985. Probabalty and Statistfcal Inteiference. Volumes I and II. 2nd edn. SPr:tnger.

Larsen. RJ. & Marx. M.L. 1986. An Introduction to Mathematfcal Statistics and Its Applications. 2nd edn. Prentice-Hall.

STAT202 REGRESSION ANALYSIS lOop

Prerequisite Mathematical Statistics (STAT20 1)

Hours 2 lecture hours. 1 laboratory and 1 tutorial hour per week for one semester.

Content

This course covers the practical and theoretical aspects of multiple regression analysts. Including

SectIon Five StaOIO .. Subject Descriptions

the .... umptlons underlying normal linear models. use of matrix notation. prediction and confidence intervals. stepwise methods and examination of the adequacy of models. The statistical computer packages MINITAB and SAS are used.

Text

Neter. J .. Wassennan. W. & Kutner. M.H. 1990. Applied LInear Slattstfcal Models. 3rd edn. Irwin.

ReJerence

Bowerman. B.L .. O·Connell. R T. et al. 1986. LInear statistical models -an applied approoch Duxbury.

Draper. N.R & Smith. H. 1981. Applied Regression Analysis Wiley.

Ryan.B.F .. Jotner.B.L.andRyan.T.A.1985.MINITAB Handbook. 2nd edn. Duxbury.

SAS Institute Inc 1985. SASIntroductoryGuide. 3rd edn. SAS Inst. Cary. NC.

Weisberg. S. 1985. Applied LInear Regression, 2nd edn. Wiley.

STAT205 ENGlNEERIJIIG STATISTICS Sop

Note: credit cannot be obtained for both STAT201 andSTAT205

Prerequisite MATIl112 or MATIl102

Hours 2 lecture/laboratory hours per week per semester

Contents

Basic probability theory and principles of statistical Inference. Distributions. Error propagation. Quality control.

References

Chatfield. C. 1983. StatistlcsJor Technology. 3rd edn. Chapman & Hall.

Guttman. I.. Wilks. S.S .. Hunter. J.S. 1982. Introductory EngIneering Statistics. 3rd edn. Wiley.

Hogg. R V. & Ledolter.J. 1987. EngfneeringStatistics. Macmillan.

STAT208 DESIGN AND ANALYSIS OF EXPERIMENTS AND SURVEYS lOop

Prerequisite STAT20 I

HOUTS 3 hours per week for one semester

Content

This course contrasts two methods for collecting and analysing data: experimental studies and nonexperimental studies Including surveys. The

Faculty of Economf .. • ndCO......,..

princIples of experimental desIgn are Ulustrated by studyIng completely randomlsed desIgns. randomlsed block desIgns and factorial designs. For sunreys the topIcs Include: simple random sampling. stratified and cluster sampUng, ratto and regression estimators. Class projects are used to illustrate practical problems and the statistical packages Mlnltab and SAS are used to carry out analyses.

Rtiferences

MontgomelY. D.C. 1984. Design and Analysis of Expertments. 2nd edn. WHey.

Barnett. V. 1986. Elements of Sompling Theory. Hodder and Stoughton.

Cochran. W.G. 1977. SomplIngTechntques.3rdedn. Wlley.

Neter. I.. Wassennan. W. & Kitner, M.H. 1990. Applied linear Statistical Models. 3rd edn. Irwtn.

Cochran. W.G. & Cox. G.M. 1984. ExpertmenUJI Designs. Wlley.

Box. G.E.P .. Hunter. W.G. and Hunter. J.S. 1978. Statlstlcsfor Experimenters: Wl introductton todesign. data wtalysls and model building. WHey.

STAT301 STATISTICAL INFERENCE lOcp

Prerequisite STAT201 Mathematical Statistics and MATH201 MultivaIiable Calculus or eqUIvalent.


Content

Statistical inference Is the drawing of conclusions from data. ThIs course covers Ukelthood-based estimation. other methods of point and intetVal estimation. hypotheSiS testing and Introductory Bayesian inference.

Text

Larson. H.J. (3rd ed 1982). Introductton toProbabUfty Theory and Statistical Inference. WHey.

Rtiferences

Hogg. RV. & CraIg. A.T. 1989. Introductton to Mathematical Statistics. 4th edn. Collier MacMtllan.

Lee. P.M .. 1989. BayestanStatlstlcs: WllntroductlDn. Edward Arnold.

Cox. D.R and HInkley. D.V. 1974. Theoretical Statistics Chapman & Hall.

_oFl .. StotioH .. Subject Description •

STAT302 811/D1' DESlGN lOcp

Prerequistte Mathematical Statistics (SfAT20 I) and RegressIon Analysts (STAT202)

Hours 3 hours per week for one semester

Content

Tbls course contrasts two methods for collecting and anaIystng data: experlmental_tudtes and nonexperimental studies including surveys. The prinCIples of expertmental desIgn are tlIustrated by studyIng completely randomlsed desIgns. randomlsed block desIgns and factortal desIgns. For surveys the topics include: Simple random sampling, stratlfted and cluster sampling. raUo and regression estimators. Class projects are used to illustrate practical problems and the statistical packages Mlnltab and SAS are used to carry out analyses.

References

Barnett. V. 1986. Elements of sampling theory. Hodder and Stoughton.

Cochran. W.O. 1977. SomplingTechntques. 3rdedn. WHey.

Neter, I.. Wassennan. W. & Kutner, M.H. 1990, Applted linear Stattstlcal Models. 3rd edn. Irwtn.

Cochran. W.G. & Cox. G.M. 1984. ExperlmenUJI Designs. WHey.

Bax. G.E.P .• Hunter. W.G. and Hunter. J.S. 1978. Statlstlcsfor Experimenters: Wl introductton todeslgn. data WlaZysls and model building. WHey.

STAT303 GENERALISED LINEAR MODELS lOcp

Prerequtsite STAT20 I Mathematical Statistics and STAT202 RegressIon AnalySIS.

Advisory Corequlslte SfAT30 I

HolUs 3 hours per week Jor one semester

Content

The course covers the theory of generalised linear models and tllustrates the ways tn which methods for analysing continuous, binary. and categorfcal data fit tnto this framework. Topics include the exponential family of distribUtions, maximum ItkeUhood estimation. sampltng dtstrtbutlons for goodness-oC-fit statistics, linear models for contfnuousdata (regression andanalysisofvar1ance), logistic regression. and log-l1near models. Students wtll Implement these methods using various computer packages. IncludIng GUM.

Faculty of Economics • nd Commerce

Text

Dobson. A.J. 1990. An Introductton to Generalized linear Modelling. Chapman & Hall.

References

Mccullagh. P. & Neider. J.A. 1989. Generalized LInear Models. Chapman & Hall.

Aitktn. M. et al 1989. Statistical ModelUng In GUM. Oxford Science PubUcations.

Healy. M.J.R. 1988. GLIM: an Introduction. Clarendon.

STAT304 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS lOcp

Prerequtsite STAT20 I Mathemattcal Stattstics and STAT20? RegressIon AnalysIs

Advisory Corequlslte SfAT30 I

Hours 21ecture hours. 21aboratory hours per week for one semester

Content

This course Is abou t the theory and practice ofTtme Series AnalysIs -the analysIs of data collected at regular tnteIVals tn time (or space), Topics covered include: statlonaryprocesses. ARMA models. models for periodic phenomena. analysts using MINITAB. SAS and other TIme Series packages.

Texts

ClYer. J.D. 1986. TIme Series Analysis. DuxbulY Press.

References

Box. G.E.P. & Jenktns. G.M. 1970. TIme Series Analysis: Forecasting and Control. Holden Day.

Dtggle. P.J. 1990. TIme Series: A Btostatlstlcal Introduction. Oxford: Clarendon Press.

Fuller. W.A. 1976. Introduction to Statistical TIme Series. Wtley.

Newton. H.J. 1988. TIMESLAB. A TIme Series Analysis Laboratory. Wadsworth & Brooks/Cole.

STAT310 TOTAL QUALITY MANAGEMENT lOcp

PrerequisIte Subjects at Level 200 totallIng 40 credtt poInts


Content

Total QualttyManagement rrgM) I_an all embracIng management and employee involvement philosophy

SoctIon FI .. Stou.u .. Subject Description •

dtrected towards continuous Improvement In the production of goods and servtces. Students who complete this course will learn to understand the fundamental prlnctpJesofTotaI QualltyManagement rrgM). choose approprtate statistical technIques for Improving processes and write reports to management describing processes and recommending ways to improve them.

SpeCific topics covered Include the Deming phtlosophy. understandIng varlabtltty through statlsttcal thInking. qualIty implementation matrtces. quality function deployment, the seven tools of qualtty control, quaUty Improvement teams. the PDCA cycle. standards. the role of management. baste statistical methods and control charts.

Text To be advised.

HONOURS COURSE IN STATISTICS 80cp

PrerequIsIte STAT30J, STAT302. STAT303. STAT304. 40 credit poInts from Level 300 subjects offered by the DepartmentofStatl_tlcs with a Credit or better average.

Content

Students are required to take suhjects worth 40-60 credit poInts from Level 400 subjects offered hy the Department of Statistics.

Students are also reqUired to complete project work whIch can be worth 20. 30. or 40 credtt poInts. to be detenntned by consultation with the Head of the Department. The results of the project are to be presented in a thesis. The project may be a practical one Involvtng the analysIs of data. or a theoretical one. Work on the project normally starts early In February. Level 400 unIts whIch may be offered are:

STAT401

STAT402

STAT403

STAT404

STAT405

STAT406

STAT407

Credit Pofnts

Probabtltty TheolY

AnalySIS of Categorical Data

Demography and Survtval AnalysIs

Robust Regression and SmoothIng

Statistical Consulting

Methods for Qualtty Improvement

10

10

10

10

10

10

Advanced Topics In Statistics 10

STAT408-11 Project 10.20.30 or 40


STAT401 PROBABILI'IT THEORY lOep

Advisory Prerequisite MATH204 and MATH205

This Isa rigorous course on the mathematical theory of probabHlt)', presenting techniques and theory needed to establish Umlt theorems. The applications of such techniques are spread throughout the discipline of Statistics.

Topics covered include: elementmymeasure theory. random variables. expectation. the characteristic function. modes of convergence. laws of large numbers. centrall1mtt theorems.

References

Billingsley, P. 1979, ProbabUttyandMeasure, WHey.

Brelman, L. 1968, ProbabUtty, Addlson·Wesley.

Chung, K.L. 1974, A course In ProbabUtty Theory, 2nd edn. Academic Press.

Dudley, RM. 1989, Real Analysis & ProbabUUy , Wadsworth & Brooks.

Moran, P.A.P. 1984, An Introduction to ProbabUlty Theory,O.U.P. 1968.

STAT402 ANALYSIS OF CATEGORICAL DATA IOcp

The course will discuss the analysis of categorical data. It wlll begin wlth a thorough coverage of 2x2 tables before moving on to larger (rxc) contingency tables. Topics to be covered Include probablllt)' models for categorical data. measures of association. measures of agreement, the Mantel-Haenszel method for combining tables, applications of logistic regression and loglinear models.

References

Agresti, A. 1990, Categorical data analysis, WHey.

Bishop, Y.M.M .. Feinberg, S.E. & Holland, P.W. 1975, DIscrete Multivariate Analysis: Theory and Practice, MIT Press.

Flelss, J.L. 1982, Stattstlcal MetlwdsJor Rates and Propo_ns, 2nd edo, WHey.

STAT403 DEMOGRAPHY AND SURVIVAL ANALYSIS lOep

This course begins with an Introduction to the demographic techniques used In constructing lifetahles and population projections. The major component provides statistical methods for the analysis of survival data and their application to clinical trials.

_nFlve

ReJerences

Stlldod .. Subject Descrlpdon.

Cox, D.R & Oakes, D. 1984, Analysis oj SWlIival Data, Chapman & Hall.

Kalbflelsch,J,D, &Prentlce, RL. 1980, TheStatfstical Analysis oJFaaure TIme Data, Wiley.

Key:fltz, N. 1977,App/ledMathematicalDemography, Wiley.

Key:fltz, N. 1968, Introduction to the Mathematics oj Population, Addison-Wesley.

Pollard, J.H. 1975, Mathematical Models Jor the Growth oJHuman Populations, Cambndge U.P.

STAT41N ROBUST REGRESSION AND SIiOOTHlNG lOep

The main theme Is the use of the computer to fit models to data when the assumptions of traditional models may not be satisfied or when It Is not known tn advance what fonn of model is approprlate. Topics to be covered include: concepts of robustness, L

1-, M- and high breakdown estimation in linear

regression, scatterplot smoothe .. Ceg ACE, LOESS and splines), kernel regreSSion and methods for choosing the amount of smoothing, and radically different approaches (eg CART and projection pursuit).

Text

Staudte, RO. & Sheather, S.J. 1990, Robust estimation and Testing, Wiley.

References

Eubank, R.L. 1988, Spline Smoothing and Nonparametrlc Regression, M Dekker.

Hampel, F.R, Ronchettl, E.M. et al 1986, Robust Statistics; theApproochBased onInjluenceFunctlons, Wiley.

Hardle,W.I990,AppltedNonparametrlcRegresslon, Cambndge U.P.

Hardie, W. 1991, Smoothing Techniques: with Implementation In S, Spnnger.

Rousseeuw, P.J. & Leroy, A.M. 1987, Robust Regression and Outlter Detection, Wiley.

STAT406 STATISTICAL CONSULTING lOep

The aim ofthtscourseis to develop both the statistical and nonstatlstlcal skills required for a successful consultant. The course Includes a study of the consulting literature, a review of commonly-used statistical procedures, problem fonnulatlon and solvlng, analySIS of data sets, report wrttlng and oral


presentation, role-playlngandconsultlngwlthactual clients.

Text Subject readings are provided

STAT406 1IETIl0DS FOR QUALITY 1IIPR0VEllENT lOep

The course will cover the concepts of total quality management, the Deming philosophy and relevant statistical techniques. Simple methods such as flow cbarts and Pareto diagrams wlll be covered, In addition to the various types of control charts and process capabtlity analysts. Modem experimental design techniques for optimizing process performancewlll be Included. The course Isa practical one, and the Issues involved in actuallylmplementlng a quallt)' and productlvlt)' Improvement program tn an organisation will be addressed.

Subject readings provided.

ReJerences To be advised.

STAT407 ADVANCED TOPICSlN STATISTICS IOcp

Thts topic consists of three modules selected from the follOwing multivariate methods; randomisation, bootstrapping and other computer Intensive methods; analysis of repeated measures; sample size estlmatlon, analysing large data sets; metaanalyses.

Text

SUhject readings are provided.

ReJerences To be advised.

STAT406 PROJECT

STAT409 PROJECT

STAT410 PROJECT

STAT411 PROJECT

lOep

20ep

30cp

40ep

SectIonFl.,. o.ocrlpdon 01 Subl_ from other Facul ....

DESCRlP'DOJiI 01' 1lAJ'0R 8UBJBCT8I'ROII O'I'II£IlI'ACULTIES

Department of Computer Science

COlIPlll Dn'IlODUCTlON TO COIlPU'lEll SClENCE I lOep

Offered Semester 1

Content

This subject introduces the computer as a system by which problems may be solved. Students are Introduced to the process of designing and implementing aigonthms to solve problems. Data types are covered and sorting and searching techniques are Introduced to help motivate the methodological Issues. Students are Introduced to control structures, data types and procedural abstraction. An overview Is also given of the basic hardware and software components of a computer system. Including operating systems, compilers. memory and control lOgiC. The social implications of computing are discussed and an overview of the curriculum Is given.

COIIPl12 DISCRETE STRUCT11RE8 lOep

Prerequfsite COMPlll and either MATH111 wlth corequlslte MATH112 or Prerequisite MATH 102

Offered Semester 2

Content

This subject continues the development of fundamental Ideas In algorithm design and complextty analysis, in conjunction with an Introduction to discrete mathematics. The concept of an abstract data I¥pe Is contrasted wlth that of a data structure Implementation, beginning with stacks, queues and binary trees. Classical algorithms ustngthesestructuresarelnvestlgatedandanalysed. using tools drawn fromareas of discrete mathematics such as reCurrence relations, set theory, comblnatoncs, probability and elementary graph theory.

COIIPl13 INTRODUCTION TO ARTIFICIAL INTELUGENCE lOep

Corequfslte COMP111

Offered Full year

Content

This subjectdealswlth problem solvlngandartlllctal Intelllgence. It begtnswtth a discussion of reasoning and logic and proceeds toa study of proof techniques,

FecuHyofEcono~cs end Commerce

both general and fonnal. The proposftlonal and predicate calculus are introduced in this context and used throughout the discussions. Some fundamental problems of AI are then Invesllgated and non-procedural solutions are proposed and analysed. Syntax and semantics of non-procedural languages are Introduced and students are required to complete several assignments using nonprocedural languages.

COMP221 COMPARATIVE PROGRAMMING LANGUAGES IOcp

Prerequisite COMP 111 Assumed Knowledge COMPl12 or COMPI13

Offered Semester 1

Content

Thts subject introduces the student to the nature of contemporary programming languages. including true obJect-orten ted languages (such as Smalltalk or Eiffel). The evolution of Imperative languages (FORmAN. Algol. PL/I. Pascal. C.Ada) and functional languages (LiSp. Scheme. ML) and logic programming (Prolog) are discussed. In addition. fundamental design and implementation concepts for high-level programming languages are Introduced. Including the concepts of binding. type checking and run-time storage management.

C0MP222 THEORY 0 .. COMPUTATION IOcp

Prerequisites COMPI12 and COMPI13

Offered Semester 2

Content

This subject Introduces the theory of computability. including important results from the study of automata and fonnallanguages. The subject begins with a discussion of automata and their relationship to regular. context free and context sensitive languages. General theories of computabtltty are presented. Including Thring machines. recursive functions and lambda calculus. Notions of decldabUity and undecidability are discussed and this Is related to complexttyanalysls. Finally. fonnal program semantics are presented and analysed. leading to the topiC of fonnal program verification.

C0MP223 ANALYSIS 0 .. ALGORITHMS IOcp

Prerequisite COMPI12

Offered Semester 1

Section Five

Content

lltooc,lpHon of Subjocts from other Facultle.

Thls subject covers data structures and a1gortthms In depth. Topics covered Include data structures (developed In more depth than In COMP I I2) and an introduction to complexity classes. Various a1gortthms are presented In the light of specific problem-solvlng strategies and complexity Issues. Aduanced topics such as balanced search trees. graphalgortthms.paralIelanddlstrtbutedalgortthms and randomlsed. algorithms are discussed.

C0MP224 THE VNlX OPERATING SYSTEM IOcp

Asswned Knowledge COMPIII

Offered Semester 2

Content

A subject in which the Unix operating system Is explored in a top-down fashion. Topics covered could Include the Unix file system. the shell and other processes. utilftles. system calls. security. window management systems (such as Xl. and system management. The subjectts oriented towards the inexperienced or casual Unix user and Is offered to students and profeSsionals alike.

COMP2211 ARTlFlCIAL INTELUGENCE 2 IOcp

Prerequisite COMPI13

Asswned Knowledge COMP!12

Offered Semester I

content

A look at the broad scope of Artificial Intelligence with particular attention to the topics of knowledge representation. search techniques. computer reasoning. computer learning. computer viston. expert systems. natural language processing. robotics. game playing and architectures for AI.

C0IIP321 SOl"lWARE ENG1NEER1NG AND PROJECT 20cp

Prerequisite COMPI!!

Asswned Knowledge COMP221 and COMP224

Offered Full Year

Content

This full-year subject presents an tn-depth treatment of many software engineering topiCS. Including software engineering paradigms. reqUirements specification. functional and object -oriented design.

Focultyof Economici end Conwnerce

software verification and maintenance. Societal implications such as cost of failure and professional responslb1l1t1es are considered and the basic principles of technical writing are presented. Students are expected to complete a major project.

C0MP322 COMPUTER VISION AND ROBOTICS

Prerequisite COMP225

Asswned Knowledge MATH I 12

Offered Semester 2

Content

IOcp

The field of robotics provides applications for many different areas of Artificial Intelligence. Robots have to be able to see. to plan routes. to form world models; It Is an advantage If they can hear; If they can be Instructed In natural language rather than esoterlc codes; If they can reason; If they can learn; and so on. This subject will examine some of these areas of AI with specific reference to their use in Robotics.

C0MP323 COMPUTATIONAL LOGIC IOcp


Offered Semester 1

Content The subject covers the concepts of soundness and completeness of refutation methods. normal forms. analytical tableaux. resolution. dec1dabiltty. semldecldabllity. Hlntlkka sets. strategies for theorem proving. connection graphs. applications such as program verlflcation. plan generation. deductive databases. modal lOgics. temporal logics. process and dynamic lOgiCS. non-monotonic logiCS. rewrite systems and lOgiC programming.

C0MP324 PARALLEL PROCESSING IOcp

Prerequisite COMP223 and ELEC 170

Offered Semester 2

Content

The matn objective of this subject Is to develop an understanding of the tools and paradigms needed for the design of parallel algortthms for vartous models of computations. In addition. various parallel programming languages and systems are brlefly discussed as case studies.

_nFl .. """,lpHon of Subjocts from 0111 .. Focultieo

COIIP32II DATABASE SYSTEMS IOcp

PrerequJslte COMP1l2

Offered Semester I

Content

The subject covers the three level architecture of database systems. the relational database model. database normalisation. data securtty and Integrtty. recovetyandconcurrencyanddistrlbuteddatabases. Additionally. students learn the SQLquery language and geta hands-on experlenceof a modem relational database management system such as Sybase.

COIIP328 DATA SECURITY

Prerequisite COMP!12

Asswned Knowledge COMP325

Offered Semester 2

Content

IOcp

This subject covers various topics in data securlty. Including cryptography. encryption a1gortthms. Data Encryption Standard. public-key encryption. cryptanalysis. key exchange protocols. key management. secret sharing schemes. access controls. authentication. digital Signatures. infonnation flow controls. security of statistical databases.

COIIP327 PRINCIPLES 0 .. OPERATING SYSTEMS IOcP

Prerequisite ELEC 170


Offered Semester I

Content

This subject provides a thorough Introduction to operating systems. Topics Include tasking and processes. process co-ordination and synchronisation. resource scheduling. physical and virtual memory organisation. security issues. communications and networking and dlstrlbuted operating systems.

C0IIP328 COMPUTER NETWORKS IOcp

Prerequisite COMPI12 and ELECI70


Offered Semester 2

Content

An Introduction to data communication networks.

Faculty of Economics end Comrnerc.

Topics include data transmission, transmission medla, network protocols, 150/051, pubUc data networks, local area networks and distributed systems.

COIIP329 COIIPILER DESIGN


Asswned Knowledge ELEC 170

Offered Semester I

Content

IOcp

Introduction to the theory of grammars. Lexical analysers. syntactic analysis. elementary semantic analysts. Parsing techniques. object code generation and optim1sation, Scanner and parser generators.

C0IIP330 GRAPHIC USER INTEIUI'ACES 100p

Prerequisite COMPl12


Offered Semester 2

Content

Almostall computer systems designed In the next 10 years will tnvolve a graphic user Interface, Graphic user interfaces are an Increasingly common feature of modern computer systems. This subject discusses the use ofGUl's in software engineering; this Includes Visual programming and some aspects of CASE tools. Further, we study the fundamental design issues for GUl's, concentrating on applications to database design and software engineering. The subject involves a major project to create a GUI.

C0IIP331 GEOMETRIC DATA STRUCTURES

Prerequisite COMPl12


Offered Semester 1

Content

lOep

Geometric data structures are used to represent explicitly geometric structures such as image analysIs and soUd modelling as well as ImpUcltly geometric structures such as relational databases. In this subject we study fundamental data structures which have applfcations for both Implfcltly and explfc!tly geometric data, in such areas as geographic information systems and solid modelltng.

C0IIP332 COMPUTER GRAPHICS lOep

PrereqUisite COMPl12 and MATH I 12

SectIonRM DelCrlpHon of Subjocts from other Faculties

Asswned KnDwIedge MATH217

Offered Semester 2

Content

A graphical tnterface Is a cost effective method to present tnfonnatfon tn a fashion that supports rapid exploration and comprehension. The Issues to be studied, all related to the displaying of objects, may Include: graphics hardware, windows programming, graphics Interface formats, 2D drawing primttlves and their raster algorithms, 2D and 3D geometrical transfonnations, projections, geometric models, colour theory, 3D viewing, visible-surface determtnation, Ulumination and shading, ray tracing and radioslty and computer animation.

COMP4U CRYPTOGRAPHIC TECHNIQUES lOep

Prerequisite Permission of Head of Department


Offered Semester 1

Content

This subject covers advanced topics in data security. Students are expected to implement additional security features to Sybase using embedded SQL. Possible features include key exchange and authentication protocols. and mechanisms for the protection of statistical databases. Students are also expected to write a major essay on an advanced topic In data security.

C0IIP442 NATURAL LANGUAGE PROCESSING lOep

Prerequisite Pennisslon of Head of Department


Offered Semester 2

Content

Natura1language Is the sort oflanguage spoken and written by people, as opposed to the codes used to Instruct computers. Approaches to the processing of natura1languages (which are very unsystematic) on computers (which require very systematic instruction) are examined.

C0IIP443 FORMAL REASONING IN ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE lOep

Prerequisite Pennisslon of Head of Department

Asswned Knowledge COMP225. COMP323

Offered Semester I

Content


Selected topiCS from machine learning. plan generation. neural networks. multi-agent systems. computer Vision. statistical Inference. decision support systems. automated geometric reasoning. robotics. non-fonnal reasoning.

C01IP444 PROGRAIISEMANTlC8 lOep


Asswned Knowledge COMP222, COMP323

Offered Semester 2

Content

This subject covers denotational logic. semantic domains. algebraic specification, logics of programs. methods and logiCS forprovtng programs. operational and algebraic semantics of concurrent processes, distributed computing.

C0IIP446 COMPUTATIONAL GEOMETRY lOep

Prerequisite Pennlsslon of Head of Department


Offered Semester 1

Content

This subject is concerned with the design and analysis of algOrithms of a fundamentally geometric nature and their applications In fields such as graphics, robotics and VLSI design. TopiCS to be covered may include convexity and Its applications, convex hull algOrithms and applications. duality, Intersection algorithms. Voronoi diagrams and proximity and line arrangements.

COIIP446 ADVANCED COMPUTATIONAL GEOMETRY lOep



Offered Semester 2

Content

Advanced topiCS In discrete and computational geometry are covered In a workshop-style setting where solutions to unsolved research problems are sought.

COIIP447 GRAPH ALGORITHMS lOep

Prerequisite Pennission of Head of Department


SectIon Rve DeocrlpHon of Subjects from other Faculties

Offered Semester 1

Content

Many structures In computing can be modelled as a graph whose nodes represent entitles and whose edges represent relations between the entitles. This subject covers the theory and implementation of a wide range of operations on graphs.

C0IIP446 ADVANCED COMPILER DESIGN lOep



Offered Not In 1994

Content

In addition to lectures, students complete a major 3· phase project. Symbol table structures for hlock structured languages and special features such as importing and exporting. Run-time structures for block structured languages and abstract data types. Code generation to assembly language. machine Independent and machine dependent optimisation.

C0IIP449 ADVANCED PARALLEL PROCESSING THEORY lOep



Offered Not In 1994

Content

Advanced techniques and paradigms of parallel processing are discussed and unsolved problems are Investigated.

C0IIP450 DISTRIBUTED OPERATING SYSTEMS lOep



Offered Semester 2

Content

Techniques of overcoming the classical operating systems problems in a loosely coupled distributed environment. Inter-process communication, synchronisation, naming, resource allocation and protection, deadlock detection, file systems and security In a distributed environment. Several experimental systems are Investigated.

Faculty of Economic. and CoI1"lmel'Ce

COMP451 ADVANCED PARALLEL PROCESSING APPUCATlONS IOcp



Offered Not In 1994

content

The use of parallel processing to achieve high performance In certain application areas Is investigated. Such areas could Include Image processing. scientific computing. distributed operating systems etc. The particular area to be studted In depth wtll be selected and announced by the lecturer prior to the start of each subject offering.

COMP452 THEORY 0 .. DATABASES IOcp



Offered Not In 1994

Content

This subject covers advanced topics tn the theory of databases. Students are required to Implement features In Sybaseuslng embeddedSgL. The possIble topics Include semantic Integrity rules. security mechanisms and a treatment of missing values. Students are also expected to write a major essay on an advanced topic In the theory of databases.

COMP411 SPECIAL TOPIC A COMP412 SPECIAL TOPIC B C0IIP413 SPECIAL TOPIC C COMP414 SPECIAL TOPIC D

IOcp IOcp IOcp IOcp

Each of these subjects consists of a series of lectures and/or practical work in an area of advanced computer science of contemporary interest. The content of a particular subject may vary from year to year according to developments In technology and the presence of academic visitors.

COMP425 HONOURS PROJECT 20cp A substantial practical project Involving approximately 400 hours of work which normally commences In early February. Project topics are subject to the approval of the Course Co-ordinator In Computer Science. The results of the project must be embodied In a thesis and submitted by the due date.

De_pHon 01 Subjocta from other Facultle.

COIINSII SPBCL\L TOPIC E 20cp

A series oflectures and/or practlcal work In an area of advanced computer SCience of contemporary Interest. The content may vary from year to year accordlng to deveIpments In technology and the presence of academic visItors.


Department of Law

Note: TheavallabilityofanyLawsubJectlsdependent on the avaflabfifty of staff.

LAWIOI FOUNDATIONS 0 .. LAW IOcp

Offered Semester I

Lecturer Callaghan Caropus - C. Abela. Centra! Coast Campus - G. Brown

Prerequisite Nil for students enrolled In degree courses offered In the Faculty of Economtcs and Commerce.

Hours 2 lecture hours. 1 tutorial hour per week

ExamlnotWn One (I) mid-semester test and one (1) end of semester examination.

Content

Topics Include: The sources of law In Australia; The status of Aborigtnal Law; Important provfslons of the State and Federal Constitutions; The Court hetrarchy and jurisdiction; Alternative methods of dispute resolution; Precedent; Statutory Interpretation; Aspects of formation of contract; Aspects of profeSSional negligence.

Suggested Prellmlnary Reodlng

Derham. D.P. et al 1991. An InlToductfon to Law. 6th edn. Law Book Co.

Texts

To be advfsed.

References

BIrd. R 1993. Osborn's Concise Law Dictfonary. 9th edn. Sweet and Maxwell.

Enright C. 1991. Studying Law. 4th edn. Branxton Press.

Lane. P.H. 1990. An InlToductton to the Australian Constitution, 5th edn. Law Book Co.

McRae. H. et al 1991. Aoortg!na1 Legal Issues. Law Book Co.

Pearce. D.C. and Geddes. RS. 1988. Statulory Interpretatlon In AuslTalia, 3rd edn. Butterworth.

LAWI02/230 CONTRACT LAW I

Offered Semester II

Lecturers A. Finlay & G. Brown

Prerequisite Foundations of Law

IOcp

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

_nFt .. DescrlpHon 01 Subjects from other Facultle.

Examination One 3-hour end of Semester examination

Content

Thecourse introduces concepts relating to formation of contracts offer. acceptance. consIderation and Intention tocreate legal relations. misrepresentatlon, duress and undue influence. the terms of the contract. and discharge of contract.

Texts

Carter. J.W. & Harland. D.J. 1992. Cases and Materials on Contract Law In AuslTalia, 2nd edn. Butterworths.

LAWI03 COMPANY LAW I

Offered Semester I



IOcp

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tu tortal/ seminar hour per week

&amtnatfon One 3-hour paper

Content

The course commences with an Introduction to types of business organisations recognised by the law and their legal consequences. A number of aspects of partoershlp law are dealt wfth IncludIng: nature of partnership. relaUon of partners to outsiders. relations of partners to one another. tenninatlon of partnership. The bulk of the course is concerned with company law and Includes: corporate personalIty. formation. posltlon of the shareholders and minority protection. duties and responslb1l1ties of directors. corporate finanCing. flotation. and wtndlng-up. EmphasIs Is laid on the fact that much of company law lies outside the ream ofthe legislatlon regulation companies in Australia and this necessitates a thorough study of common law prtnciples developed In case law as well as a detailed analysts of the legislation.


Students will be advised early In the course which books should be purchased for their personal use.

Baxt. R 1987. AnInlToductlon lo Company Law. Law Book Co.

Ffrench. H.L. 1983. Mason'sCasebookonAuslTallan Company Law. 4th edn. Butterworths.

Hribar. Z. 1989. A Guide to Company Law. 3rd edn. LawBook Co.

Feculty of economic. end Commerce

Lipton & Herzberg 1991. Understanding Company Law. 4th edn. Law Book Co.

Pearson.L.1986.Bufterworths·StudentCompanions - Company Law. Butterworths.

Venneesch. RB. & Lindgren. K.E. 1990. Business Law oj AustraUa, 6th edn. Butterworths.

Statutes

Butterworths Australian Corporations Leglslalton, vol.!, current edn.

LAWI04 ADMINISTRATIVE LAW 1 lOep Offered Semester I

Lecturer D.W. Mitchell


Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial/seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content

The nature. operation and role of the law governing statutory and quasi-statutory administration in Australia. which is an area of'publtc'law concerned princlpaJlywith the bases ofJudtclal and other types of reviewof exercises of powers vested in governmental organs and instrumentalities and with spectfic legal remedies which may be avatlable for redressing grievances which have arisen from administrative action.

Prescrtbed Text

To be advtsed

Prescrtbed PrInted Materlals

Extracts fromjudgments tn selected leading cases to be Issued to students at the commencement of the course.

References

ABars. M. 1990. Introduction to Australian Administrative Law. Butterworths.

Pearce. D. C. 1986. Commonwealth Adminlstrative Law, Butterworths.

Sykes. E.!. et al 1989. General Prlnctples oj Administrative Law. 3rd edn. Butterworths.

Commonwealth Administrative Review Committee Report 1971. Aust. Govt. Publtshlng Service.

Statutes

Administrative Appeals 1libwtal. Act 1975 (Cth)

Conswner Claims 1libunals Act. 1974 (N.S.W.)

_nFl .. o.IC,Ip6on 01 Subjects from other Facultle.

OmbusdmanAct. 1974 (N.S.W.)

AdmJnfstrattve Decisions Judtctal Review Act. 1977 (Cth)

LA_II TIIB LAW OF EMPLOYMENT IOcp

OJfered Semester I

Prerequisite Contract Law I

Duration 1 Semester

Hows 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Content

The course focuses on the relationship between the individual employer and employee without attempting a detaUed explanation of the operatton of the collective system for regulating the relationships between unions and employers. It also covers the rights and obltgatlons of the employer/employee In tort.interferencewith contractual relations between the employer and employee by a third party and interference with contractual relations between the employer and third party by employees. discrimJnation in employment and an introduction to Workers Compensation legislation. The major topics are as follows:

Text

The source and nature of the employment relationship

The content of the contract of employment

Termination and remedies at common law

Unfair dismissal

The contract of employment and third parties

Economic torts and secondary boycotts

Unfair work contracts

DiSCrimination In employment

Workers Compensation

Brooks. Contract oj Employment. 4th edn. CCH.

Macken. McCarry & Sappldeen 1990. The Law oj Employment. 3rd edn. The Law Book Co Ltd.

References

McCallum. Pittard & Smith 1990. AustralianLabour Law Cases and Materlals. 2nd edn. Bu tterworths.

CCH 1988. Australian Industrial Relattons Act

Creighton & Steward 1989. Labour Law: An Introduction. 1st edn. The Federation Press.


LAW204/ LAW OF BUSINESS LAW304 ORGANISATIONS

Offered Semester I

Lecturer To be advtsed


lOep

Hows 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial/seminar hour per week

Examination One 3-hour paper

Content

The course commences with an introduction to types of business organisations recognised by the law and their legal consequences. A number of aspects of partnership law are dealt with Includtng: nature of partnership. relation of partners to outsiders. relations of partners to one another. termination of partnership. The bulk of the course is concerned with company law and includes corporate personality. formation. position of the shareholders and minority protection. duties and responsibtltties of directors. corporate finanCing: flotation and wtndtng-up. EmphasIs Is laid on the fact that much of company law lies outside the realm of the legislation regulating companies in Australia and this necessitates a thorough study of common law prinCiples developed In case law as well as a detatled analysis of the legislation.


Students will be advised early in the course which books should be purchased for their personal use.

Baxt. R. 1987. An Introduction to Company Law. Law Book Co.

Ffrench. H.L. 1983. Mason'sCasebookonAustralian Company Law. 4th edn. Butterworths

Hribar. Z. 1989. A Guide to Company Law. 3rdedn. Law Book Co.

Lipton & Herzberg 1991. Understanding Company Law. 4th edn. Law Book Co.

Pearson L. 1986. Butterworth'sStudentCompanlons - Company Law. Butterworths

Vermeesch. RB. & Lindgren. K.E. 1900. Business Law oj Australta, 6th edn. Butterworths

Butterworths Australian Carporatlons Legislation. vol. 1. current edn

_nFl .. o.scrlp6on 01 Subjects from other Facultl ••

LAW207 / TRADE PRACTICES LAW LAW307

OJfered Semester I

Lecturer W. PengUley


Hows 2 seminar hours per week

EKamInatfon To be advtsed

Content

lOep

The course deals generally with the operation of Part IV of the Trade Practices Act 1974 Com. and In particular with the scope of the trade practices dealt with by that part of the Act: e.g. various types of contract arrangements and understandings which substantially lessen competition. monopolization. exclusive dealing. resale price. maintenance. price discr1mJnation and anti-competitive mergers. Also reference Is made to the common law relating to restraint of trade and to the consUtu tional basis of the Act.

Texts

MUler. R V .. Annotated Trade Practices Act latest edn. Law Book Co.

Corones. S.G. 1990. CompetttlonLaw and Policy In Australia. Law Book Co.

Hurley. A.1991, Restrictive Trade Practfces: Commentary and Materials. Law Book Co.

References

C.C.H .• Australian 'Il"ade Practices Reporter.

Donald. B.G. & Heydon. J.D .• 'Il"ade Practices Law. 2 vols. Law Book Co.

Healey. D. 1988. Australian 'Il"ade Procttces Law. C.C.H.

Taperell. G.g. & Venneesch. R.B. et a11983. 'Il"ade Practfces and Consumer Protection. 3rd edn. Bu tterworths.

LAW210 FAMILY LAW

Offered Semester I

Lecturer F. Bates

Prerequlsfte Foundations of Law

Hows Three lecture hours per week

Examinotlon To be advtsed.

Content

lOep

The law relating to the formalisation and the dissolu tion of marrlage. The response of the law to


unformal1sed relationships. ChtIdren and law as governed by State and Federalleglslatton and case law: Issues such as custody and access after dissolu tion of marrtage. the legal position of children born outside marrtageandadoptlon wiIl bedlscussed. The relationship of spouses to one another's property will bea specific topic. ThereWill also beconsideratlon of aspects of family dysfunction such as Intraspousal violence and chtld abuse.

Text

Bates. F. 1987. An Introduction to Family Law. Law Book Co.

References

Dickey.A. 1991. Family Law. 2ndedn. Law Book Co.

C.C.H. 1991. Guidebook to Australian Family Law. 8th edn. C.C.H.

Finlay. H.A .. Bradbook. A.J. & Bailey-Hams. RJ. 1986, Family Law: Cases and Commentary, Bu tterworths.

Finlay. H.A. & Bailey-Hams. RJ. 1989. Family Law. 4th edn, Butterworths.

Bromley. P.M. and Lowe. N.V. 1992. Bromley's Family Law. 8th edn. Butterworths.

Cretney. S.M. 1990. Principles oj Family Law. 5th edn. Sweet & Maxwell.

LAW211 COMPANY LAW II IOcp

Offered Semester I

Lecturer J. Mf1ler

Prerequisites Company Law I

Hours 2 Seminar hours per week

Examination To be advised

Content

The course will pursue a more detailed analysIs of selected topics introduced in Company Law I and Will consider other selected areas of law affecting the liabilities of companies and company officers.

Text

Redmond. P. 1992. Companies and Securities Law: Commentary and Materials. 2nd edn. Law Book Co.

References

Lipton. R and Herzberg A. 1992. Understanding Campany Law. 4th edn. Law Book Co.

SecUon Flv. Description of Subjects from other Faculties

Tomasic, R, Jackson, J. and Woellner, R. 1992, Corporation Law: Principles. Policy and Process. 2nd edn. Butterworths.

BaxtandFletcher.I992.AJ!ermanandBaxt·sCases and Materials on Corporations andAssociations. 6th edn. Butterworths.

Ford and Austin 1992. Ford's Principles oj Corporations Law. 6th edn. Butterworths.

Burnett 1993. Australian Corporations Law Guide. CCH

Australian Corporations and Securities Legislation 1993.

LAW212 CONTRACT LAW II

Offered Semester I

Lecturer A. Finlay

PrereqUisites Contract Law I

IOcp

Hours 2 lecture hours and 1 tutorial hour per week

Examination One 3-hour examination. Other assessment to be advised.

Content

The course Will pursue a more detatIed analysIs of concepts Introduced in Contract Law 1 and Will include other selected areas such as statutory provisions affecting contracts and recent developments In the Law of Contract.

Text

Carter. J.W. and Harland. D.J. 1991. Cases and Materials on Contract Law in Australia, 2nd edn, Bu tterworths

LAW205 BUSINESS AND CONSUMER IOcp CREDIT LAW

Offered Semester II

Lecturer W. Peng!lJey


Hours 2 lecture hours and I tutorial/seminar hour per week

Examination To be advised

Content

This course comprises a study of the legal forms by which finance and credit are obtained a by business; and by consumers. In relation to acquisition onand, the terms of contracts and mortgages Win be studted and in relation to acqUisition of goods, there Will be


a brief study of hire purchase. lay-by sales. bUls of sale, pledges and liens. The course includes an outline of Guarantee & Suretyship. Special attention will be gIven to The Credit Act 1984 N.S.W.

Texts

Students will be advised early In the course which books should be purchased. Course lecture notes to be purchased at University Book Shop areessenUal.

References

Vermeesch. RB. and LIndgren. K.E. 1990. Business Law oj Australia. 6th edn. Butterworths.

Goldrtng. J .. Maher. L.W. & McKeough. J. 1987. Consumer Protection Law in Australia. 3rd edn. Butterworths.

Duggan. A.J. 1986. Registered Credit: The Sale Aspec~ Law Book Co.

Sharpes. A. 1985. CredU Act Handbook. Law Book Co.

Levine. J.R 1985. New South Wales ConsumerCredU Legislation, CCH Aust. Ltd.

Cavanaugh, S. and Barnes, S. 1988, Conswner CredU Law inAustralia. Butterworths.

Sykes. E.!. and Walker. S. 1993. TheLawoJSecur!ties inAustralia. 5th edn. Law Book Co.

SectIon Five Description of Sublects from other FacUlties

Department of Oeopaphy

GIIOGI0l urntODUCTlON TO PBYlIICALIOcp GBOGlIAPHY

Prerequisites Nn. Students should note that GEOG 10 I and GEOG 102 are prerequisites for the Geography MaJor tn Arts and Science. and for Geography Honours GE0G40 1 and GEOG402

Hours 2 hours lectures and 2 hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester

Content

An tntroductlon to physical geography including meteorology and climate; the Influence of geomorphic processes on landforms; weathering, rivers, Ice, frost. wind and the sea; the physIcal. chemical and biological characteristics of the soil and the development of soil profiles; environmental and historical factors that Influence plant distribution.

Practical work includes an introduction to the study of climatic data and maps, and the use of topographic maps and aerial photographs for landform analysts.

Texts

Briggs. D. & Smithson. P. 1985. Fundamentals oj Physical Geography. Hutchinson.

GEOGI02 INTRODUCTION TO IOcp HUMAN GEOGRAPHY

Prerequisites Students should note that GEOG 101 and GEOG 102 are prerequisites for the Geography Major in Arts and Science. and for Geography Honours GEOG401 and GEOG402

Hours 2 hours lectures and 2 hours of practical work per week for one semester. A one day field excursion.

Examination Progressive assessment and one 2 hour paper at the end of the semester

An introduction to human geography including cultural, population, economic, development and urban geography.

Practical work Includes an Introduction to elementary statistical data and Us presentation by thematic maps In human geography.

Text

Haggett. P. 1979. Geography: a modem synthesis 3rd edn. Harper & Row.

Faculty of Economics and Corntnerc.

Department of Mathematic. The usual route for study of Mathematics beyond first year - for example, to obtain a "Major In MathemaHcs" startswlth MATII 102 In ftrst semester. followedbyMATI-l103lnsecondsemester. However, entIy at this point requires an adequate level of knowledge and sldll. At the Hme of writing. the minimum level Is Indicated bya mark of at least 120 out of 150 In 3-untt Mathematics at the New South Wales H.S.C. examination.

Any student with less than this level of knowledge or sk1ll has available MATH Ill. followed by MA1H112. This combination allows entIy to seven of the seventeen level-200 subjects in Mathematics. Such a student could take MATH 103 In a later year to meet the prerequisites for further mathematics subjects.

Note thatMA1Hlll is not appropriate fora student who has perfonned substantially above the minimum level for entry to MATII 102/103.

MATH111 MATHEMATICS 111 lOcp

Prerequisite2U mathematics at HSC level or eqUivalent

Not to count for credit with MA1HI0l

Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutoIial hours per week for one semester. The subject Is repeated tn each semester.


Content

Elementary algebra. trtgonometry and geometrywlth appltcations. Calculus with applications of differentiation and integration. Newton's method. Trapezium and Simpson's Rules. Vector geometIy, and its applications.

Text

Unlversiw of Newcastle 1993. Mathemntics 111 Tutorial Notes.

Stewart. J. 1991. Calculus. 2nd edn. Books/Cole.

References

Ash. C. and Ash. RB. 1987. The Calculus Thtortng Book • IEEE Press.

Dobson. A.J. & Stokoe. J. 1986. Self-Paced Introductory Mathemntics. 3rd edn. ANU Press.

_nFt"" DeocrlpUon 01 Subl_ from other Facultl ••

MATH112 MATllEllATICS 112

Prerequ/.sltes Either MATIlIII or MATIlIOI

Not In count for credit with MATIlI02

lOcp

HoW'S 4 lecture hours and 2 tutortal hours perweek for one semester. The subject Is repeated in each semester.

Examtnatfon One 3 hour paper plus progressive assessment

Contents

Techniques of integration with applications. Differential equations and applications. Calculus of several vaIiables together with applications. Taylor Series expansions. Complex numbers and their appllcations. Matrix algebra. Eigenvalues. eigenvectors.

Texts

Universiw of Newcastle 1993. ThtDrtal Notes Jor MATHlI2.

Stewart. J. 1991. Calculus. 2nd edn. Brooks/ Cole.

References

Ash. C. & Ash. RB. 1987. The Calculus ThtDrtng Book. IEEE Press.

Stein. S.K. 1982. Calculus andAnalytical Geometry. 3rd edn. McGraw-H1ll.

IlATH102 MATHEMATICS 102 lOcp

Prerequisites Either a satisfactory perfonnance in 3U Mathematics at the NSW HSC (see notes above) or eqUivalent or MATIlIII. Not to count for credit with MATIlI12.

Hours 4 lecture hours and 2 tutoIiaI hours per week for one semester

Examlnation One 3 hour paper

Content

Calculus of functions of a single variable. The Fundamental Theorem of Calculus. Taylor's series. Complex numbers. Differential equations. An introduction to the calculus of functions of two variables. Matrtxalgebra. Eigenvalues. eigenvectors.

Texts

University of Newcastle 1991. Thtorial Notes for MATHI02.

Edwards. C.H. & Penney. D.E. 1990. Calculus and Analytical Geometry. 3rd edn. Prentice-Hall.

Foeulty of Economl .. and Commerce

References

Ayres. F. 1974. Calculus Schaum.

Anton. H. 1987. Elementary Unear Algebra. 5th edn. Wiley.

Farrand. S. & Poxton. N.J. 1984. Calculus. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich.

Stetn.S.K .. I982.CalculusandAnalyticalGeometry. 3rd edn. McGraw-Hill.

Walters. FR.F.C. & Wehrhahn. K. 1989. Calculus I. 2nd edn. Garslaw.

IlATH103 MATHEMATICS 103 lOcp

Prerequtst.te Either a satisfactory performance in 3 unit Mathematics at the NSW Higher School Certificate (see notes above)or eqUivalent or MATIlI02 or MATIlIII and MATIlI12.

HOUTS 4 lecture hours and 2 tutorlal hours per week for one semester

Examination One 3 hour paper

Content

An Introduction numerical mathematics and computing. Vector geometIy and linear algebra: vector spaces, linear maps.

Analysis of the convergence of sequences and series. Power Series. ElementaIyTheoremsofMathematical AnalysIs. Counting. probab1l1w and an introduction to finite mathematical structures.

Texts Unlversiw of Newcastle 1993. Tutortal notes Jor MATHI03.

References

Blnmore. K.G. 1985. MathemnticalAnalysls. CUP.

Brisley. W. Notes for Linear Algebm, Lecture notes in Mathematics. University of Newcastle, No.5.or A Basis Jor LInear Algebra

Chapman. C.RJ. 1973. IntroductlontDMathemntical Analysis Routledge & Kegan Paul.

Giles. J.R. Real Analysis: An Introductory Course. Lecture notes in Mathematics, Untv.Newcastle. No.6.

Grimaldi. RP. 1985. DIscrete and CombinatDrtal Mathemntics. Addison-Wesley.

_pUon 01 Subl_ from oilier FoculUeo

Department of lIodern Lan,ua,e. -J_paa ••• The object of the course io to eqUip students with a working knowledge of the language so that they may make uae of it In employment as well as in ouch disciplines as Japanese commerce. economics. geography. history. Unguiotics. literature and aociology In the corresponding Departments.

JPlII110 EutllENTARY JAPANESE

Offered Full year

Prerequisites Nil

Hours 6 class hours per week

Content

200p

An introduction to the phonology and structure of the language with practice in listening. speaking. reading. and writing.

Examination Progressive assessment

Text

Mlzutanl. O. & N. Anlntroductton tDModemJapanese. The Japan Times

ReJerences

Japan Foundation, Baste Japanese-English DIctionary. Bonjinsha

Sakade. F. A Guide tDReadlng and WritlngJaponese. Tuttle

Simon. M.E. Supplementary Grammar Notes to An Introductton to ModemJapanese. Pts I &.2. UniversIty of Michigan

Takahashi. M. PocketRoman/zed Engllsh-Japanese Dlcttonary

German

GElll13 BUS1NE88 GERMAN SEllESTERI

Offered Semester I

Prerequisite A satisfactory result in the HSC In Gennan: or GERI20 or pre-l990 Gennan IS; or the eqUivalent (a WEA Gennan Saturday Schol course. stay in Gennany. etc). subject to approval by the Section.

HOUTS 2 hours per week

Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester examination

Foeully of Economic. end Conwnerce

Content

An Introduction to the vocabulary and structures of business Gennan. Students may wish to take this subject In conjunctlon with GERIIl.

Text

Erlhage. Hans 1988. Deutsch. Sprachberelch IndustTle. Klett. Stuttgart.

GER123 BUSINESS GERMAN

SEllESTER 11

Offered Semester II

Prerequisite GERl13 or the equivalent. subject to approval by the Sectlon.


Examination Progressive assessment and end of semester examination

Content

An introduction to the vocabulary and structures of bUSiness Gennan. Students may Wish to take this subject In conjunctlon with GERI21.

Text

Erlhage. Hand 1988. Deutsch. Sprachberelch IndustTle. Klett. Stuttgart.

GER213 BUSINESS GERMAN

SEllESTERI

Offered Semester I 6cp

Prerequisite GER 120 or pre-1990 German IS or the eqUivalent. subject to approval by the Section.


Examination Selective progreSSive assessment and end of semester examination.

Content

An introduction to the vocabulaty and structures of business German.

Text


GER223 BUSINESS GERMAN SEllESTER 11 6cp

Offered Semester II

Prerequisite GER213 or the eqUivalent. subject to approval by the section.


_ FI .. _pHon at Subl _ from other FecultIM

Emmtnatton Selective progreSsive assessment and end of semester examination.

Content

An Introduction to the vocabulary and structures of business Gennan.

Text


Foeulty of Economic. end CoI"l'lf11et'Ce

Department of Phlloeophy

PHIL393 IIUJIAlII V ALUEII AND COMMERCIAL PRACTICE IOcp

Lecturer Professor C. Hooker

Pre/Corequlslte See lists of Approved Subjects for relevant degree


~n Essay. assignments and examination

Content

A course oflectures and discussions focusing on the nature and place of commercial practice within western society and culture, on exploring and critically assessing the ethical. spiritual. social. political and economic value judgements that arise within and for commercial practice In Its cultural setting. Including the ethical and social implications of commercial institutional responslbilittes and professional roles.

Texts

Coady. C.A.J. andSampford. C.J .G. (eds). Business. EthIcs and the Law. Federation Press.

Hooker. e.A.. Course Notes

References

Buchanan. A.. EthIcs. Elflcfency and the Market. Rowan and Littlefield.

Calabresl. G. and Bobbitt. P .• 'll"aglcChoices.Norton.

callahan. J.C. (ed). ethical Issues In Professional Ufe. Oxford.

Pastln. M .• The HardProblemsofManagement.JoseyBass.

Vickers. G .• ResponsibUlty: Its Source and Its Umits. Intersystems.

_ Fl .. DHcripHon at Subl _ from other Fecultin:

Department of P8ychol"IIY

PSYCIOI P8YCIlOLOGY JIn'IlODUCTlON 1


Emmtnatton One 2 hour paper

Content

IOcp

Three written laboratory reports. Introductory Methodology and Statistics for Psychology; BiolOgical Foundations; Perception and Learning

Texts

GeDeral-anyrecentcomprehenstve text on General Psychology or Introduction to Psychology. The following alternatives are recommended (others may be added later).

Atkinson. R.L .• Atklnson. R.C .• etall990. Introduction tDPsychology. 10th edn. Harcourt Brace Jovanovich

For statlad.,. _,

Howell. D.C. 1985 or 1989. Fundamental Statlsllcs forthe BehaoiooralScfences. Istor2ndedn. Duxbury

References To be advised

PSYCI02 PSYCHOLOGY INTRODUCTION 2

Prerequisite PSYC 10 I

Hours 5 hours per week for one semester

.&caminat1on One 2 hour paper.

Content

IOcp

Three written laboratory reports; Cognition; Social Psychology; Developmental Psychology.

Texts

General- as for PSYC 101.

For 8ocI1II ~ho1ogy

callan. V .• Gallols. C. & Noller. P. 1986. Social Psychology Harcourt Brace Jovanovich

Feeulty 01 Economlco and Conmerce

Department of SocloJ...,. IUld ADtIuopoJoay

SOCAlll INTRODUCTION TO SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 20cp

Offered Day and evening

Prerequisite Nil

Hows 3 hours teaching per week

Assessment Classwork. assignments, examination

l.ectr..uers Semester 1: Lots Btyson, John Gow. Kathy Robinson

Semester 2: Keny Carrington, Raymond Donovan, Barry Morns

Content

Following a brtef Introduction to sociology and social anthropology, the first semester of SOCA III w!lI be concerned. with the nature of social inequality. To begin with, the subject will consider the notion of tnequalitytn thecontext of contemporary Australian society, looking at Issues of class, ethnlclty and gender. The next section of the subject examines fonns of inequality in the economic order of third world SOCieties. examining how new forms of inequality accompany the Incorporation of these SOCieties within a global economy. The semester concludes with a comparative study of different structures of state power and political violence.

S0CA203 WORK IJIIIJIIDUSTRIAL SOCIETY lOcp

Prerequisite SOCA III or equivalent

Hours 2 hours teaching per week Day classes tn 1994 (semester 2)

Assessment Research project. essay. examination

Content

This subject will examine the growth of Industrtal capitalism. Its Impact on the organisation and experlence of work. the degree to which its form Is determined by technology and the relationship between recent technological innovations and unemployment. Particular attention will be paid to questions of ethnlclty. gender and profeSSionalism.

Texts

Williams, Clare 1992, Beyond Industrial Soclolcgy: The WorkoJMen -Women, Allen and Unwin, Sydney.

Recommended Reodlng

Game, A. & PrIngle, R. 1983, Gender at Work,Allen and Unwin, Sydney.

Section Five DMcription 01 Sublects from other Fecultles

Littler, Cralg R. (ed!I985, The E>tperIence oJ Work, Gower and Oi>en University, A1dershot.

Probert, Belinda 1988, WorldngL/fe, McPhee Grtbble.

WUIls, Evan (ed! 1988, Technology and the Labour Process:Austra/astanCaseStudtes, Allen and Unwin, Sydney,

Feculty of economic. end Commerce

W ..... OD of Lelaare Stwlle.

LEIS209 IJIITRODUCTION TO THE TOURISMIJIIDUSTRY lOcp

Offered Semester 1 In 1994

Prerequisite MNGTll1, Introduction to Management and Organisational Behaviour l!l: LEIS 104, Leisure Organisation and Public Policy,

Hows 3 teaching hours per week

Content

The alms of this subject are to review the historlcal development of tourism, analyse the components within tourism and examine the organisation. management and structure of the tourism industry. Tourlsm tn a global context Is examined with special emphasis on the Australtan tourism Industry as part of a global phenomenon. The unit Introduces students to tourism and the tourlsm Industry. organisations within the Industry and to relevant disciplinary and InterdiSCiplinary approaches to their study. Trends and career opportunities in tourism are covered

Texts

Frldgen, J,D. 1991, DlmensIDns oJTourism, East Lansing. Educational Institute.

Ryan. C. 1991. Recreational Towism. London. Routledge.

Hall, M. 1991, TOurism in Australia, Melbourne, Longman,

LEIS211 TOURIST BEHAVIOUR AND INTERACTIONS lOcp


Prerequisite LEIS209 Introduction to the Tourtsm Industry

Hours 3 teaching hours per week

Content

This elective subject seeks to provide students with an overview of theories and models of tourist behaviour. Consideration Is given to the varlous motivations which underpin travel and destination choices and how this knowledge Is applied In marketing decisions. The subject is also concerned with the Impact of tourists and tourism development on host communities. The perceptions of host communities to tourists and tourlsm are discussed and the Importance of developing host-guest

SectIon Five

Texts

Deocription 01 Sublects from other FacultIH:

a sustainable tourism

Mathieson, A. & Wall, G. 1982, Tourism EconomIc, Physfcal and Socfallmpat:ts, Longman, London.

Murphy, p, 1985, TourlsmA CommunIty Approoch, Methuen, London,

Frtdgen, J, D. 1991, Dimensions oj Tourism, Educational Institute. East LanSing.

LEI83111 TOURISM POLICY AND ~G lOcp


Prerequisite LEIS21l, Tourtsm Behaviour and Interactions

Hours 3 teachtng hours per week

Content

This subject focuses on planning as a process and a set of techniques for sustainable tourism development, It looks at the physical environment of plannlngandthesoclal,culturalandpolltlcalrealltles of planning and pollcy development, Emphasis Is placed on regional and community-based tourism as well as resort and destination planning. The roles of the pubUc and the prlvate sectors are evaluated as well as the nature. parameters and constraints attached to tourlsm development. Additional alms of the subject are to create an understanding of public policy and decision making for tourism planning and provide an appreciation of poliCies and models for the planning of tourtsm areas.

Texts

Gunn, C, 1988, TourIsmPlannIng, Taylor and Francis, New York

Inskeep, E. 1991 Tourism Planning: An Integrated and Sustainable Development Approach, Van Nostrand. New York.

Lea, J 1988, 1burfsm and Development In the ThiTd World, Routledge, London.

LEI831S TOURISM ENTERPRISE IlAJllAGEMENT lOcp


Prerequisite LEIS211 Tourism Behaviour and Interactions


Faculty 01 Economl .. end Commerce

Content

This subject builds on the concepts and fundamentals of previous work throughout the student's academic experience and focuses on functional management areas within a tourism organisation. Tourism Enterprise Management takes onan applied focus to the managementandoperatlon of various tourism enterprises.

The subject will examine aspects of the follOwing: strategic tourism planning; tourism resort development; quality management, customerservtce and the human dtmenslon; Improving productivity; employee and tndustrlal relations; tour operation and lourlsm product design; meetings, conventions and event management; financial control and technology tn tourism management; and managing within regional tourism offices.

Texts

Powers. T. 1988. Management in the Hospftality Industry. 3rd edn. Wlley. New York.

Gee, C.Y. 1988. Resort Development and Management. 2nd edn. The Educational Institute of the American Hotel and Motel Association, East lansing.

Keiser. J.R. 1990. Principles and Practices of Management in the Hospftality Industry. 2nd edn. Van Nostrand. New York.

LEl8317 CURRENT ISSUES IN TOURISM IOcp

Offered Not offered In 1994

Prerequisite LEIS211 Tourism Behaviour and Interactions

HoLUS 3 teaching hours per week

Content

This subject strives to develop an understanding of and appreciation for the prominent contemporary Issues faCing organisations Involved In tourism on both a national and International level. Particular Issues are explored from the perspective of the tourism Industry. the tourist. the hostand population and other diverse groups affected by tourism.

Students are expected to utilise the sktlls and knowledge obtatned In other subjects to critically rev1ewlssues, draw analogies. synthestseand analyse Ideas, explore alternative viewpoints to an Issue, discusslnterrelatlonshlps to other Issues and sectors of tourism and other industries, draw conclusions.

SoctIon FI .. DHctipHon of Subj .... from other Faculties

make recommendations and discuss questions for further thought and ana1ysls.

Texts

Craik. J. 1991. Resorting to Thurlsm, Allen and Unwin. Sydney.

Smith. V.L.. EacIlngton. W.R (ed). 1992. Tourism Alternatives, University of Pennsylvania, Phlladelphla.

Med!k. S. 1991. Managing Tourism. ButtelWorth/ Helnmann. Oxford.

LEl831S SPECIALISED SECTORS OF TIlE TOURISM INDUSTRY lOcp

Offered Not offered In 1994

Prerequisite LEIS209 Introduction to the Tourism Industry

HoLUS 3 teaching hours per week

Content

Emerging areas within the tourism Industry have seen the development of more speclallsedcommerclal sectors. Three of these sectors are covered In this subject,lncluding: meetings. events and tours. The meetings market. which Involves large conferences and conventions as well as smaller functions and meetings, has long been an Important component of the tourism Industry. Event tourism Is an emerging area of specialisation In tOUrism, due to Increasing Importance of special events from large scale to oneday community festivals. A growing diversity In the Interests of tourists and an Increasing need for rlcherexpertences have resulted In a more demanding customer. This has led to a specialisation and increased sophlstlcatlon in the area of tour managing and tour guiding.

This subject develops a systematic approach to the planning, marketing and managing of meetings. events and speclaltsed tours. It illustrates key concepts and methods. addresses costs and benefits, looks at participants and their needs and explores specific techniques and their practical application.

Students will develop an understanding of the context. Significance, roles and responsibilities of industry elements In the management and function of convention. events and specialised tours as a part of the Australian tourist product.

Texts

Weller. B. and Hall. C.M. 1992 Special Interest Tounsm. Bellhaven. London.

Fecutty of Economic. and Commerce

Getz. D. 199 I. Festivals. SpecialEvents and Thurlsm, Van Nostrand Reinhold. New York.

Pond. K. 1993. The Professional Guide: Dynamlcs of Tour Guiding. Van Nostrand Reinhold. New York.

LEl8319 PROdECT IN TOURISM MANAGEMENT lOcp


Prerequisfte MNGT322 Contemporary Management Issues and approval of the Head of the Department of Management

HoLUs 3 teaching hours per week

Content

This subject builds on the concepts and fundamentals of previous work throughout the student's academic experience and focuses on areas of the student's Interest within a tourism organisation or regarding a major tourism issue.

This subject has been deSigned to address key issues in the area of specialisation, at both the organisational and industry level. It draws on previous areas of research, problem solving skills and project work. as well as various diSCiplines of study. It also prOVides a forum for the cross fertilisation of Ideas between speclallsations (Ie tourism management. human resource management. marketing and enterprise management).

Thesubjectexamtnesaspectsofthetourismtndustry from a management and professional perspective and utilises these In the development and implementation of an applied project that addresses an organisational or industry issue.

LElS320 TOURISM MARKETING

Offered Semester I In 1994

Prerequisite MNGT230 Marketing PrInCiples


Content

lOcp

This unit draws on the concepts and fundamentals of marketing presented In Marketing Principles and focuses on tactical aspects of tourism marketing. This includes the further development of the "Four P's" of the marketing mix Into "Eight P's" of tourism marketing (Partnership. Products. People. Packaging. Programming. Place. Promotion and PrIce).

Emphasis will also be placed on the positioning of tourtsm products and the development and

SoctIonFl .. DNcripHon of Subj_ from other Fecultle.

understandlngofthetactlcalstrategiesformarkeUng a tourism service. The subject also examines the design and uae of creative promotional and media technlques witbtn the tourism Industry.

Texts

Morrison. Alastatr 1989. Hospftality and 1hlvel Marketing. Delmar. Albany.

Hart. Christopher W.L. & Troy. David A. 1986. Strategic Hotel/Motel Marketing. The Educational Institute of the American Hotel & Motel Association. East lansing.

Laws. Eric 1991. Tourism Marketing: Sero!ce and Quality Management Perspectives. Stanley Thomes. Leckhampton.

section six

Rules Governing Postgraduate Courses

I'otItgraduate Coune.

Postgraduate studies may be undertaken within the departments of Commerce. Economics and Management leading to the G.Dfploma In Management. the G.Dtploma In Marketing. the G.Dtploma In Taxation Studies, the G.Dtploma In Economic Studies and to MBA, MCom, MEc and PhD degrees.

In the Department of EconOmics candidates may study for the Master of Economics degree by research and thesis. The Diploma tn Economic Studies was introduced to cater for those candidates not wishing to pursue a Master of Economics degree course. Subjects which may be included tn the Diploma are specified In the schedule of subjects prescribed by the Faculty Board.

In the Department of Commerce the degree of Master of Commerce may be taken by research and thesis. The Diploma in Taxation Studies has been Introduced and Is aimed at three distinct groups:

• Tax Office employees;

• graduates seeking CPA specialist qualification In Taxation with the ASCPA; and

• Bachelor of Commerce graduates who wish to do further study in Taxation.

The Faculty introduced a Master of Business Administration degree course in 1978. Full details of the course are available In this Handbook. Candidates for registration are reqUired to present test scores from the Graduate Management Admission Test.

A number of postgraduate scholarships are available to candidates who have obtained a good honours degree to enable them to undertake full-time research. and prospective candidates currently enrolled in the University of Newcastle are asked to consult the Head of Department not later than the mid-semester break of the final (Honours) year. Full details of recurrent scholarships are posted from time to time on departmental notice boards. Conditions of award of higher degrees and diplomas are given In the follOwing pages.


Rule. GovemIDg Academic Awards

AppUcation of Rule.

1. These Rules shall apply to all the academic awards of the Unlverslty other than the degrees of Doctor and Master.

Interpretation

2. (1) In these Rules. unless the context or subject matter otherwise Indicates or reqUires:

"award" means the degree. diploma (Including graduate diploma and associate diploma) or graduate certificate for which a candidate Is enrolled;

"coureell means the total reqUirements of the program of study approved by the Academic Senate to qualify a candidate for the award as set out in the schedule;

"Dean" means the Dean of a Faculty;

"department" means the department offering a particular subject and Includes any other body so doing;

"Faculty" means the Faculty responsible for the course;

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty;

"schedule" means the schedule to these Rules relevant to the award listed under the name of the Faculty;

"subject" means any part of a course for which a result may be recorded.

(2) A reference in these Rules to a Head of Departmen t shall be read not only as a reference to the person appointed to that office but also. where a subject Is not offered by a department as such. to the person approved by the Academic Senate to undertake the responsibtlittes of a Head of Department for the purpose of these Rules.

AdmIulon

3. An applicant for admission to candidature for an award shall satisfy the requirements of the University governing admission to and enrolment In a course and any other additional requirements as may be prescribed in the schedule for that award.

SectIon Six Rule. OoMmlng Postgraduate Course.

Subject

4. (I) Forthepurposesofacourse,asubjectmay be classified at a level determined by the Faculty Board.

(2) Each subject shall be allotted a credit point value by the Academic Senate after considering the advice of the Faculty Board of the Faculty In which the department Is located.

(3) The Academic Senate. after considering a request from a Faculty Board. may determine that a subject be not offered during a particular academic year.

(4) The Faculty Board shall approve the subjects for the award. Any change In the list of approved subjects which will have effect In the followlngyear shall be approved by a date determined by the Academic Senate.

(5) Where there Is any change in the list of approved subjects, the Faculty Board shall make all reasonable provision to permit students already enrolled in the course to progress normally.

Enrolment ~ 5. (1) A candidate may not enrol In any year Ina

combination of subjects which is incompatible with the requirements of the timetable for that year.

(2) Except with the permission of Ihe Dean and subject to any contrary provision In the schedule:

(a) a candidate may not enrol in subjects totalltng more than the equivalent of 40 credit points in any semester;

(h) a candidate shall not enrol in a subject which does not count towards the award; and

(c) a candidate shall not be permitted to enrol in any subject which is substantially eqUivalent to one which that candidate has previously counted towards a degree or diploma.

(3) A candidate for an award shall not enrol In a course or part of a course for another award in this University unless consent has first been obtained from the Dean and.

Faculty of economics and Conwnerce

if another Faculty is responsible for the course leading to that other award, the Dean of that Faculty. provided that a student may enrol tn a combined course approved by the Academic Senate leading to two awards.

Pre-requisite. and Co-requiliteo

6. (1) The Faculty Board on the recommendation ofthe Head ofthe Department may prescribe pre-requisites and/or co-requisites for any subject offered by that Department.

(2) Except with the pennlssion of the Dean gran ted after considering any recommendation made by the Head of the Department, no candidate may enrol In a subject unless that candidate has passed any subjects prescribed as its pre-requisites at any grade which may be specified and has already passed or concurrently enrols in or is already enrolled in any subjects prescribed as Its co- requisites.

(3) Except with the pennlssion of the Dean. a candidate will not have satisfied a prerequisite if the pre-requisite subject has not been completed in the preceding eight calendar years.

(4) A candidate attaining a Terminating Pass in a subject shall be deemed not to have passed that subject for pre-requisite purposes.

Credit

7. (1) A Faculty Board may grant credit to a candidate In specified and unspecified subjects, on such conditions as It may determine. In recognition of work completed In the University or another Institution approved by the Faculty Board for this purpose or additionally as may be provtded In the schedule.

(2) Except as may be otherwise provided in the schedule. a candidate shall not be given credit for more than sixty-five percent of the total number of credit points required to complete the course.

Subject Requiremenu

8. (1) The subjects which may be completed in the course for the Award shall be those approved by the Faculty Board and

_nSlx Rul •• Governing Poatgredu ... Cour ...

published annually as the Approved Subjects section of the schedule.

(2) A candidate enrolled in a subject shall comply with such academic and practical requirements and submit such written or otherworkas the Department shall specify.

(3) Except as otherwise pennltted by the Head of Department. any material presented by a candidate for assessment must be the work of the candidate and not have been previously submitted for assessment.

(4) To complete a subject a candidate shall satisfy published departmental requirements and gain a satisfactory result In such assessments and examinations as the Faculty Board shall reqUire.

Withdr .....

9. (1) A candidate may withdraw from a subject or the courseonlybyinfonnlng the Academic Registrar in writing and the withdrawal shall take effect from the date of receipt of such notlftcatlon.

(2) A student shall be deemed not to have enrolled tn a subject If that student withdraws from the subject:

(a) in the case of a semester length subject, before the Higher Education Contribution Scheme census date for that semester; or

(h) in the case of a full year subject. before the first Higher Educatlon Contribution Scheme census date for that academic year.

(3) Except with the permission of the Dean:

(a) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject after the relevant date which shall be:

(I) in the case of a semester length subject. the last day of that semester; or

(11) in the case of a full year subject. the last day of second semester; and/or

(tit) subject to any provision within the Schedules; and


(h) a candidate shall not be permitted to withdraw from a subject on more than two occasions.

Le .... of Ahoence 10. (1) Subject to any provision in the schedule. a

candldate!n good academic standing In the course:

(a) may take leave of absence of one year from the course~ or

(h) with the permission of the Dean. may take leave of absence of two consecutive years from the course without prejudice to any right of the candidate to re-enrol In the course following such absence and with full credit in all subjects successfully completed prior to the period of leave.

(2) For the purposes of sub-rule (1). unless otherwise specified in the schedule. a candidate eligible to re-enrol shall be deemed to be In good academic standing.

(3) A person who has been enrolled in a cou roe but Is absent without leave or has been excluded from the course may apply for readmission to that course and may be readmitted to candidature under such conditions and at such time as the Faculty Board may determine. unless otheJWIse spectfted in the Schedule.

QUalification for the Awud 11. (1) To qualify for the award a candidate shall

satisfactOrily complete the requirements governing the course prescribed In the schedule.

(2) A subject which has been counted towards a completed award may not be counted towards another award. except to such extent as the Faculty Board may approve.

Combined Degree Programa

12. (1) Where so prescribed fora partlcularcourse, a candidate may complete the requirements for one Bachelor degree inconjunctlon with another Bachelor degree by completing a combined degree program approved by the Academic Senateon the advice of the Faculty Board and. where the other Bachelordegree is offered In another Faculty. the Faculty Board of that Faculty.

_nSlx Rul •• Governing Po.tgradu ... Course.

(2) Admtsston to a combined degree program shall be restricted to candidates who have achievedastandardofperformancedeemed satisfactory for the purposes of admission to the specific combined degree course by the Faculty Board(s).

(3) The work undertaken by a candidate in a combined degree program shall be no less in quantity and quality than if the two courses were taken separately.

(4) To qualify for admission to the two degrees a candidate shall satisfy the requirements for both degrees. except as maybe otheJWIse provided.

ReI"""" _.on 13. In order to provide for exceptional circumstances

arlstngtn a parttcularcase. the Academic Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board may relax any provision of these Rules.

SCHEDULE 1 - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ACCOUNTING AND FINANCE'

AdmIaIion to Caoc1id.ture

1. (1) An applicantfor admission to candidature shall:

(a) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor In the University; or

(b) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree or equivalent qualification. approved for the purpose by the Faculty Board. in anothertertlruy Institution; or

(c) have such other qualifications and experience as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce.

(2) Notwithstanding sub-clause (I). Faculty Board shall consider each application and if it is of the opinion that the applicant's academic preparation Is not suffiCient to enable satlsfactorycompleUon of the course • may:

(a) on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce. reqUire the applicant to complete such prerequisite and/ orcorequlslte studies as It may prescribe; or

• Not offered in 1994

Feculty of Economic. end Commerce

(b) reject the appUcation.

QuaIIflcation for the Diploma

2. (I) To quaUty for the diploma a candidate shall pass subjects totalling not less than 80 credtt potnts selected from the list of Approved Subjects presented In accordance with condltlons prescribed by the Faculty Board.

(2) The subjects passed shall Include at least 60 credit poInts from Group B subjects.

TIme Requirements

3. Exceptwlth the permIssIon of the Faculty Board the course shall be completed tn not less than one year of study.

SCHEDULE 2 - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ECONOMIC STIlDIES

AdmJasIon to Candidature

1. (l) An applicant for admission to candidature shall:

(a) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor tn the University; or

(b) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree or eqUivalent qualification, approved for the purpose by the Faculty Board. In another tertiary Institution; or

(c) have such other qualtficatlons and experience as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Economtcs.

(2) Notwithstanding sub·clause (1). Faculty Board shall consider each application and If It Is of the opInIon that the appHcanfs academic preparation is not suffiCient to enable satisfactory completion of the course, may:

(a) on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Economics, require the applicant to complete such prerequisite and/ orcorequfslte studies as It may prescribe; or

(b) reject the appHcation.

SectIon She Rul •• Governing Postgreduete Course.

Q .. aHflcation .. the Diploma

2. (I) To quaUty for the diploma a candidate shall:

(a) pass subjects totalling not Ie .. than 70 credit points selected from the Hst of Approved Subjects; and

(b) pass eIther a Research Essay to the value of 10 credit poInts or gaIn 10 additional credit poInts by passIng a subject or subjects selected from Groups C and/or D of the Hst of subjects.

(2) The subjects passed shall Include:

(a) not more than 40 credit poInts from subjects selected from Group A and/or Group B of the Hst of subjects;

(b) not more than 20 credit poInts from subjects selected from Group E of the Ust of subjects; and

(c) at least 40 credit points from subjects selected from Group C and/or Group D of the Hst of subjects.

TIme Requirement.

3. Exceptwlth the permission of the Faculty Board the course shall be completed In not less than one year of study.

SCHEDULE 3 - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS

AdmJuIon to Candidature

I. (I) An appHcant for admission to candidature shall:

(a) have completed at least two years' work experience deemed by the Head of the Department of Economics to be relevant, and:

(1) have satisfied the reqUirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor In the University; or

(tI) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree or equivalent qualification. approved for the purpose by the Faculty Board. In another tertiary Institution; or

(b) have completed at least ftveyears' work experience deemed by the Head of the Department of Economics to be relevant. and:


(1) have such qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Headof theDepartmentofEcononUcs;and

(tt) complete such work and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board may determine.

(2) Notwithstanding sub·clause (1). Faculty Board shall consider each application and If It Is of the opinion that the appHcanfs academic preparatton Is not sufficient to enable sattsfactorycompletion of the course. may:

(a) on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Economics. require the applicant to complete such prerequisite and/ orcorequlslte studies as It may prescribe; or

(b) reject the application.

QUaHfication for the Diploma

2. (1) To quality for the diploma a candidate shall:

(a) pass subjects totalling not less than 70 credit points selected from the Ust of Approved Subjects; and

(b) pass a Research Essay to the value of 10 credit poInts.


(a) not more than 40 credit points from subjects selected from Group A of the list of subjects;

(b) at least 20 credit points from subjects selected from Group B of the list of subjects; and

(c) not more than 20 credit points from subjects selected from Group D of the list of subjects.

TIme Requirement.

3. Exceptwlth the permission ofthe Faculty Board the course shall be completed In not less than one year of study.

SCHEDULE 4 - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MANAGEMENT

Interpretation

I. In this Schedule "Board" means the Board of Studies In Business Administration.

SectIon Six Rul.s Governing Postgredue .. CourM.

Adml"'.,.. to Candidature

2. (I) An appUcant for admission to candidature shall:

(a) have completed work experience deemed by the Board to be relevant. and:

(I) have satisfied the requirements for admIssion to a degree of Bachelor In the University; or

(U) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree or eqUivalent qualificatton. approved for the purpose by the Board. In another tertiary Institution; or

(tit) In exceptional circumstances have such other qualifications and experience as may be approved by the Board; and complete such work and pass such examinations as the Board may require.

(2) Notwithstanding sub-clause (I). the Board shall consider each appUcation and If It Is ofthe opinion that the applicant's academiC preparation Is not sufficient to enable satisfactory completion of the course. may:

(a) require the applicant to complete such prerequisite and/ orcorequlslte studies as It may prescribe; or

(b) reject the application.

QUaHfication for the Diploma

3. (1) To quality for the diploma a candidate shall pass subjects totaJUng not less than 60 credit points selected from the list of Approved Subjects.


(a) 70 credit points from Grou p A subjects; and

(b) 10 credit points from Group B subjects.

(3) (a) Where. asaconsequenceofRule5(2)(c) of the Rules Governing Academic awards. a candidate is precluded from enrolling In any Grou p A subject. that candidate shall select a replacement subject from those llsted In Group B and that subject shall be deemed to be Group A.

Faculty of economic. end CoI1'M'Mf'Ce

(h) Where a candidate Is required to select a replacement for a Group B subject either as a consequence of Rule 5(2)(c) of the Rules Governing Academic awards or sub-clause 3(a), that candidate shall select a subject from Group C and that subject shall be deemed to be Group B.

Time Requirements

4. Exceptwlth the permission of the Faculty Board the course shall be completed In not less than one year of study.

SCHEDULE 5 - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MARKETING

AdmiHIon to Csncllclature

I. (1) An appUcant for admission to candidature shall:

(a) have completed at least two years' work expertence deemed by the Head of the Department of Management to be relevant, and:

(1) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor In the University; or

(tt) have satisfied the reqUirements for admission to adegreeorequlvalent qualification, approved for the purpose by the Faculty Board, In another tertiary Institution; or

(h) have completed at least ftveyears' work expertence deemed by the Head of the Department of Management to be relevant. and:

(1) have such other qualifications and experience as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Headofthe Department of Management; and

(tt) completesuchworkandpasssuch examinations as the Faculty Board may require.

(2) Notwtthstanding sub-clause (1). Faculty Board shall consider each application and If It Is of the opinion that the appltcant"s academic preparation is not sufficient to enable satisfactotycompletion of the course. may:

SectIon Six Rule. Governing P.,.tareduete Cour ...

(a) on the recommendaUon of the Head of the Department of Management. require the appltcant to complete such prerequtstte and/orcorequlslte studies as It may prescrtbe; or

(h) reject the appltcaUon.

QI'aRftcation b tile Diploma

2. (1) To qualtlY for the diploma a candidate shall pass subjects totalltng not less than 80 credit points selected from the Itstof subjects approved by the Faculty Board for the purposes of the course.


(a) 40 credit points from Grou p A subjects; and

(h) 40 credit points from Group B subjects and Group C subjects with at least 10 credit points from Group B subjects.

(3) Where. as a consequence of Rule 5(2)(c) of the Rules Governing Academic awards. a candidate Is precluded from enrolltng In any Group A subject. that candidate shall select a replacement subject from those ltsted In Group B and that subject shall be deemed to be Group A.

Time Requirements

3. Except with the permlsslon of the Faculty Board the course shall be completed In not less than one year of study.

SCHEDULE 6 - GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN TAXATION STUDIES

AdmiHIon to Cuclldalure

I. (1) An appltcantfor admission to candidature shall:

(a) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor in the University; or

(b) have satisfied the requtrements for admission to a degree or equtvalent qualification. approved for the purpose by the Faculty Board. In anotherterUary tnstitution; or

(c) have such other qualifications and experience as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce.


(2) Notwtthstanding sub-clause (I). Faculty Board shall consider each applicat10n and If 11 Is of the opinion that the appltcant's academic preparat10n Is not sufficient to enable satisfactory completion of the course, may:

(a) on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Commerce, require the applicant to complete such prerequisite and/or corequisite studies as it may prescribe; or

(h) reject the appltcaUon.

QuaHflcation for the Diploma

2. (1) ToqualtlYforthediplomaacandidateshall pass subjects totalling not less than 80 credit points selected from the Itst of Approved Subjects.

(2) The subjects passed shall Include at least 80 credit points from Group B subjects.

Time Requirements

3. Except with the permission of the Faculty Board the course shall be completed tn not less than one year of study.

SectIon SI. Rule. Governing Postgraduate Cour ...

Faculty of Economic. end Commerce

SectIon Six Rul •• Governing Postgredu •• Cour ...

LIST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR TIlE GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN ECONOMIC STUDIES SUI?Iect Credit Semester PrerequlsIJe

PoInts Offered Group A

ECONllO Microeconomics I 10

ECONlll Macroeconomics I 10 2

ECON1l5 Introductory Quantitative Methods A 10 I

ECON1l6 Introductory Quantitative Methods B 10 2 ECONI15 Introductory Quantitative Methods A

ECONI02 Economic History A 10

ECONI03 Australian Economic History 10 2

GroupB

ECON250 Microeconomics II 10 I ECONllO Microeconomics I

ECON25I Macroeconomics II 10 2 ECONIII Macroeconomics I

ECON240 Introductory Econometrics 10 I ECONI16 Introductory Quantitative MethodsB or MATI-lI03Mathematics 103

ECON242 Applied Econometrics I 10 2 ECON240 Introductory Econometrics ECON243 Mathematical Economics A 10 ECONI16 Introductory Quantitative

Methods B or MATIlI03 Mathematics 103

ECON24I Econometrics I 10 2 ECON240 Introductory Econometrics

ECON202 European Economic Histmy 10 2 ECONI02 Economic History A or ECON 103 Australian Economic His-tory or ECON 110 Microeconomics I and ECON III Macroeconomics I

ECON203 Asian Economic History I 10 2 ECONI02 Economic History A or ECONI03 Australian Economic His-tory or ECON 110 Microeconomics I and ECON III Macroeconomics I

ECON216 Indusby Economics A 10 ECON 110 Microeconomics I and ECONlll Macroeconomics I

ECON217 Indusby Economics B 10 2 ECON216 Industry Economics A

ECON220 Industrial Relations llA 10 I Subjects totalling 40 credit points

ECON22I Industrial Relations lIB 10 2 ECON220 Industrial Relations llA

ECON225 Japanese Economy 10 2 ECON 110 Microeconomics I and ECONIII Macroeconomics I or ECON204 Asian Economic HiStory 11

ECON230 Introductory Labour Economics 10 I ECON 110 Microeconomics I and ECONIll Macroeconomics I

ECON21O Political Economics 10 ECON 110 Microeconomics and ECONIll Macroeconomics I

ECON211 Theory of Public Choice 10 2 ECON 110 Microeconomics and ECON 111 Macroeconomics I

ECON20B

ECON209

Group C

ECON340

ECON34 I

ECON204

ECON205

ECON313

ECON21B

ECON314

ECON317

ECON31B

ECON322

ECON30B

ECON323

ECON319

ECON306

ECON307

ECON342

ECON330

ECON33I

SUI?Iect

Faculty of Economic. end Cornrnerce

Comparative Economic Systems A

Comparative Models and cases

Econometrics II

Econometrics IJI Asian Economic History 11

Asian Economic History III )

Growth and Fluctuations

Problems of Developing Countrles

Topics In Economic Development

Economic Doctrines & Methods A

Economic Doctrines & Methods B

Monetary Theory

Macroeconomic Planning

Financial Institutions & Poliey

Economic Doctrines & Methods C

International Economics A

International Economics B

Applied Econometrics 11

The Economics of Employment and Unemployment

Contemporaty Issues In Labour Economics

Credit PoInts

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

_nSlx

Semester Offered

I

2

2

I

2

2

2

2

2

2

I

2

I

2

Rul .. Governing Postgredu •• Cour ...

PrerequIsite

ECONIIO Microeconomics and ECONIII Macroeconomics!

ECONII0 Microeconomics and ECONIII Macroeconomics I

ECON241 Econometrics I

ECON340 Econometrics 11

(ECON 102 Economic History A or ECONI03

(Australian Economic History or ECON 1 IO(Microeconomlcs I and ECONIII Macroeconomics I

ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics 11

ECON 110 Microeconomics I and ECONIII Macroeconomics!

ECON21B Problems of Developing Countries. ECON250 Mtcroeconomics 11 and ECON25I Macroeconomics 11

ECON250 Microeconomics 11 and ECON251 Macroeconomics 11








ECON340 Econometrics n or ECON242 Applied Econometrics I or ECON24! Econometrics I

ECON230 Introductory Labour Eco-nomics. ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON230 Introductory Labour Eco-nomics. ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON25 1 Macroeconomics II

ECON325

ECON326

ECON343

ECON315

ECON316

ECON360

ECON361

ECON520

GroupD

ECON513

ECON311

ECON514

ECON515

ECON31O

ECON309

ECON516

ECON312

ECON525

ECON526

ECON520

GroupE

Suli/ect

Faculty of economics and COmmarce

Industrial Relations IlIA

Industrial Relatlons I1IB

Mathematical Economics B

Publlc Finance

Australian Public Finance

Microeconomics III

Macroeconomics III

Research Essay

Economic Planning

Environmental Economics

Mtcroeconomic Analysts

Macroeconomic Analysis

Regional Economics

Urban Economics

Credit PoInts

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

Issues in Australian Economic History 10

Managerial Economics 10

Special Topic A 10

Special Topic B 10

Research Essay 10

Section Six

Semester Offered

1

2

2

2

2

IT

2

2

2

1,2

1,2

IT

Rule. Governing Postgraduate COurse.

Prerequisite

ECON221 Industrial Relations lIB

EECON221 Industrla1 Relations lIB

ECON243 Mathematical Economics A


ECON315 Public FInance

ECON250 MicroeconOmics II


ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251


ECON360 Microeconomics III and ECON361 Macroeconomics III








Any postgraduate subject offered by any department where such subject is deemed by the Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Economics, relevant to the candidate's program in the Diploma

Note: All subjects ltsted by the Faculty Board may not necessarily be offered in anyone year.

Faculty of economic. and COmmerce

_nSlx Rule. Governing Postgraduate COurse.

LIST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE GRADUATItDIPLOMAIN INDUSTRIALRitLATIONS

Subject Credit Semester Prerequisite PoInts Offered

Group A

MNG1OO2 Organisational Behaviour (MBA) 10 2

LAW501 Legal Studles (MBA) 10 2

ECON501 Macroeconomics and Polley 10 1

ECON502 Microeconomics and Business Decisions 10

ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA) 10

MNG1OO4 Human Resource Management 10 MNG1OO2 Organisational Behaviour (MBA)

GroupB

ECON325 Industrial Relatlons lIlA 10 ECON221 Industrial Relations lIB or ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA)

ECON326 Industrial Relations lIlB 10 2 ECON221 Industrial Relations lIB or ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA)

ECON505 Contemporary Issues In Industrial 10 2 ECON503 Employment Relations Relations (MBA)

ECON527 Special Topic in Industrial Relations 10 1.2 ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA)

ECON504 Workplace Industrial Relations 10 2 ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA)

ECON50B Wages & Employment 10 ECON502 Microeconomics & Business Decisions

Groupe

LAW502 Industrial Law 10 LA W50 I Legal Studies (MBA)

MNGT522 Managerial and Organisational 10 MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour Development (MBA)

MNGT520 Effective Interpersonal Management 10 MNG1OO2 Organisational Behaviour (MBA)

MNGT525 Organisational Design 10 1 MNG1OO2 Organisational Behaviour (MBA)

SOCA203 Work in Industrial Society 10 2

GroupD

Any postgraduate subject offered by any department where such subject Is deemed by the Faculty Board, on the recommendation of the Dean, relevant to the candidate's program In the Dtploma.

Other

ECON520 Research Essay 10 IT

Note: All subjects listed by the Faculty Board may not necessartly be offered in anyone year.


SectIon Six Rula. Governing Postgraduate Cour ...

LIST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN IlANAGEIlENT

SU1?Iect Credit Semester Prerequisite PoInts OIfered

Group A

MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour (MBA) 10 2 MNGT505 Marketing Concepts & Strategy 10 I INF0501 Computing & Information Systems 10 I COMM501 Financial Accounting 10' 2 ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA) 10 1 ECON502 Microeconomics and

Business Decisions 10 or

ECON501 Macroeconomics and Policy 10 I MNGT542 Management Issues 10 1.2 Completion of subjects from Group A

totaIl!ng 40 credit points. GroupB

COMM502 Business FInance 10 2 COMM501 Financial Accounting. COMM506 ManagementAccounting (Advisory)

LAW501 Legal Studies (MBA) 10 2 COMM506 Management Accounting 10 I COMM50 1 FInancial Accounting ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA) 10 ECON501 Macroeconomics & Policy - 10 or

ECON502 MicroeconomIcs & BUSiness Decisions -10

SfAT501 Quantitative Methods and 10 2 Data AnalysIs

GroupC

Any other postgraduate subject where such a subject is deemed by the Board of Studtes in Business Administration relevant to the candtdate's program in the Diploma

• Whichever not taken as a Group A subject.

Faculty of economic. and CoI'1"lr11el'Ce

Section Six Rul •• Governing Po.tgraduate Cour ...

LIST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE GRADUATE DIPLOMA IN MARKETING Subject Credit Semester Prerequisite

PoInts Offered

Group A

MNGT505 Marketing Concepts & Strategy 10 I

MNG1S26 Consumer Behaviour 10 2 MNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

MNG1S28 Marketing Research 10 2 MNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

MNG1S29 International Marketing 10 MNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

GrouPB

MNG1S27 Industrlal Marketing 10 MNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

MNG1S3Q Advertising Management 10 MNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

MNG1S3 1 Retail Management 10 MNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

GrouPC

INF0501 Computing & Infonnation Systems 10

MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour (MBA) 10 2

SfAT501 Quantitative Methods and Data 10 2 Analysis

COMM502 Business Finance 10 2 COMM506 Management Accounttng (Advisory)

COMM501 Financial Accounting 10 2

ECON503 Employment Relations 10 I

ECON501 Macroeconomics & Policy 10 1

COMM506 Management Accounting 10 I COMM50 I FInancial Accounting

ECON502 Microeconomics & Business Decisions 10 1

Up to 20 credtt points from other subjects approved by the Dean from the list of Approved Subjects for the Master of Business Administration.


Section Six Rule. Governing Postgreduate Cour ...

LIST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE GRADUATE DJPWMA IN TAXATION STUDIES

Subject Credit Semester PoInts Offered

Gl'OupA

ECON250 Microeconomics 1I

ECON251 Macroeconomics 1I

ECON216 Industry Economics A

ECON217 Industry Economics B


10

10

10

10

10

ECON323 FInancial Institutions and Polley 10

COMM20 1 Corporate Accounting and Reportlng 10

COMM202 Corporate Flnanclal Regulation 10

COMM203 Costlng PrinCiples and Method 10

COMM204 Planning. Control and Perfonnance Evaluation


COMM20B Corporate Flnanclal Management

COMM317 Taxation A

COMM307 Taxatlon B

COMM30 1 FInancial Accounting Theory Construction

COMM302 Reconstruction of Accounting

COMM303 Accounting and Decision Support Systems

COMM316 Behavioural. Organlsatlonal and Soclal Aspects of Accounting

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

10

1

2

1

2

1

2

2

1

2

2

2

2

2

Prerequisite

ECON 110 Microeconomics I

ECON 111 Macroeconomics I

ECON 11 0 Microeconomics I and ECON I 11 Macroeconomics I

ECON216 Industry Economics A

ECON250 Microeconomics II and ECON251Macroeconomics II


COMM 102 Financial Management Fundamentals

COMM 102 Financial Management Fundamentals COMM 102 FInancial Management Fundamentalsand either ECON1l6 Introductory Quantltatlve Methods B or INFO 10 1 Introduction to Infonnatlon Systems and STATIO 1 Introductory Statlstics

COMM203 Costing Princlples and Method

COMM 102 Financial Management Fundamentals, ECON I 10 Microeconomics I, ECON 111 MacroeconomIcs I and either ECON I 16 Introductory Quantltative Methods B or STATIO I Introductory Statistics and INFO 10 I Introduction to Infonnation Systems


COMM20 1 Corporate Accounting and Reporting

COMM317 Taxation A



COMM204 Planning. Control and Performance Evaluation

COMM204 Planning. Control and Performance Evaluation

Suldect


COMM305 Audltlng Theory and Method

COMM306 Contemporary Audltlng Technology and Issues

LA W204 Law of Business Organisations

LAVV102 Contract Law I

OR

SectIon Six

Credit Semester PoInts Offered

10

10 2

10

10 2

Rules Governing Po.tgraduate Cour ...

Prerequisite

COMM20 1 Corporate Accountlng and Reporllng

COMM305 Audltlng Theory and Method

LAVVI0lFoundatlonsofLaw

LAW101 Foundations of Law

Any other subject offered by any department where such a subject is deemed by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Dean. relevant to the candidate's program In the Diploma.

Gl'OupB

COMM503 Advanced Taxation 20

COMM507 Comparative International Taxation 10

ECON315 Publlc FInance 10

ECON316 Australian Publlc FInance 10

COMM505 Payroll Tax. Land Tax and Other States Taxes 10

COMM504 Commonwealth Taxes other than Income Tax 10

COMM50B Internatlonal Tax Planning 10

COMM509 Seminar in Taxation Issues 10

INF050 1 Computing and Infonnatlon Systems 10

COMM51O Research Project 10

FY

2

2

2

FY

COMM307 Taxatlon B

COMM307 Taxatlon B

ECON250 Microeconomics 1I and ECON251 Macroeconomics II

ECON315 Publlc FInance

COMM307 Taxatlon B

At least 10 credit points from 200-level

Atleast 10 credit points from 200-level

Foculty of Economl .. end eo."".,..

Rule. RelatJuc to the De ..... of .... ter of Bualne .. Admlnl-tratloD

IDt_tadoa

1. MBoud" means the Board ofStudtes in Business Administration

CIuaifICadOD of De .... e

2. ThedegreeofMasterofBuslnessAdmlnlstratlon shall be a degree by coursework offered In the Faculty of Economics and Commerce.

AdmlsaIOD to ConcliclatuJe

3. An applicant for admission to candidature to the degree shall:

(a) (I) have satlsfied the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of the University or other university or tertiary institution approved by the Board; or

(iI) have satlsfied the requirements for the award of the Diploma in Management of the University and passed the examinations in that Diploma at such standards as the Board may prescribe; or

(ttl) in exceptional circumstances produce evidence of possessing such other qualification and business or professional experience as may be approved by the Board; and

(b) complete such work and pass such examinations as the Board may determine; and

(c) have work experience deemed by the Board to be relevant.

4. Applications for admission to candidature shall be considered by the Board which may approve or reject anyappltcation.

QuaHflcadOD for the Degree

5. ToquaUfyforadmtsslon to the degree a candidate shall have satisfied any condittons imposed on admission to candidature under Clause 3(b) and shall complete to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board a program approved by the Faculty Board consisting of 160 credit points from subjects In the List of Subjects approved by the Faculty Board as are avatlable from time to time in accordance with the follOwing conditions:

_nSlx Rul •• Governing Postgraduate Cour ...

(aJ A candidate .hall Include all subJects from Group A totalling 130 credit points.

(h) A candidate shall Include at least 30 crecUt points from Group B.

(c) A candidate shall not enrol in a Group B subject until that candidate has passed at least 80 credit points from the compulsory GroupA8ubJectsexceptwith the permission of the Dean.

6. A candidate will be reqUired to enrol in a substitute subject or subjects where that candidate has successfully completed studies which are deemed by the Faculty Board. on the recommendation of the Board, to be the eqUivalent of any compulsory subject or subjects.

DetermlDadoa of Reoulte

7. (I) To complete a subject a candidate shall attend such lectures, tutorials, seminars and submit such written work as may be prescribed by the Department offering the subject.

(2J To pass a subJectacandidate shall complete it to the satisfaction of the Faculty Board and pass such examinations as the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Board shall require.

Credit

8. A candidate may be granted credit on such conditions as the Faculty Board may detennine on the recommendation of the Board.

Prerequleltee

9. A candidate may not enrol in a subject unless that candidate has satisfied any prerequisites and has already passed or concurrently enrols In or Is already enrolled In any subject prescribed as tts co-requisite, except with the pennission of the Dean.

GnuIlng of DeCree

10. The degree shall be conferred as an Ordinary Degree except that in cases where a candidate's perfonnance In the course has reached a standard determined by the Faculty Board, the degree may be conferred with merit.

Progre ..

I!. (I) If the Faculty Board is of the opinion that the candidate is not making satisfactory


progress towards the degree then it may tenninate the candidature or place such condittons on its continuation as it deems fit.

(2) For the purpose of assessing a candidate's progress, the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Board may prescribe a cumulative average mark which Is to be achieved and maintained by the candidate.

(3) A candidate against whom a decision of the Faculty Board has been made under subClause (I) may request that the Faculty Board cause the case to be reviewed. Such request shall be made to the Dean within seven days from the date of posting to the candidate the advice of the Faculty Board's decision or such further period as the Dean may accept.

(4) A candidate may appeal to the VlceChancellor against any decision made following the review und~r sub·Clause (3J of this Schedule.

TIme Requirement.

12. Except where a candidate has been granted credit under Clause 8, the program shall be completed In not less than two years and. except with the permission of the Faculty Board, not more than threeyears offull-ttme enrolment or six years of part-time enrohnent.

SocIIon Six Rul •• Governing Postgraduate Course.


SecIIon Six Rules GOMrning Po.tgradua .. Cour ...

LIST OF SUBJECTS APPROVED FOR THE IlASTBR OF BU8DIB88 ADIIINISTRATION Subject Credit Sem. Department Prerequisite

Points OjJered

Group A

COMM502 BuSiness Finance 10 2 Commerce COMM50 1 FInancial Accounting, COMM506 Management Accounting (advisory)

COMM50 1 Ftnanclal Accounting 10 2 Commerce COMM506 Management Accounting 10 1 Commerce COMM50 1 FInancial

Accounting ECON501 Macroeconomics and Policy 10 Economics ECON502 Microeconomics and BUsiness 10 1 Economics

DeciSions

ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA) 10 Economics

LAW501 Legal Studies (MBA) 10 2 Law

MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour (MBA) 10 2 Management INF0501 Computing and Information 10 Management

Systems

MNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy 10 1 Management

STAT501 Quantitative Methods and 10 2 Statistics Data AnalYSiS

MNGT506 Business PoHcy 10 1,2 Management Completion of subjects totalling 120 credit points Including MNGT542 Management Issues

MNGT542 Management Issues 10 1,2 Management Completion of 40 credit points from Group A subjects

GroupB

MNGT504 Human Resource Management 10 Management MNGT502 Organisation Behaviour (MBA)

MNGT509 Management Science A 10 Management STAT50 1 Quantitative Methods and Data AnalysIs

MNGT510 Management Science B 10 Management MNGT509 Management Science A

INF0505 Management Information Systems 10 2 Management MNGT503 Computing and Information Systems

INF0503 Systems AnalYSiS 10 1 Management MNGT503 Computing and Information Systems

INF0504 Systems Design 10 2 Management MNGT512 Systems AnalysIs

MNGT514 Simulation Methods 10 Management STAT50 1 Quantitative Methods and Data Analysis

I

Subject

MNGT515

MNGT516

MNGT517

Foeulty of Economics and Commerce

Credit Points

New Enterprise Development 10

Entrepreneurial Management 10

Small BuSiness Management 10

MNGT518 Venture capital 10

MNGT520 Effective Interpersonal Management 10

MNGT522 Management and Organisational 10 Development

MNGT525 Organisational Design 10

MNGT526 Consumer Behaviour 10

MNGT527 Industrial Marketing 10

MNGT528 Marketing Research 10

MNGT529 International Marketing 10

MNGT530 Advertising Management 10

MNGT531 Retail Management 10

MNGT532 Operations Management A 10

MNGT533 Operations Management B 10

MNGT534 Topics In Computing and Quantitative 10

MNGT535 Topics in Entrepreneurship 10 and Small Business Management

MNGT536 Topics in Human Resource 10 Management

MNGT537 Topics tn Marketing Management \0

MNGT538 Research Methodology 10

SectIon Six

Sem. Department Offered

Management

Management

2 Management

2 Management

Management

Management

Management

2 Management

Management

2 Management

Management

1 Management

Management

Management

Management

Management

2 Management

Management

Management

Management

Rul .. Governing Postgraduate Cour ...

Prerequisite

MNGT515 New Enterprise Development or MNGT516 Entrepreneurial Management

MNGT515 New Enterprise Development or MNGT516 Entrepreneurial Management

MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour (MBA)



MNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy






MNGT532 Operations Management A

STAT50 1 Quantitative Methods Methods and Data AnalYSiS

MNGT515 New Enterprise Development or MNGT517 Small Business Management

MNGT504 Human Resource Management or MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour (MBA)


Subject

ECON509

ECON504

ECON505


Credit Points

Statistics (MBA) 10

Workplace Industrial Relations 10

Contemporary Issues in Industrial 10

Relations

ECON507 Managertal Economics (MBA) 10

ECON506 Economics of Industrtal Organisations

ECON508 Wages and Employment

LAW502 Industrial Law (MBA)

LAW503 Trade Practices and Pricing Law

STAT304 Time Series Analysts

STAT406 Methods for Quality Improvement

MNGT539 Research Project

OR

10

10

10

10

10

10

MNGT540 Research Project 20

Any postgraduate subject max. offered by any Department 20

Note: Not all subjects will be offered each year.

s.cUon Six

Sem. Department Offered

I Economics

2 Economics

2 Economics

2 Economics

10

Economics

Law

Law

Statistics

2 Statistics

Rul.S Governing Postgraduate Cour ...

Prerequisite

STAT50 I Quantitative Methods and Data AnalYSiS

ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA)

ECON503 Employment Relations (MBA)

ECON502 Microeconomics and Business Decisions and ECON50 1 Macroeconomics and Policy

Economics ECON502 Microeconomics and Business Decisions and ECON50 1 Macroeconomics and Policy

ECON502 Microeconomics and Business Decisions and ECON50 1 Macroeconomics and Policy

LAW501 Legal Studies (MBA)

LAW501 Legal Studies (MBA)

STAT50 I Quantitative Methods and Data AnalYSiS

STAT50 I Quantitative Methods and Data AnalYSis

1.2 Management As determined by the Board

F /Y Management As determined by the Board

As deemed relevant. by the Faculty Board. to the candidate's programme


R1lIB8 GOVERNING MASTERS DEGREES

PART I - GENERAL

1. (I) These Rules prescrtbe the conditions and requirements relating to the degrees of Master of Applied Ethics. Master of Architecture. Master of Arts. Master of Building. Master of Commerce. Master of Economics. Master of Computer Science. Master of Computing. Master of Early Childhood Education. MasterofEducation. Master of Educational Studies. Master of Engtneering. MasterofEngtneering Science. Master of Environmental Studies. Master of Industrial Education, Master of Law. Master of Laws. Master of Letters, Master of Mathematics. Master of Psychology (Clinical). Master of Psychology (Educational), Master ofSctence. Master of Medical Science. Master of Medical Statistics. Master of Music. Master of Scientific Studies. Master of Special Education, MasterofSuIVeytngandMaster of Theatre Arts.

(2) In these Rules and the Schedules thereto. unless the context or subject matter otherwise Indicates or requires:

"Faculty Board" means the Faculty Board of the Faculty responsible for the course In which a person is enrolled or is proposing to enrol;

"program" means the program of research and study prescrtbed In the Schedule;

"Schedule" means the Schedule of these Rules. pertaining to the course In which a person is enrolled or is proposing to enrol; and

"theas" means any thesis or dissertation submitted by a candidate.

(3) These Rules shall not apply to· degrees conferred honoris causa.

(4) A degree of Master shall be conferred in one grade only.

2. An appltcation for admission to candidature for a -degree of Master shall be made on the prescrtbed form and lodged with the Secretary to the University by the prescrtbed date.

3. (I) To be eliglhle for admission to candidature an applicant shall:

_nSlx Rules Governing Postgraduate Courses

(a) (I) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degree of Bachelor in the University of Newcastle as specified In the Schedule; or

(tt) have satisfied the requirements for admission to a degreeorequivalent qualification. approved for the purpose by the Faculty Board. In another tertiary institution; or

(lti) have such other qualifications and experience as may be approved by the Academic Senate on the recommendation of the Faculty Board or otherwise as may be specified In the Schedule; and

(b) have satisfied such other requirements as may be specified In the Schedule.

(2) Unless otherwise specified In the Schedule. applications for admission to candidature shall be considered by the Faculty Board whlchmayapproveorrejectanyappltcatlon.

(3) candidature unless adequate supervision and factlities are available. Whether these are available shall be detennlned by the Faculty Board unless the Schedule otherwise provides.

4. To qualify for admission to a degree of Master a candidate shall enrol and sattsfy the requirements of these Rules including the Schedule.

5. . The program shall be carned ou t:

(a) under the guidance of a supervisor or supervisors either appointed by the Faculty Board or as otherwise prescribed In the Schedule: or

(b) as the Faculty Board may otherwise determine.

6. Upon request by a candidate the Faculty Board may grant leave of absence from the course. Such leave shall not be taken into account In calculating the pertodfortheprogramprescrtbed In the Schedule.

7. (I) A candidate may withdraw from a subject orcourseonlybylnformlngtheSecretaryto the University In writing and such withdrawal shall take effectfrom the date of receipt of such notification.

(2)

8. (1)

(2)

(3)

(4)


Acandidatewhowtthdraws from any subject after the relevant date shall be deemed to have latled In that subject unless granted permission by the Dean towfthdrawwfthout penalty. The relevant date shall be:

(a) in the case of a subject offered only in the first semester. the Monday of the 9th week of first semester;

(h) in the case of a subject offered only in the second semester, the Monday of the 9th week of second semester;

(c) in the case of any other subject. the Monday of the 3rd week of second semester.

If the Faculty Board Is of the opinion that the candidate is not making satisfactory progress towards the degree then it may terminate the candidature or place such condttlons on its continuation as It deems fit.

For the purpose of assessing a candidate's progress. the Faculty Board may require candidates to submit a report or reports on their progress.

A candidate against whom a decision of the Faculty Board has been made under Rule 8(1) of these Rules may request that the Faculty Board cause the case to be reviewed. Such request shall be made to the Dean of the Facultywithln seven days from the date of posung to the candidate the advice of the Faculty Board's decision or such further period as the Dean may accept.

A candidate may appeal to the Vlce-Chancellor against any decision made followfng the review under Rule 8(3) of these Rules.

9. In exceptional circumstances arising In a particular case, the Academic Senate, on the recommendation of the Faculty Board, may relax any provision of these Rules.

PART n -EXAMINATION AND RESULTS

10. The Examination Rules approved from time to time by the Councn shall apply to all examinations with respect to a degree of Master wtth the exception of the examination of a thesis which shall be conducted In accordance wtth the provisions of Rules 12 to 16 inclusive of these Rules.

SectIon SI. Aul •• Governing Postgraduate Courses

I I. The Faculty Board shall consider the results In subjects. the reports of examfners and any other recommendatlons prescribed In the Schedule and shall decide:

(a) to recommend to the Counctl that the candidate be admitted to the degree; or

(h) Inacasewherea thestshas beensubmttled. to permit the candidate to resubmit an amended thesis wtthln twelve months of the date on which the candidate Is advised of the result of the first examination or wfthln such longer period of Ume as the Faculty Board may prescribe; or

(c) to require the candidate to undertake such further oral, written or practical examinations as the Faculty Board may prescribe; or

(dl not to recommend that the candidate be admitted to the degree, In which case the candidature shall be terminated.

PART m - PROVISIONS RELATING TO THESES

12. (1) The subject of a thesis shall be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department In which the candidate is canylng ou t the research for the thesis.

(2) The thesis shall not contain as Its main content any work or material which has previously been submitted by the candidate for a degree in any tertiary Institution unless the Faculty Board otherwise permits.

13. The candidate shall give to the Secretary to the University three months' written notice of intention to submit a thesis and such notice shall be accompanied by any prescribed fee.

14. (1) The candidate shall comply with the following prOVisions concerning the presentation of a thesis:

(a) the thesis shall contain an abstract of approximately 200 words describing Its content~

(h) the thesis shall be typed and bound In a manner prescribed by the University;

(c) three caples of the thesis shall be submitted together wfth:

(I) a cerlfficate signed by the candidate that the main content of the thesis

FllCulty of EconomlCl end Commarca

has not been submitted by the candidate for a degree of any other tertlary institution; and

(U) a cerUncate signed by the supervisor Indicating whether the candidate has completed the program and whether the thesis Is of sufftcient academic merit to warrant examination; and

(UI) If the candidate so desires. any documents or published work of the candidate whether bearing on the subject of the thesis or not.

(2) The Faculty Board shall determine the course of action to be taken should the certificate of the supervisor indicate that In the opinion of the supervisor the thesis Is not of sufficient academic merit to warrant examination.

15. The University shall be enUtled to retain the submitted copies of the thesis, accompanying documents and published work. The University shall be free to allow the thesis to be consulted or borrowed and, subject to the provisions of the Copyrfght Act. 1968 (Com). may Issue It In whole or any part In photocopy or microfilm or other copying medium.

16. (1) For each candidate two examiners, at least one of whom shall be an external examiner (being a person who Is not a member of the staff of the University). shall be appointed either by the Faculty Board or otherwise as prescribed In the Schedule.

(2) If the examiners' reports are such that the Faculty Board Is unable to make any decision pursuant to Rule 11 of these Rules, a third examiner shall be appointed either by the Faculty Board or otherwise as prescribed In the Schedule.

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF COMMERCE

CluaIfication

1. The degree of Master of Commerce shall be a degree by research offered In the Faculty of Economics and Commerce.

Admioslon to Candidature

2. To be eligible for admission to candidature an applicant shall:

SectIon SI. Rul •• Governing Po.tgreduate Cour ...

(a) have satisfied the reqUirements for admlaslon to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce with Honours or Bachelor of Economicswfth Honoursofthe University; or

(h) have satisfied the requirements for the admlaalon to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce or Bachelor of Economics of the Untverslty or to a degree approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board and complete such work and pass such examinations at such a level as the Faculty Board may detennine; or

(c) tn exceptional cases produce evidence of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department In which the applicant proposes to undertake the program and complete such work and pass such examinations at such a level as the Faculty Board may determine.

gu.JIfIcation for the Degree

3. To qualify for admission to the degree, a candi~te shall complete to the satisfaction of the Committee a program approved by the Committee consisting of the submission of a thesis embodying the results of the candldate's research.

TIme Requirement.

4. The program shall be completed In not Jess than two years for full-Ume candidates or three years for part-time candidates from the date of admission to candidature, save that In the case of a candidate who has obtained the degree of Bachelor wtth Honours or who has had relevant research experience, this period maybe reduced by up to one year for full-time candidates or by up to fifteen months for parttime candidates.

Ep,mtner8

5. The examination of a thesis shall be carried out by examiners appointed by the Committee.

Foeully 01 Economics and Commerce

SCHEDULE - MASTER OF ECONOIIICS

CJu.iflcaUOIl

I. The degree of Master of Economics shall be a degree by research offered In the Faculty of EconOmics and Commerce.

AdmiuIOIl to C_dldatuJe

2. To be eligible for admission to candidature an appUcant shall:

(a) have sattsned the requirements for admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce with Honours or Bachelor of Economics with Honours of the University; or

(b) have satisfied the requirements for the admission to the degree of Bachelor of Commerce or Bachelor of Economics of the University or to a degree approved for this purpose by the Faculty Board and complete such work and pass such examinations at such a level as the Faculty Board may determine; or

(el in exceptional cases produce evidence ·of possessing such other qualifications as may be approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Head of the Department In which the applicant proposes to undertake the program and complete such work and pass such examinations at such a level as the Faculty Board may detennine.

QualiflcaUOIl for the Degree

3. To qualify for admission to the degree, a candidate shall complete to the satisfaction of the Committee a program approved by the Committee consisting of the submission of a thesis embodying the results ofthe candldate's research.

TIme Requirements

4. The program shall be completed tn not less than two years for full-time candidates or three years for part-time candidates from the date of admission to candidature, save that tn the case of a candidate who has obtained the degree of Bachelorwith Honours or who has had relevant research experience, this perlod may be reduced by up to one year for full-time candidates or by up to fifteen months for part-time candidates.

SectIon Six ftul" Governing POltgradU." Course.

5. The examination of a thesis shall be carried out by examiners appointed by the Committee.

Fecutty of economic. end CoI1'tlnefC8

Faculty PoMele. rclattna to Po.tv_uate Counea ADIII88ION

1. Gnduate Diploma eoune. AppUcants seeking admission to Graduate Diploma programs must have satisfled the requirements for a degree and have relevant work experlence, except as specified In the relevant Schedule.

All applicants for the Graduate Diploma In Management would nonnally be expected to have at least five years' relevant work experlence and are reqUired to submit a written description ofthe1rworkexpet1ence and supply names of at least two referees who can attest to that experience. Applicants with more than two but less than five years work experience must also sit the Graduate Management Admission Test and achieve a satisfactory score.

Those seeking admission to the Graduate Diploma in Management under sub-rule 1 (I)(b)(m) of Schedule 4. or the Graduate Diploma In Marketing or the Graduate Diploma In Industrial Relations under sub rule 1(b) of the relevant Schedule are expected to have completed a qualification. for example a Certlftcate or Associate Diploma program at a CAE or TAFE College. In addltion. appUcants must sit the Graduate Management Admission Test and achieve a satisfactory score. The Test may be taken at this University In October for which applications close in August.

Applicants for admission to the Graduate Diploma in Management program would also be expected to have at least ten (10) years relevant work experience.

2. Muter of _Ine .. Administration Degree

All applicants for registration would normally be expected to have at least five years relevant work experlence and are reqUired to submit a written description of their work experlence and su pply names of at least two referees who can attest to that experience. Applicants with more than two but less than five years work experience must also sit the Graduate Management Admission Test and achieve a satisfactory score.

SectIon Six

AppUcants not being graduates of a tertiary institution. who have satisfled the requtrements for the award of the Graduate Diploma In Management and have achieved a flnal grade point average of 1.8 In all subjects attempted. wU\ be eI!gIble for admission to candldature provided they have satisfled the crlterta for adm!ssion.

3. Degree of M .. ter of Commerce

(I) In the normal case. a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the BachelorofCommerce (Honours) degree In the UniversIty of Newcastle shall be permitted to proceed with the program of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work.

(2) In the nonnal case, a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the BachelorofCommerce (Ordinary) degree In the University of Newcastle shall be required to satlsfactorlly complete not more than one additional full-ttmeyear's work or Its eqUivalent.

(3) In the case of a student whose program extends over more than two semesters, penntsston to proceed with the research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the program speclfled by the Faculty Board.

(4) Candldates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be reqUired to complete satisfactorily a program eqUivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates, with the proviso that such a candidate may be reqUired to complete additional work tn order to undertake a particular research program and thesis. An honours graduate from another university will nonnally be permItted to proceed with a program of research and thests without having to undertake additional work unless It Is essential to the particular program.

4. Degree of M .. ter of BeOllomics

(1) In the nonnal case, a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for admission to the BachelorofEconomtcs (Honours) degree or the Bachelor of Commerce (Honours -Economics or Industrial Relations) In the

Faculty of Economic. ond Commerce

University of Newcastle shall be pennltted to proceed with the program of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work.

(2) In the nonna1 case. a candidate who has satisfied the requirements for Admission to the BachelorofEconomics (0rdInmy) degree or to the Bachelor of Commerce (Ordinary) degree with a major study in Economics or Industrial Relations shall be required satlsfactOIily to complete not more than one additional full-time year's work or tts equivalent.

(3) In the case of a student whose program extends over more than two semesters. permission to proceed with the research and thesis shall be determined on completion of the first year of the program specified by the Faculty Board.

(4) Candidates who have graduated with a pass or ordinary degree from another university shall be reqUired to complete satisfactorlly a program equivalent to that prescribed for Newcastle graduates. with the proviso that such a candidate may be reqUired to complete additional work tn order to undertake a particular research program and thesis. An honours graduate from another university will nonnally be pennltted to proceed with a program of research and thesis without having to undertake additional work unless It is essential to the particular program.

ENROLMENT

EDrolmentln a oubj""t after the third _k of the oemeoter In which It Is ollered wiD NOT be approved.

A candidate enrolled In a postgraduate coursework program will not be pennltted to enrol In subjects totalling more than 40cred1t points In any semester.

EQUIVALENT SUBJECTS

A candidate shall not enrol In any subject which Is substantially the same as part or all of a subject which the candidate has passed in any prevtous degree or diploma course. Normally. subjects are deemed eqUivalent If completed within the last five years unless a candidate's work experience dictates otheIWtse. Candidates will be advised on admission

_nSlx Foc:ulty PoUcIH RoIoHng to Postgraduete Cour ...

to thecourselftheyarerequtred to select replacement subject{s).

Candidates required to select replacement subjects for more than six of the Group A subjects In the Master of Business AdmInIstration degree shall not be el/glb\e for admission to that degree program.

Candidates required to select replacement subjects for more than three of the Group A subjects in the Graduate Diploma In Management shall not be eligible for admission to that program.

PREREQUIlIITBS

All requests for walvtng prerequisites shall be submitted to the Dean in writing. Before reaching a decision. the Dean would nonnally consult with the relevant Head of Department and must be satisfied that the candidate has passed equlvalentaltemative studies.

1. CREDIT

Graduate DJpI .......

I. Credit In a subject will require the approval of the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the relevant Head of the Department.

2. A candidate will not be eligible for credit In any subject for which credit has been given for the award of another degree or diploma.

3. Where a candidate has passed subjects totalling not fewer than 20 credit points In the Diploma course. he or she may be granted credit by the Faculty Board In respect of another subject subsequently passed at another university or approved tertiary Institution under the follOwing conditions: -

(a) the subject for which credltls granted shall have a reasonable correspondence with a subject Included In the list of Approved Subjects for the Diploma program In which the student Is enrolled; and

(b) credit will not be granted for subjects totalUng more than 20 credit points.

4. A candidate who has been enrolled as a candidate for the Master of Business Administration Degree at the University of Newcastle. but has not taken out that degree may. on admission to the Graduate Diploma in Managementor Graduate Diploma in Marketing program, be granted credit In that Diploma

FlICuJty of Economic. and Commerce

course In subjects passed as part of the requirements for that degree.

Muter of BwdDe. Mmlnl_tration DelJ'ee

A candidate may be granted credit In recognition of work done or subjects passed In this or such other university or approved tertiary institution as approved by the Faculty Board on the recommendation of the Board of Studies In Business Administration, subject to the follOwing conditIons:

(a) the subject for which credit Is sought should be substantially the same as a subject Included In the list of subjects approved for the Master of Business Administration degree course;

(b) notwithstanding (a) above. credit may be granted In up to 20 credit points In recognttton of work done In subjects which are not substantially the same as those included In the Master of Business Administration degree program, at this University;

(c) credit shall not be granted in recognition of any subject for which credit has been given In another degree or diploma when such degree or diploma has been or Is to be conferred or awarded;

(d) notwithstanding (c) above. a person who has completed all requirements for the award of the Graduate Diploma In Management may elect not to haveitawardedln which eventlt shall not be a diploma which "Is to be awarded" within the meaning of (c) above;

(e) the Degree shall not be conferred on a candidate unless that candidate, whilst registered as a candidate for the degree and by virtue of the examinations set by the Faculty, passed subjects totalling at least half of the total number of credit points required for admission to the degree;

(0 Notwithstanding (e) above. a candidate may count towards the Master of Business Administration degree program all relevant subjects passed whilst enrolled as a candidate forthe Graduate Diploma in Managementcourse provtded such credit satisfies criteria set down for qualification for the degree.

PROGRESS

1. Graduate DJploma Programa

(a) Ifln anyyearfollowlng the completion of 40 credit points a candidate's academic record

section Six Foc:ulty PoUcIH RoIoHng to Po.tgradua .. Cour ...

since admission to the course Is such that the credit point value of subjects failed exceeds the credit point value of subjects passed. that candidate will be asked to show cause as to why the candidate should not be excluded from the Faculty.

(b) If a candidate fa\Is a subject for the second time that candidate will be asked to show cause why a condition should not be tmposedon re-enrolment that the candidate not be pennitted to re-enrolln that subject.

(c) If a candidate falls a subject for the third time that candidate will be asked to show cause why the candidate should not be excluded from the Faculty.

(d) For candidates enrolled In the Graduate Diploma In Management program, the following procedures shall be adopted following the approval of results for the second semester:

The Dean shall present to the Board of Studies In Business Administration a schedule of candidates who have failed a subject on more than one occasion. The Board of Studies shall consider the record of each candidate and may recommend to the Faculty Board that the candidate be excluded from thecourseornotbepennltted to re-enrolln any subject.

2. Muter of BwdDe. Mmlnt·tratJon

1. If a candidate faUs a subject on more than one occasion It shall be deemed to be prima facie evidence of unsatisfactory progress and may result In the Board ofStudtes recommending to the Faculty Board that he or she be excluded from the course or not pennltted to re-enrol In the subject.

2. A candidate who, after recelvtng grades In subjects totalling 40 credit points, does not achieve and maintain a cumulative average grade of 1.5 In all subjects attempted shall be advised that If after the next semester In which that candidate is enrolled he or she has not raised the cumulative average grade to 1.5 It shall be deemed to be prima facie evidence of unsatisfactory progress and may result In the Board of Studies recommending to the Faculty Board that he or she be excluded from further enrolment in the course.

Foculty of economics end Commerce

3. Where a candidate for the Master of Bustness Administration degree has completed a subject or subjects tncluded In the schedule of subjects approved for the Master of Business Administration degree whUst enrolled as a nondegree student or a candidate for a Graduate Diploma course offered tn the Faculty (and has not been awarded that Diploma), the grades achieved. Including failures. shall be Included in the calculation of the candidate's Grade Point Average.

4. The followtng procedures shall be adopted follOwing the approval of results for the second semester:

(a) The Dean shall present to the Board of Studies In Business Administration a schedule of candidates for the degree together with cumulative average grades and details of candidates who have failed a subject on more than one occasion.

(b) The Board of Studies shall constder the cumulative grades and may recommend to the Faculty Board that a candidate who has not achieved the prescrfhed cumulative average grades be excluded from that course.

(c) The Board of Studies shall consider the record of a candidate who has failed a subject on more than one occasion and may recommend to the Faculty Board that the candidate be excluded from the course or not pennitted to re-enrollo the subject.

(d) Each candidate recommended for exclusion shall be Invited to show cause within the time specified by the Faculty Board why the candidate should not be excluded from the course.

(e) The Appeals and Progress Committee of the Faculty Board shall consider each appeal and detennlne the action to be taken and may in special circumstances consider a submission received outside the time specified by the Faculty Board.

(0 Acandldate may appeal against any decision made under (e) above to the Vice-Chancellor who shall detennlne matter.

SectIon Six Pootgradu." Subject Ducrtptlono

GRADING OF IIBA DEGREE

0rdIDuy IJetIree The ftnal grade potntaverage to qualllY forthe degree of Master of Bustness Administration shall not be less than 1.5.

For the purpoees of calculating the grade point average. the f01Jowtng scale .hall be used:

Fall = 1

Credit

Distinction =

High Distinction =

2

3

4

Ungraded Passes shall not be Included In the calculation of the final grade point average.

All results awarded including failures and subsequent resulis In the same subject. will be taken into account.

Degree with lIerlt

Where a candidate has achieved a final grade point average of at least 3.0, the degree may be conferred with Merit.

utAVE OF AllllENCE

Leave of absence will not nonnally be granted for more than one year.

Postcraduate Subject DellCrlptlona

Note: AddJtional subject descriptions are avatlable from the relevant Department.

COIlll502 BUSINESS FINANCE IOcp

Prerequisfle Financial Accounting, Management Accounting (Advisory)

Content

The object of tWs course is to provide an overview of the theory and practice of corporate finance. It is clearly desirable that senior managers be aware of current theories and techruques offinanclal analysIs.

The course is not Intensely mathematical but does assume a basic understandJng of quantltattve methods. Itwtll be more concerned with applications to business decisions rather than mathematical andalgebratc abstractions. Students should ensure they understand the mathematical symbols employed In various formulae, plus the way each relates logically to each other. Previous exposure to statistics. economics and financial accounting is advisable.

Faculty of economic. end CoI'11l1Ml'Ce

The course framework Includes: consumption and Investment decisions; financial mathematics; valuation and the capital market; investment evaluation; the concept and pricing of risk; Investment decisions under rlsk; the required rate of return and Its estimation; dividend pollcy; working capital requirements.

Text To be advised

INJP0501 COIlPUTlNG AND INFORMATION SYSTEMS lOOp

Prerequisite Nil

Content

This course Is deSigned to provide students with an overview of infonnaUon systems In todays business environment. The course will Introduce personal support software available on microcomputers and their appltcatlons to management decision making.

During compulsory workshop sessions students will gain "hands on" experience using software packages such as electronic spreadsheets, database management systems. and word processing.

Text To be advised

ECON503 EIIPLOYMENT RELATIONS (MBA) lOOp

Lecturer D.K. MacDonald

Prerequisite Nil

Hours 1\\'0 hours per week

Exwnination One 2 hour paper plus progresSive assessment.

Content

This course has been destgned to introduce students to the major features of employment relations in Australia. Employment relations cover all aspects of the interaction of people In the workplace with external institutions impingtng to a very significant extent on this Interaction. An appraisal of the degree to which the employment relationship Is governed by common or conflicting Interests prOvides a theoretical perspective to the course.

Text

Gardner. M. & Palmer. G. 1992. Employment Relations, Macmillan.

COIIM501 FINANCIAL ACCOUNTING IOcp

PrereqUisite Nil

SoctIon Six

Content

Pootgradu ... Subject Ducrtptlono

ThIs Is an tntroducwry course which alms to create awarenessoftheneedforasystematlcflowofllnanclal tnformation tn bustness decision making. The course will tntroduce non-accountants to the contribution which knowledgeable use of accounttng and Ilnanclal tnformation can make towsrds the achievement of bustness goala.

Students will be given a general Introduction to the uses and limitations of the principal financial statements (Balance Sheet, ProfitandLossStatement, Profit and Loss Appropriation Statement, Funds F10w Statements) and to the accounting conventions, assumptions and procedures involved in the construction of such statements.

Text To be advised

ECONSOI IlACROECONOIIICS AND POUCY

Prerequisite Nil

Content

IOcp

The course aims at a critical examination of the relationships among the major macroeconomic variables tn an open, market-based system. on the one hand, and at their behaviour under the Impact of external shocks.

Signiftcant paradigms of the macroeconomy. I.e. ClaSSical-Neoclassical, Keynesian and the New Classical Economlcsareconsldered, with an emphasis on their respective policy implications.

Australian circumstances. institutions and data are paramount

Text To be advised

COIlll506 MANAGEMENT ACCOUNTING lOOp

Prerequisite Financial Accounting

Content

This course will Introduce students to the role and significance which accounting plays tn managerial planning and control. Topics Include: cost volume profit relationships; product costing; relevant costs and special decisions; budgeting; cost behaviour patterns; responslblltty accounting; transfer pricing and Activity Based Costing.

Text To be advised


IINGTIIOII IlARKETlNG CONCEPTS AND 8TRA11!GY lOcp

Prerequisite Nil

Content

Astrateglcmarketmanagementframeworkfsadopted. Key Issues such as market segmentation, consumer behaviour, competitor analysis, prictng strategy, channels of distrlbution and product promotion are reviewed. Attention Is focused on both domestic and international case studies. Opportunity to construct a markettng plan for a product/ service of personal tnterest Is provided.

Text To be advised

ECON&02 MICROECONOMICS AND BUS1NE8S DECISIONS lOep

Prerequisite NO

Content

This course is designed to explain the mlcroeconomic basis of rational business behaviour, and to prOvide the foundations for effective business decisions. Since the business enterprise deals ulttmatelywlth the consumer, the theory of consumer demand forms the starting point of the course. This Is followed by an analysIs of the business finn's production function and cost relationships. Thus a basis Is provided for an examination of the firm's optimal pursuit of Its desired ohjectlves In the context of various types of market environment.

Text To be advised

MNGT602 ORGANISATIONAL BEHAVIOUR (MBA) lOep

Prerequisite Nil

Content

As a field of study organisational behaviour uses the scientific method, is interdisciplinary, studies Individuals, groups, organisations and the environment. This course Is based on the theories, models and concepts from the behavioral sciences, Is contingency oriented and emphasises application. In studying the impacts of behavioral sciences on business organisations these perspectives will be emphastsed.

Topics include: motivation, decision making. leadership, job deSign, group dynamics. communication. learning and organisational development.

SectIon Six Postgraduate Subject Deoc,lptlons

Text To be advtsed

STATIIOI QUANTITATIVE METHODS AND DATA ANALYSIS

Prerequisite NO

Content

lOep

Knowledge of quantitative techniques, analysIs and presentation of data are essential management skills.

This course wlll begtn at an Introductory level to provide the necessary mathematical tools needed for the follOwing lectures In statistical methodology.

Topics will tnclude probability, linear equations, hypothesis testing, tests of independence, regression analysts, non-parametric methods, and experimental design and analysis of variance. Some of the Issues related to the design and analysis of surveys and the Interpretation and presentation of statistical results In written reps will also be addressed.

This course will also familiarise students with statistical software.

Text To be advised.

IINGTII42 MANAGEMENT ISSUES lOep

Prerequlsfte Completion of subjects from Group A totalling 40 credit points.

Content

The objective of this course Is to gUide students In critically examining and evaluating some major contemporary Issues confronting managers and to extrapolate contemporary phenomena to future trends. Students will develop an understanding of the origins of management theory and practice, especially tn the 20th century mtlteu. The course will assess the relevance of classical prescriptions for management against the demands of the 1990's and likely requirements of the 21st century.

The nature of management In the latter part of the 20th Century Is InterdiSCiplinary, generalist and highly dyoamlc and the content of the course will reflect this. The content will include current Issues of relevance at the particular time and using those current Issues as a basis. both the form and style of management will be questioned.

This approach will be facilitated by a problem based approach Involvtng techniques such as case studies, student presentations. crisis an? Issues


management and both Individual and group based projects.

Text To be advised.

MNGTII08 BUS1NE8S POLICY lOcp

Prerequisite Completion of subjects totaling 120 credit potnts tncludtng MNGTS42

Content

This unit examines alternative strategies for on-line as well as long tenn decision-making. A number of strands of the M.B.A. course, tncludlng financial management, organisational development and marketing are drawn together. Particular emphaSiS Is placed on the evaluation of the finn's performance. envtronmental analysIs and the planning process.

Test To be advised.

MNGT630 ADVERTISING MANAGEMENT lOep

Prerequisite MNGTS05 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

Content

The overriding objective of this course Is to provtde an approach to the Management of Advertising which Is of analytical value at the same time practical and relevant to planning, decision making and control. The focus Is on decision making. specifically those decisions involved with setting advertising objectives, creating advertising campaigns, developing media strategies and measuring advertising results. Marketing and advertising research techniques, methodolOgies and quantitative models will be dealt with.

The field of advertising will he dealt with and Incorporates advertising planning and decision making, advertising within the organisation and advertising budget decisions. Advertising objectives will be focussed on and topics from the field of attitude research. measurement and scaling will be dealt with as wtll models of communication. persuasion, and market processes. Problems Involved In copy and media decisions will be looked at, as will social. economic and legal Issues that face an advertising decision maker.

Text To be advised

IINGT528 CONSUMER BEHAVIOUR lOcp

Prerequisite MNGTS05 Markettng Concepts and Strategy

Section Six

Content

Postgraduate Subject Deoc,lpllons

The course provides an tnslght tnto the ways In which strategic choices are based on consumer decision-making processes. It tnvolves a study of consumer needs and motivations and consumer psychographlcs. The social and cultural dimensions of consumer behaviour and the various aspects of consumerdectston makingaredealtwlth. Consumer behaviour research Is also covered and the student wlll develop s\dll tn selecttng, evaluating and applying concepts. models. or theories In the field of consumer behaviour.

Text To be advised

ECONIIOII CON'l'EllPORARY ISSUES IN INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS lOcp

Lecturers R.H. Green and D.K. Macdonald

Prerequisite Employment Relations MBA (ECON503]


EKamtnatton Progressive assessment

Content

In this course a number of current issues are analysed In depth. The Accord, competing models of Industrial relations, women and enterprise bargaining, the right to strike and the future of Australian unionism.

Text To be advised

ECONII08 ECONOMICS OF INDUSTRIAL ORGANISATIONS lOep

NOTE: NOT OFFERED IN 1994

Prerequisite Mtcroeconomlcsand Business Dectslons AND Macroeconomics & Policy

Content

This course is deSigned to provtde a basis for understanding government policy measures which affect business organisations and the envtronment in which they operate. Topics covered In the early part of the course Include. concepts underpinning policies aimed at business. the process of bust ness policy formulation and the "natural" objectives of the finn. This Is followed by a discussion of actual polley enactments In areas Including restrictive trade practices, assistance to small business, protection from Imports and foreign Investment.

Text To be advised

Feeulty of Economl .. and Corrmerce

IINGTII20 ElI'lIBCTIVE JlllTERPERSOI'fAL IlANAGEIlEIIT IOcp

Prerequisite Organisational Behaviour (MBA)

Content

To be effective as managers. people need (1) to be effective in their management of Interpersonal relatlons.(2) to be aware of their personal strengths and weaknesses. (3) to know what qualities are required ofthemm different organlsatlonal climates and (4) to detennlne the degree to which their strengths are compatible with organisational requirements. This course concentrates on developing skills In these areas, and to this end. uses a Gestalt framework.

Managers also need to develop an understanding of the causes of personal and organisational ineffectiveness and Inefficiency. and of how to design and use appropriate coping mechanisms.

Accordingly. the course uses an expertentlallearn1ng approach. designed to systematically increase individual self-awareness and self-knowledge through role-plays. psychodrama and dlagnostlc instruments.

Addltlonally studentswlll be expected to understand the various conceptual frameworks which fonn the bases for explaining Individual behaviour. e.g. Gestalt, Rogerian. Behavtourism.

Text To be advised

IINGT618 ENTREPRENEURIAL IlANAGEMEIIT

Prerequisite Nil.

Content

IOcp

This course explores the nature and practice of entrepreneurship. as a vital but often missing and misunderstood management orientation being capableofprovtdingbuslnesswithagreatercapac1ty to achieve. Entrepreneurship has equal relevance to new. small ventures and to larger mature organisations.

Topics covered Include: the role of the entrepreneur in business; entrepreneurs and the managerial role; strategic/entrepreneurial management cf. operations management; analysis of the business life cycle and growth stages and Implications for management; theories of entrepreneurial origins and development; detenninants and measures of entrepreneurtal effectiveness; entrepreneurs as

SectIon stx Postgrlldua. Subjoc! Descriptions

economic catalysts; entrepreneurial characteristics and behaViour; oIintrapreneurshlp" in mature companies; the female entrepreneur.

Text To be advised

IINGTIICM II1IIL\II RESOURCE IIANAGEIIEIIT IOcp

Prerequisite MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour (MBA)

Content

This course examines the theoty. research and practice underlying effective human resources administration In complex organisations. Topics examined Include the following: the personnel function. managlng the personnel unit; job analysis and the determlnatton of human resource requirements; recruitment; selection; testing and Interviewing; training operative personnel; management development; health and safety; employee benefits; perfonnance appraisal and MBO: compensation and other topiCS.

Text To be advised

LAWII02 INDUSTRIAL LAW (MBA) IOcp

Prerequisite Legal Studies (MBA)

Content

The course Is designed to give appreciation of the fundamental principles pertaining to the law applicahle to both the Individual relationship between the employer. trade union and the State. Major topics to be covered Include the lawapplicahle to compensation for Industrial Injury. control of trade union activity. and occupational health and safety.

Text To be advised

IINGTII27 INDUSTRIAL MARKETING IOcp

Prerequisite Marketing Concepts and Strategy

Content

Industrial markets and the Industrial marketing environment Is explained. Organisational buytng and buyer behaviour are dealt with. The student will learn how to fonnulate product planning. channel strategy. marketing communication planning and pricing poliCies. Industrial marketing in the international environment will also be dealt with throughout the course. There Is an emphasis on the case method.

I

I I

I

I

)

I I I \

Text To be advised


IINGTII29 JlllTERNATlOI'fAL IIAR1IETING IOcp

PrerequlslteMNGT505 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

Content

The course wtll famtltarise the student with the multiple environments oftntematlonal business. It inVOlves an explanation of how marketing strategy is affected by political. legal. economic. social. competitive and technolOgical conditions In various national markets. Particular attention will be given to the multinational corporation and marketing practice and the business environment will be explained in many difference contexts.

Text To be advised

LAW601 LEGAL STUDIES (MBA) IOcp

Offered Semester II

Lecturer J. Miller

Prerequisites Nil

Hours 2 seminar hours per week

EJCamination To be advised

Content

Thiscourse provtdesan Introduction to the structure of theAustrallan legal system and to the fundamental prinCiples of commercial law. Topics covered include: The nature of and sources of law; The Court Helrarchy and common law; Legislatures and Statute Law; The Federal system; Precedent, Statutory Interpretation; Contracts. Professional Negligence; Agency; Business Organisations.

Text

Vermeesch. R. and Lindgren. K.E. 1992. Business Law oj Australia. 7th edn.

References

Durham. Maher and Waller 1991. An Introduction to Law. 6th edn. Law Book Co.

1NF0606 MANAGEMENT INFORMATION SYSTEMS IOcp

Prerequisite INF0501 Computing and Infonnation Systems

Content

Thlscourse Is designed to expose potential managers to the variety of management Infonnatton systems available today. The aim Is to emphasise the role of

_n stx Postgraduate Subject Description"

the computer in the planning function. rather than simply In the day-to-day transactton based operational systems. Specific topics covered will include: structure of the MIS. decision making. strategic planning. the role of the microcomputer, decision support systems. expert systems. security and privacy ImpUcations.

Thxt To be advised

IINGT622 IlANAGEIlEIIT AND ORGANISATIONAL DEVELOPllEIIT IOcp


Content

For organisations to get their desired output, they need to educate their employees to do their present jobs effectively and to develop these employees for the future. Several techniques are available to train and develop Individuals ranging from the formal classroom situation to the morelnfonnal self-directed approach.

There are many approaches to the development of organisations: Organisation Development. Industrial Democracy. Their objecttves. assumptions. characteristics and techniques will be covered.

Account will be taken of environmental Influences and constraints. alternative Interventions for bureaucracies. manufacturing plants and Innovative organisations; Individual versus system-based strategies; dlfferent fonns of participation. A prohlem oriented approach is to be taken.

Text To be advised

IINGTII09 IlANAGEMEIIT SCIENCE A IOcp

Prerequisite STAT50 1 Quantitative Methods & Data AnalysiS

Content

The purpose of this course Is to provtde students with a sound understanding of the role management science plays In management decision making. To this end. the course covers a representative sample of management science models. and associated software. Topics covered Include linear programming and its applications. the transportation and assignment problems. inventory theory, Markov analySIS. project management and queuing theory. A major application of at least one technique will be studied.

Text To be advised


MNGT5l0 MANAGEMENT SCIENCE B lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT509 Management Science A

Content

This course covers more advanced topics than those outlined in Management Science A. Its purpose Is to introduce a wider range of operatlons research techniques to management science students. Topics covered willinc1ude advanced linear programming. dynamic and Integer programming. game theory and an overview of simulation. Non-linear programming and optimisation algorithms will also be treated. Students will be expected to present a seminar from the current literature.

Text To be advised

ECON607 MANAGERIAL ECONOMICS (MBA) lOep

PrerequJsfte Microeconomics and Business Decisions AND Macroeconomics and Policy

Content

This Is an applied microeconomics course Involving the application of microeconomics to managerial decision making. The topics covered Include: economic optimisation. theory of consumer behavlouranddemandanalysls; demandesttmatlon. regression analysIs and forecasting. production analysis and management decision making. cost theory and estimation. market structure and prlceoutput decisions. linear programming. managerlal decision making under rlsk and uncertainty. pricing poliCies and practices and capital budgeting.

Text

Pappas. J.L. & Hirschey. M. 1990. Managerial Economics, The Dryden Press.

Peppers. L.C. & Bans. D.G. 1987. Managerial Economics. Prentice Hall.

References

Browning. E.K. & Browning. J.M. 1983. MicroeconomicTheOly andApplications. Ltttle. Brown.

Caves. R. & eta11988. Austro/(anindustry: Structure. Conduct and PerJonnance. Prentice Hall.

Peterson. H.C. & Lewis. W.C. 1990. Managerial Economics, Macmtllan.

Pindyck. S.R. and Rubinfeld. L.D. 1989. Microeconomics, Macmtllan.

Salvatore. D. 1993. Managerial Economics fn Global Economy. McGraw·Htll.

Postgraduate Subject Descriptions

Scherer. F.M. & Rossm. D. 1990. Industrial Market Structure and EconomIc Performance. Houghton MlfiIln Company.

IINOH28 ..... RKETlNO RESEARCH lOep

PrerequIsIte Marketing Concepts and Strategy

Content

The crlttcal role of research In market declslonmaking Is emphasised. Discussion focuses on the strengths and Itmltations of various means of collecting and analysing market information. Examples of market research will be evaluated and participants will be expected to design a market study in association with a local organisation.

Text To be advised

MNGT5l5 NEWENTERPRISE DEVELOPMENT

Prerequisite Nil.

Content

lOep

New Enterprlse Developmentdealswlth enterprlse/ entrepreneurship. concentrating on the business enterprtse. "Enterprise" In New Enterprise Development refers to the process of enterprise, rather than the entity or structure i.e. the business or company. Thus "enterprise" applies to new enterprlses. small enterprises and large enterprlses.

The main areas of Interest are:

1. The creation of new, independent enterprlses. This may come about from the establlshmentof a new enterprlse where none existed before or the purchase of a small business with the objective of growth. This area is characterised by high fatlure rates.

2. Franchising. the creation of semi-Independent enterprlses. The risks of newenterprlse creation can be reduced by follOwing a market-proven formula.

3. Management Buyouts. the creation of Independent enterprises out of existing enterprises. where the management team become the owners. Many management students would have the ambition and ability to own and run-the-show. without wanting to take on the rlsks of starting a business from scratch. Why not join with your present management team and buy the business from the existing owners? Alternatively. why not


seek employment In a business where a buyout is a possibility?

4. Intrapreneurshtp. maintaining and increasing enterprlse in existing enterprises. Generally Intrapreneurshlp refers to maintaining enterprise In large businesses where bureaucracy will exist and hardenlng-of-thearterles Is a continuing rlsk. Is the business you work for enterprising? How would you make it enterprlslng?

A feature of NED Is the production by students ofa business plan or corporate plan for a project within one of the four areas above. The plan should be as realistic as possible.

Text To be advised

MNGT532 OPERATIONS MANAGEMENT A

Prerequisite Ntl

Content

lOep

The Intention of this course is to Introduce the principles of production and operations management. Topics covered will include production planning and control. forecasting. materials management. MRP andJIT. quality control. product and process design. scheduling. capactty planning. Job design and analysis and dealing with capacity and technological change. Studentswtll be expected to have some familiarity with spreadsheet models.

Text To be advised

MNGT524 ORGANISATIONAL CHANGE lOep


Content

Change is an inevitable and Increasing part of organlsational1tfe. Managers. therefore. need to be more skilled and to have more knowledge than ever before In the techniques and methodologies of effective management of organisational change. Technological. Organisational Structure and People changes will be central themes developed in the course. The course alms to enable students to recognise the. factors that drive organisational change and to help them develop approprtate techniques to manage the process of change effectively. No organisational change -in strategy. in structure. or In process will be successful unless Its Impact on pre-existing patterns of Interests. incentives and Interdependencies among the people

SectIon Six Postgraduate Subject Descriptions

responsible for and affected by it are understood and effectively redesigned.

Text To be advised

IINGTII25 ORGANlSATIONAL DESIGN

Prerequtstie Organisational Behaviour (MBA)

Content

lOep

This course examines the relationships between the design of the organisation and varlous structural characteristics such as technology. size and formalisation. Thetmpltcation Is that attainable poltcles and strategies assume an appropriate Ht between the design of the organisation and the environment. Therefore change In structure Is considered in tenns of the nature and level of diversity In the environment and the consequent levels of differentiation and integration that are necessary for the organisation to pursue set goals In order to maintain and/or increase effectiveness.

Text To be advised

MNGTII39) RESEARCH PROJECT MNGT540)

lOep 20ep

Candidates may enrol In Research Project In the final year of the course. although earlier consideration of their proposed topiC Is advised. They should seek potential topics from appropriate members of the academic staff. The selection of a supervtsor Is. In the main. based on mutual agreement between student and the lecturer whose expertise and interest are appropriate. Candidates are expected to take the initiative In this matter.

Candidates shall present a proposal for constructive crlticlsm by their supeIVIsor and will be required to provide a typed research report. During the semester students will also be working with their supervisor. Candidates enrolled In Research Project should obtain a copy of Information on SupeIVIslon and Examination of MBA Research Project from the Department of Management.

Text To be advised

MNGT53l RETAIL MANAGEMENT lOep

Prerequisite MNGTS05 Marketing Concepts and Strategy

Content

The course is designed to explain all the activities which result In the offerlng for sale of goods and/or seIVIces to individuals and/or organisations for


purposes of ultimate consumption. A conceptual model of retalling wlll be presented and different levels of the model studied. These levels will encompass the foundations of retalllngwhich Include retaiUng history. strategy. external retatl restraints and retaUing research. Store development which encompasses financial planning. site selection. store design and store organisation will be dealt with. Other levels of the model consist of merchandiSing. personnel. promotion. customer setvice and control. MerchandiSing encompasses planning. resources negotiation. pricing. distribution and control. Personnel deals with staffing. the development and management of salespeople. AdvertiSing. sales promotion and retail display fall under retail promotion while customer setvice Includes credit management. Retail control encompasses retail security and operations control. Retail appltcatlons and trends are also studied. Throughout the course there is an emphasis on the case method and experientlallearntng.

Text To be advised

MNGTS14 SIMULATION METHODS lOcp

Prerequisite Quantitative Methods & Data Analysis

Content

Simulation is the imitation of the operation of a real world process or systems over time. This course provides an Introductory treatment of the concepts and methods of discrete event simulation modelling. The popular simulation language of"SIMAN"will be used by students to implement examples utilising the techniques introduced during the course.

Text To be advised

MNGTS17 SMALL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT515 New Enterprise Development OR Entrepreneurial Management

Content

This course focuses on the process of and the problems associated with managing small enterprises through turbulent youth Into the later stages of maturity. The objective Is to provide students with greater awareness, and improved understanding of the nature of small business ownership/management. The subject will adopt a holistic approach derived from the tdentlfication and analysis of the components and dynamics of

_nSlx Po.tgradua .. Subject DHcriptlonl

the management task within a small enterprise. Two maJorandcontenninous matters to be explored are the challenge of progressively Introducing 'professlonar management into a growing finn without destroying its entrepreneurial spirit. momentum and vitality. The course is built on and around issues deriving from the two major distinguishing factors of small firms. (1) their small size. and (2) owner/management.

Analysts of the management process of small (cf. large) firm. and the notable characteristics of small enterprises which shape the features of the management task; the features of achieving enterprises (key performance criteria. foundations for success); the growth v sUIVlval dilemma; entrepreneurial and professional (i.e. administrative and operational) management; the challenges of organisational renewal and creative 'disintegration' for competitive advantage; planning for survival and growth In small enterprises; small firms In the Australian economy and society.

Text To be advised

ECONII09 STATISTICS - M.B.A. lOcp

Prerequisite Quantttattve Methods & Data AnalysIs

Content

This course builds on the statistical and mathematical techniques developed In Quantitative Methods and Data Analysis. It Is an advanced course In appl1ed statistics including topiCS In hypothesis testtng. non-parametric techniques. multiple regression and applied econometric techniques. experimental design and analysis and BayeSian decision theory.

Text To be advised

INFOII03 SYSTEMS ANALYSIS lOcp

Prerequisite Computers and Information Systems

Content

Structured analysIs and design methodology will be Introduced. Specific topics include: charactertstics of a system. information systems. the role of the systems analyst. the system life cycle. intetview techntques. report writing. documentation techniques (data flow diagrams. data dictionary. flowcharts. etc.), cost/beneftt analysts. implementation techntques.

Text To be advised


INF0604 SYSTEMS DESIGN

Prerequisite INF0503 Systems Analysis

Content

lOcp

Using the techniques Introduced In Systems Analysis students will work In smaU groups to design and implement small on-ltne computer based tnfonnation processing systems. Specific topics Include: ftledeslgn techniques. form design. security controls and backup. system testing and Implementation. the on-going maintenance of systems.

Text To be advised

STAT304 TIME SERIES ANALYSIS IOcp

Prerequisite Quantttattve Methods & Data AnalYSiS

Content

This course is about the theory and practice ofTtme Series Analysis - the analysis of data collected at regular InteIVals in time (or space). Topics covered Include: stationary processes. ARMA models. models for periodic phenomena. analysis using MINITAB and other TIme Series packages.

Text

Cryer. J.D. 1986. TIme Series Analysis. Duxbury Press.

MNGTS34 TOPICS IN COMPUTING AND QUANTITATIVE STUDIES lOcp

Prerequisite Quantitattve Methods & Data Analysis

MNGTS3S TOPICS IN ENTREPRENEURSHIP AND SMALL BUSINESS MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequisite New Enterprise Development OR Small Business Management

Text To be advised

MNGTS38 TOPICS IN HUMAN RESOURCE MANAGEMENT lOcp

PrereqUisite Organisattonal BehaViour (MBA)

Text To be advised.

MNGTS37 TOPICS IN MARKETING MANAGEMENT lOcp

Prerequisite Marketing Concepts and Strategy

Text To be advised

Section Six Postgraduate Subject Descriptions

LAWII03 TRADE PllACTlCES AND PRICING LAW lOcp

Prerequisite Legal Studies (MBA)

Content

The course dea1swith the operation of the restrictive trade practfces provisions of the Trade Practices Act 1975, that is, contracts arrangements and understandings lessening competition. monopolisation. exclusive dealing. resale price maintenance. price discrimination and mergers. The course also deals with Federal and State pricing regulation. and its constitutional basis.

Text To be advised

IINGTIIIS VENTURE CAPITAL lOcp

Prerequisite MNGT515 New Enterprise Development OR MNGT516 Entrepreneurial Management OR COMM502 Business Finance

Content

The American venture capital tndustry can trace tts beginnings to post World War II Industrlal expansion. when the savings of the growing middle class were channelled back into equities. A role model was provided by General Doriot. a Hruvard Business School professor. who fonned American Research and Development Company to back business through a blend of entrepreneurship, inVention and capital. ARD helped launch Digital Equipment Corporation with $US70,OOO, an Investment thatgrewtn value to beyond $US500 mtllion. In 1984 American venture capitalists disbursed about $US3 btllion to portfoliO companies. The largest American venture capitalists manage investment pools of more than $US300 mtllion.

The Australian venture capital indusby has grown from around $25 mtllion In 1982 to $250 mtllion In 1986. It suffered severely In the stockmarket break of October 1987. The industry has now experienced most of a business cycle. from boom to bust. Where could it. should it or will It go from here, are questions to be considered by students.

Text To be adVised

ECON60S WAGES AND EMPLOYMENT lOcp

Lecturer B.L.J. Gordon

Prerequisite Microeconomics and Business Decisions (ECON502). This course will not be available to students who have previously gained passes in ECON206 or ECON207.

Faculty of EconoMcl end Commerce

HolUS '!\vo lecture hours per week.

Content

The purpose of this course is to offer an introduction to the multi-faceted perspectives of the economics of labour markets and wage detenmnation. Topics include: alternate models of the labour market; analysts of the demand for and supply of labour services; human capital theory; theories of wage detenmnation; bargaining theory and wages; wage structure differentials; the wage share in national Income.

References

Kaufman. B.E. 1991. The EronomicsofLabor Markets ond Labor Relations. 3rd edn. Dryden.

King. J.E. 1990. Labour economics: an Australian Perspective. Macmtllan.

Norris. K. 1993. The Economics of Australian Labour Markets. 3rd edn. Longman Cheshire.

Whitfield. K. 1987. The Australian Labour Market Harper and Row.

McConnell. C.R and Brue. S.L. 1992. Contemporary Labor economics. 4th edn. McGraw·Hm.

ECON504 WORKPLACE INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS IOcp

Lecturers D.K. Macdonald and R.H. Green

Prerequisite Employment Relations MBA (ECON503)

HolUs '!\vo hours per week

&aminatton Progressive assessment

Content

This course provides comprehensive treatment of various aspects of Industrial relations at the workplace level such as managerial strategies. union workplace organisation. restructuring. joint consultative arrangements and workplace perfonnance.

Text To be advised

MNGT544 POLITICAL INSTITUTIONS AND PUBUC MANAGEMENT IOcp

Prerequisfte MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour (MBA)

HoLUs To be advised

Content

A study of the structure of government. the polttlcal Institutions and processes and current Issues In

SectIon Six POltgredU." Subject DelCrlptlons

public management. The course wtll focus on the Australian Federal Government but attention will also be given to problems at the State and Local levels. Relevant comparative Institutions. processes and Issues w1ll also be examined.

Topic OutlIne

• Federalism and the Australian System of Government

• The Institutions of Government

• The Political Process

• •

The Legislative Process

The Executive Branch

• Theories of Organisation and Bureaucracy

• Public Sector and Prtvate Sector Organisation

• Publ1c enterprise and Privatisation

• Modes of Decentralisation

• Planning. Co-ordination. Implementation. Delegation and Control

• Accountablltty and Responsiveness

• Administrative Ethics

• Maladministration and the Redress of Grievances

MNGT543 ISSUES IN PUBLIC POLICY IOcp

Prerequisite MNGT502 Organisational Behaviour (MBA)

Hours To be advised

Content

A study of public policyprocess.tssues management. lobbying and the role of business organisations and other interest groups In the formation and Implementation ofpubltc pol1cles. Modem theories and techniques of poltcy analysis will be assessed and Issues will be discussed with a comparative outlook. Studentswill be expected to select a relevant pubUc poltcy issue for detatled examination and for seminar presentation.

Topic Outline

•

• • •

The changing environment of business and the development of public pollcy as a new dimension of management

The nature of public policy

The public policy process

Business - Government relations

• •

•

Faculty of EconoMcs and Commerce

Influencing the public agenda

Public policy and strategic management

-Issues Management

-Corporate Political Strategies

The social context of publ1c policy

business ethics

corporate soctal responslbfltty

environmentalism

consumerism

equal employment opportunity

international dimensions

Section Six Postgraduate Subject Descriptions

Documents

The University o/Newcastle Campus Layout · 2010-12-06 · The University o/Newcastle Campus Layout AtIorlglnaJ Education Centre· WoIlotuka Academic OffIce Block Advanced Technology